Purcellville Roller Rink Alterations IFB PSR-09-02

TOWN OF PURCELLVILLE
Purchasing Division, 130 East Main Street

Purcellville, Virginia 20132
T: (540) 751-2314
INVITATION FOR BIDS
IFB SOLICITATION #: PSR-09-02
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
PURCELLVILLE ROLLER RINK

ALTERATIONS (PHASE 2)
(Purcellville Rolling Skating Rink, 250 South Nursery Avenue, Purcellville, VA 20132)
SWSG Shaffer, Wilson, Sarver & Gray, P.C.
Architecture and Engineering

1821 Michael Faraday Drive, Suite 302 Tel (703) 471-6803
Reston, Virginia 20190 Fax (703) 742-3975
MBP McDonough Bolyard Peck

Construction Management
3040 Williams Drive Suite 300 Tel (703) 641-9088
Fairfax, VA 22031 Fax (703) 641-8965
Town of Purcellville Purcellville, VA
Roller Rink Alterations IFB# PSR 09-02
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION ZERO BIDDING DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS

Section 1.0 Instructions to Bidders
A. Invitation For Bid (IFB) – Advertisement
B. Invitation Letter
Form of Tender/Bid Form-Exhibit A
Schedule of Prices & Rates-Exhibit B
C. Instructions to Bidders
Section 2.0 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders
A. Supplementary Instructions to Bidders
B. Bid Bond
C. Payment Bond
D. Performance Bond
E. Notice of Award
F. Notice to Proceed
G. Change Order
Section 3.0 Contract Agreement
Section 4.0 General Contract Terms and Conditions
Section 5.0 General Conditions and Instructions to Bidders
Section 6.0 Supplementary Conditions to the Contract
Section 7.0 Appendices:
Appendix-A: Schedule of Work
Appendix-B: Bidder References
Appendix-C: Addendum Acknowledgment
Appendix-D: Virginia Contractor’s License
Appendix-E: General Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens
Appendix F: Schedule of Proposed Subcontractors
Appendix-G: Bid Bond
Appendix-H: Payment Bond
Appendix-I: Performance Bond
Appendix J: Notice of Award
Appendix K: Notice to Proceed
Appendix L: Change Order
Appendix M: Warranty Requirements
Section 8.0 Tree Preservation Procedures & Specifications
DIVISION ONE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01050 Bidding Process
Section 01100 Summary
Section 01110 General
Section 01230 Alternates
Section 01250 Contract Modification Procedures
Section 01270 Unit Prices
Section 01290 Payment Procedures
Section 01310 Project Management and Coordination
Section 01311 Project Meetings
Section 01320 Construction Progress Documentation
Section 01330 Submittal Procedures
Section 01351 Special Procedures for Historic Treatment
Section 01380 Photographic Documentation
Section 01420 References
SWSG PN: 09-080 Phase 2 Page 1

Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls

Section 01510 Safety
Section 01600 Product Requirements
Section 01700 Execution Requirements
Section 01711 Field Engineering
Section 01721 Water Intrusion and Moisture Control
Section 01731 Cutting and Patching
Section 01732 Selective Demolition
Section 01770 Closeout Procedures
Section 01782 Operation and Maintenance Data
Section 01820 Demonstration and Training
DIVISION TWO SITE CONSTRUCTION

Section 02300 Earthwork
Section 02510 Water Distribution
Section 02552 Ground-Loop, Heat-Pump Piping
Section 02920 Lawns and Grasses
DIVISION THREE CONCRETE

Section 03301 Cast-In-Place Concrete (Limited Applications)
DIVISION FOUR MASONRY

Section 04220 Concrete Unit Masonry
DIVISION FIVE METALS

Section 05310 Steel Decking
Section 05521 Pipe and Tube Railings
DIVISION SIX WOOD AND PLASTICS

Section 06100 Rough Carpentry
Section 06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry
DIVISION SEVEN THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 07210 Building Insulation
Section 07610 Sheet Metal Roofing
Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Section 07920 Joint Sealants
DIVISION EIGHT DOOR AND WINDOWS

Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors
Section 08331 Overhead Coiling Doors
Section 08710 Door Hardware
DIVISION NINE FINISHES

Section 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies
Section 09725 Decorative Epoxy Flooring
Section 09910 Painting
DIVISION TEN SPECIALTIES

Section 10155 Toilet Compartments
Section 10200 Louvers and Vents
Section 10520 Fire Protection Specialties
Section 10801 Toilet Accessories

DIVISION TWELVE FURNISHINGS

Section 12356 Solid Surfacing Countertops
DIVISION THIRTEEN SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Section 13915 Fire Suppression Piping
DIVISION FIFTEEN MECHANICAL

Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Section 15055 Motors
Section 15060 Hangers and Supports
Section 15075 Mechanical Identification
Section 15081 Duct Insulation
Section 15083 Pipe Insulation
Section 15110 Valves
Section 15122 Meters and Gages
Section 15140 Domestic Water Piping
Section 15150 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Section 15181 Hydronic Piping
Section 15185 Hydronic Pumps
Section 15410 Plumbing Fixtures
Section 15415 Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers
Section 15430 Plumbing Specialties
Section 15745 Water-Source Heat Pumps
Section 15815 Metal Ducts
Section 15820 Duct Accessories
Section 15838 Power Ventilators
Section 15855 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Section 15900 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Section 15940 Sequence of Operations
Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
DIVISION SIXTEEN ELECTRICAL

Section 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Section 16075 Electrical Identification
Section 16120 Conductors and Cables
Section 16130 Raceways and Boxes
Section 16140 Wiring Devices
Section 16410 Circuit Breakers
Section 16442 Panelboards
Section 16491 Fuses

SECTION 1.0
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Sec. 1.0-1
IFB# PSR-09-02
A. INVITATION TO BID – ADVERTISEMENT
INVITATION FOR BID

February 23, 2010
Purcellville Roller Skating Rink Alterations
The Town of Purcellville is accepting competitive sealed bids from qualified contractors for the
Purcellville Roller Skating Rink Alterations in the Town of Purcellville, VA. Sealed Bids will be
accepted until March 30, 2010 at 2:00 p.m., at the Town of Purcellville located at 130 E. Main
Street, Purcellville, Virginia 20132. Bids must be clearly marked on the outside of the envelope
“Sealed Bid – IFB# PSR-09-02 Purcellville Roller Skating Rink Alterations”. Bids will then be
publicly opened and read. Bids received after the specified time will not be considered. A
Contractor wishing to withdraw his bid shall give notice in writing of his claim of right to
withdraw his bid within two business days after the conclusion of the bid opening procedure and
shall submit original work papers with such notice.
A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held on March 09, 2010 at 10:00 a.m. in the
Purcellville Town Hall, 130 E. Main Street, Purcellville, Virginia.
The project includes but is not limited to restroom upgrades, geothermal HVAC system, electric
service, water service, fire protection and interior finishes. All work with this project and as
noted in the construction document is to be in compliance with Virginia Department of Historic
Resources requirements, which complies with the Secretary of the Interior's Standards for
Rehabilitation. The Scope of Work is more fully set forth in the Contract Documents. Interested
bidders may download the Invitation for Bid (IFB) at the website www.purcellvilleva.com or
contact Public Utilities Department, at (540) 751-2334 to obtain a copy of the Contract
Documents. Questions regarding the Bidding Documents should be directed in writing to:
Capital Projects and Engineering Manager, Town of Purcellville, 130 East Main Street,
Purcellville, VA 20132.
General Contractors may receive one set of Contract Documents at no charge from the Town
Hall offices. Additional sets of the Contract Documents may be obtained from Town of
Purcellville at Purcellville Copy for the actual costs to reproduce the documents. Purcellville
Copy is located at 125 Hirst Road, Suite 3-A, Purcellville, VA 20132, 540-338-7527; Business
hours are Monday through Friday from 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM. Bidding Documents can be
examined in the Town of Purcellville Town Office, 130 East Main Street, Purcellville, VA. The
following plan rooms have received sets of Bidding Documents:
McGraw Hill Construction / Dodge Plan Room

9 North 3rd St
Richmond, VA 23219
Sec. 1.0-2
IFB# PSR-09-02
The Builders Exchange Association of Virginia
3207 Hermitage Road
Richmond, VA 23227
804-353-2788
B. INVITATION LETTER
Reference: Bid No. IFB NO. PSR-09-02
February 23, 2010
Ladies and Gentlemen:
We are pleased to invite your best tender for carrying out the Purcellville Roller Skating Rink
Alterations in accordance with the following:
1. General
1.1 Definitions
In this Tender, the words and expressions listed hereunder shall have the
meaning assigned to them respectively:
OWNER: shall mean the Town of Purcellville
ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER: shall mean the consultant assigned by the

OWNER to review and approve CONTRACTOR'S submittals and to perform
construction observation of the WORK.
SERVICES OR SERVICE OR WORKS OR WORK: shall mean Purcellville

Roller Skating Rink Alterations.
CONTRACTOR: shall mean the successful Bidder assigned by the OWNER to

carry out the WORK.
CONTRACT: shall mean the eventual Agreement to be signed between the

OWNER & CONTRACTOR for the performance of the WORK.
1.2 All Bids shall be prepared and submitted by and at the cost of the Bidder, hence
all costs associated with preparation and submission of the Bid shall be borne by
the Bidder.
1.3 All Bids must be typed.
1.4 OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, the lowest Bid need not
Sec. 1.0-3
IFB# PSR-09-02
necessarily be accepted.
1.5 CONTRACTOR shall carry out the WORK within the same time frame allowed
in the approved WORK Schedule, which shall conform to the following
requirements:
Notice to Proceed - 04/14/10
Activities will occur in two major phases.
Phase 1 Geothermal field installation - 05/18/10 to 08/13/10

Work will proceed to face of building with geothermal lines properly
protected, all grades restored, all surfaces restored and the entire parking
lot will be reopened for use. There will be no interior work conducted
during Phase 1 as the Roller Rink will be occupied and in use.
Phase 1 Submittal duration – 04/15/10 to 05/15/10
Phase 1 Substantial Completion – 08/13/10
Phase 1 Final Completion - 08/14/10 to 08/17/10
No on site work will occur during the Babe Ruth event - 08/18/10 to 08/28/10
Phase 2 Remainder of work - 09/01/10 to 12/01/10

Phase 2 Final completion - 12/02/10 to 12/17/10
1.6 Bid shall be accompanied by a Bid Bond in the amount of 5% of the Contract
value. Bid Bond shall be prepared in the format given in Section 7.
1.7 Bidder shall address inquiries, if any, in writing to Capital Projects &
Engineering Manager, who alone is empowered to clarify such inquiries; not
later than 5 days before the Bid closing date.
Capital Projects & Engineering Manager

130 East Main Street
Purcellville, VA 20132
1.8 A mandatory pre-bid meeting is scheduled for March 09 at 10:00 a.m. in

Purcellville Town Hall, 130 East Main Purcellville, VA 20132.
2. Validity of Bid
The Bids shall remain valid for a period of Ninety (90) days, commencing on the date of
opening the bids. If the bidder withdraws their offer before expiration of the said period,
without the written authorization of the OWNER, the amount of the Bid Bond will be
forfeited to the OWNER.
The successful Bidder, within a period of fifteen (15) days from the date of the
OWNER's acceptance and approval of their bid, shall be requested to sign the contract
and to submit the Payment and Performance Bonds and Certificate of Insurance as
Sec. 1.0-4
IFB# PSR-09-02
required in the relevant article of the contract. Failure to do so will cause the Bid to be
considered withdrawn. In this case, the initial Bid Bond shall be forfeited to the
OWNER.
The OWNER has the indisputable right to accept or reject any offer, or part of any offer,
or to cancel the Bid and stop the bidding without giving any justification.
Under no circumstances shall a bidder whose bid has not been accepted be entitled to
any claim for compensation.
A Contractor wishing to withdraw his bid shall give notice in writing of his claim of
right to withdraw his bid within two business days after the conclusion of the bid
opening procedure and shall submit original work papers with such notice.
3. Schedule of Work
CONTRACTOR shall carry out the Purcellville Roller Skating Rink Alterations as
further described in: Appendix-A, Schedule of Work, the Project Specifications, and the
Construction Documents.
4. Tender Document
Bidders are requested to collect a copy of the Tender Document, comprising the
following, from the Department of Public Works at the Town of Purcellville.
Section 1: Instructions to Bidders
Exhibit A: Form of Tender and Bid Form
Exhibit B: Schedule of Prices and Rates
Section 2: Supplementary Instructions to Bidders
Section 3: Contract Agreement
Section 4: General Contract Terms and Conditions
Section 5: General Conditions and Instructions to Bidders
Section 6: Supplementary Conditions to the Contract
Section 7: Appendix A through M:
Appendix A: Schedule of Work
Appendix B: Bidders References
Sec. 1.0-5
IFB# PSR-09-02
Appendix C: Addendum Acknowledgment
Appendix D: Virginia Contractor's License
Appendix E: General Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens
Appendix F: Schedule of Proposed Subcontractors
Appendix G: Bid Bond
Appendix H: Payment Bond
Appendix I: Performance Bond
Section 8: Tree Preservation Procedures & Specifications
5. Site Visit
The Bidder shall visit the site and shall be responsible for obtaining all information
required for the submission of the bid. The Bidder shall carefully examine the Tender
Documents and satisfy themselves as to the risks, obligations, and responsibilities to be
undertaken in the contract. All costs in connection with the visit to and inspection of the
site and the preparation of the Bid shall be borne by the Bidder.
6. Particular Requirements
6.1 Preparation of Proposal
6.1.1 Bids shall be prepared using the blank copies of the "Form of Tender", attached
hereto as Exhibit-A, (to be retyped on Bidder's Letter Head) and the "Schedule of
Prices and Rates", attached hereto as Exhibit-B, as provided in the Tender
Documents. Bids shall be submitted as follows: one original and four copies.
6.1.2 The Bid shall be submitted on the basis of the exact compliance by Bidder with all
terms and conditions of the Tender Documents.
7. Bid Submission
Bid shall include, as a minimum, the following:
Sec. 1.0-6
IFB# PSR-09-02
a. Duly completed Form of Tender retyped on Bidder's letterhead, and duly completed Bid
Form, in accordance with the format given in Exhibit-A
b. Schedule of Prices and Rates-Exhibit-B
c. Bid Bond
d. Schedule of Work, Appendix-B, work shall be completed as outlined in the Time for
Completion of Base Bid Work
e. References, Appendix-B
f. Duly Completed Addendum Acknowledgment, Appendix-C
g. Virginia Contractor's License, reference Section 7, appendix D and provide a current

and valid copy of your firm’s Virginia Contractor’s License.
h. Schedule of Proposed Subcontractors, reference Section 7, appendix F.
i. Contact person and information
8. Consideration of Offers
The OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all offers, to waive technicalities and
irregularities, advertise for new bids, or to proceed to do the work otherwise in the
OWNER's sole discretion, if it is in the judgment of the OWNER, as to its best interests.
The Bidder shall not be entitled to any indemnity with respect to any claims, demands,
proceedings, damage costs, charges and expenses, whatsoever arising out of such rejection.
Offers shall be considered irregular and may, without limitation, be rejected for, without
limitation, the following reasons:
a. If the Schedule of Prices and Rates does not identify a price for each item.
b. If there are any unauthorized additions, conditional or alternate bids or percentage

increase or decrease in the Bid price or irregularities of the kind which tend to make the
proposal incomplete, indefinite or ambiguous as to its meaning.
c. If any required documents are missing.
Bidders may be disqualified and their offers rejected, without limitation, for the following
reasons:
a. If more than one Bid for the project is submitted for an individual firm, partnership or
corporation under the same name or different name.
b. If there is evidence of any collusion between Bidders.
c. Falsification of any documents or price submitted with the bid.

Sec. 1.0-7
IFB# PSR-09-02
One original and four (4) copies of the completed Bid shall be submitted before 02:00 p.m.
on March 30, 2010 in a sealed envelope and should be addressed as follows:
Town of Purcellville
Attention: Public Works Department

Title: Purcellville Roller Skating Rink Alterations
Reference: IFB # PSR-09-02
Sec. 1.0-8
IFB# PSR-09-02
EXHIBIT A
(to be typed on Bidder’s Letterhead)
Form of Tender
Attention: Public Works Director
Subject: Invitation for Bids: Purcellville Roller Skating Rink Alterations
Reference: Bid No. IFB NO. PSR-09-02
Ladies and Gentlemen:
We have received and examined the Tender Document concerning the subject Works for the
Purcellville Roller Skating Rink Alterations for the Town of Purcellville. We have made all the
necessary inquiries concerning the Works and have familiarized ourselves with the above-
mentioned documents.
We confirm that we have visited the site of the Works and that we have examined all documents
necessary for the proper performance of the contract. The Work includes but is not limited to the
restroom upgrades, geothermal HVAC system, electric service, water service, fire protection and
interior finishes.
We have examined all sections of the Tender Document and Addenda for the Purcellville Roller
Skating Rink Alterations. We, the undersigned, hereby offer to provide all Works\Services
covered in the Tender Document for the total sum of US Dollars as indicated below and in
Exhibit B:
Base Bid:
____________________________________________________________ ($___________)
(in words) (in numbers)
Alternate: (Reference Section 01230 - Alternate Prices)
____________________________________________________________ ($___________)
Unit Price: (Reference Section 01270 - Unit Prices)
____________________________________________________________ ($___________)
Sec. 1.0-9
IFB# PSR-09-02
We agree to the conditions stated in the documents cited above, and we hereby submit the
required Proposal in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders.
We agree to furnish all designs, material, labor, and supervision necessary to complete the
Works in accordance with the Tender Document, Specifications and Drawings.
Enclosed herewith, for your consideration, are Schedule of Prices & Rates, Bid Bond and other
attachments, which, by this reference, are incorporated herein into form part of this Bid.
If awarded the Contract, we shall commence the work within seven (7) calendar days of the
issuance of the Notice to Proceed and will complete the work described in the Contract under
“Completion of Work”.
We agree to abide by this Proposal for 90 Days from the IFB closing date.
We understand that the Town of Purcellville the right within its sole discretion to accept or reject
all or any part of this Bid, for any reason(s) whatsoever.
Sincerely,
Name of Bidder
By: Duly Authorized Officer
Date:
VA Contractor’s License No. ________________________________

[Corporate Seal]
Sec. 1.0-10
IFB# PSR-09-02
EXHIBIT A
BID FORM
Time for Completion of Base Bid – Purcellville Roller Skating Rink Alterations: Contractor
shall commence work on site within seven (7) consecutive calendar days after receipt of Notice
to Proceed and to achieve completion as noted below.
Unanticipated Delay:
Due to requirements of Owner, at his discretion, the Owner may request one or more delay days
in work. Cost per diem for delay of work requested by Owner shall be: $300.00.
Liquated Damages:
The Contractor shall pay the Owner $300.00 per calendar day in liquidated damages if the actual
completion date of the work extends beyond the “Time of Completion of the Work” date
specified in the Contract. Cost for liquated damages will be deducted from the sum due to the
Contractor prior to final payment.
Sec. 1.0-11
IFB# PSR-09-02
EXHIBIT B
SCHEDULE OF PRICES AND RATES
Preamble:
In consideration of the complete execution of the WORK to the satisfaction of the

OWNER, the OWNER shall pay the CONTRACTOR and the CONTRACTOR
agrees as full compensation for same the CONTRACT PRICE as given herein
Exhibit A.
All prices and rates are fully inclusive of each and every item, service, equipment or
facility as may be required to provide and perform the WORKS covered under the
CONTRACT and in full compliance with the CONTRACT requirements.
The Unit rates as provided in Exhibit-A and Section 01270 – Unit prices are fixed
for the duration of the Agreement and are all inclusive. There will be no other
reimbursement for any other cost whatsoever.
All prices and rates shall remain firm without any escalation, whatsoever, until the
completion of WORK.
Each item shall be priced separately, due allowance being made in the quoted rate
for full compliance with the Tender Documents.
All prices and rates are to apply in executing the WORK in large or small quantities,
to any shaped section, in difficult or easy situations and at any elevation. OWNER
will not entertain any claim as to the proportions of the Work actually falling into
these categories.
C. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
The Instructions to Bidders are set forth in the American Institute of Architects
Document A701-1997 Instructions entitled "Instructions to Bidders", containing
Articles 1 through 8 and are hereby made part of this Specification to the same
extent as if bound herein.
These Instructions to Bidders shall become part of the Contract and shall apply to
the Contractor and all subcontractors and suppliers.
END OF SECTION
Sec. 1.0-12
IFB# PSR-09-02
SECTION 2.0
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

Sec. 2.0-1
IFB# PSR-09-02
A. SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
These Supplementary Instructions to Bidders contain modifications and additions to the AIA
Document A701-1997 Instructions to Bidders referenced in Section 1. Where no part of the
Instructions to Bidders is modified or voided by the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the
unaltered provisions shall remain in effect.
These Supplementary Instructions to Bidders shall become part of the Contract.
First page:
ADD project name and location: “Purcellville Roller Rink Alterations (Phase 2), 250 South
Nursery Avenue, Purcellville, VA 20132”
ADD Owner’s name and address: “Town of Purcellville, 130 East Main Street, Purcellville, VA
20132”
ADD Architect’s name and address: “Shaffer Wilson Sarver & Gray (SWSG), 1821 Michael
Faraday Drive, Suite 302, Reston, VA 20190”
1.3 ADD the words "or Owner" after "Architect".
1.6 ADD to end "Alternate Bids must be submitted in accordance with Town of Purcellville
Purchasing Regulations."
3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-Bidders
3.1.1 Delete the word "Deposit" from the first sentence. Delete the last three sentences.
3.2.1 Replace the word "Architect" with the word "Owner".
3.3.2 Replace the words "Architect" and "Architect's" with the words "Owner" and "Owner's".
3.4.3 Replace the word "four" with the words "four business".
4.1.1 ADD “Reference Section 1.0 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, EXIHIBIT A.”
ADD “4.1.8 Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the Town of Purcellville Purchasing
Regulations, which are incorporated herein by reference."
4.4.1, 4.4.2, 4.4.3, 4.4.4 "Delete Paragraphs and Substitute 4.4.1 with the following: "Bids may
Sec. 2.0-2
IFB# PSR-09-02
be withdrawn only in accordance with Paragraph 200.18 of the Town of Purcellville Purchasing
Regulations."
5.3.1 ADD after the word "qualified" the words "and responsive" in the first sentence.
6.3.1 Delete the words "through the Architect".
6.3.2 Delete the words "Architect and".
6.3.3 Replace the first reference to the "Architect" with the word "Owner" and delete the words
"either". Delete the words "or Architect" in the first and second sentence.
6.3.4 Replace the words "and Architect have" with the word "has". Delete the second reference
to "and Architect".
7.1.1 ADD to the end of the first sentence "but must be surety licensed to conduct business in the
Commonwealth of Virginia and acceptable to the Owner."
7.1.3 Delete Paragraph in its entirety.
7.2.1 and 7.2.2 "Delete paragraphs and Substitute the following: "The Bidder shall deliver the
required bonds to the Owner not later than the date of execution of the Contract. Such bonds
shall be in the form attached hereto."
Omit article 8 contents and ADD “Reference Section 3.0 Contract Agreement”.
ADD the following;
ARTICLE 9 BID SECURITY

9.1.1 Each bid must be accompanied by (1) cash; or (2) a Cashier's Check or a certified Check of
the Bidder in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the bid, made payable to the Town of
Purcellville or; (3) a bidder's bond on the Bid Bond Form provided in the Tender Document, or
on a similar form which materially complies with said Bid Bond form, in the amount of five
percent (5%) of his bid. PLEASE NOTE: The amount of a bid bond shall not exceed 5% of the
amount bid pursuant to Sec. 2.2-4336. For purposes of this provision, the amount of the bid shall
be the total of base bids or the alternative bid, whichever is greater. The Bid Bond shall be
issued by a surety company licensed to conduct business in Virginia and acceptable to the
Owner.
9.1.2 Said Bid security shall be returned to all but the three lowest responsive and responsible
Bidders and remaining security will be returned within 48 hours after the Owner and the
successful Bidder have executed the contract. If no contract has been awarded or the Bidder has
not been notified of the acceptance of his bid, within ninety (90) days of the bid opening, the
Bidder may withdraw his bid and request the return of his bid security. If, at the Owner's
request, the Bidder agrees to extend and maintain his bid beyond the specified 90 days, his bid
security will not be returned until 48 hours after the contract has been executed. The Successful
Sec. 2.0-3
IFB# PSR-09-02
Bidder, upon his failure or refusal to execute the Contract within ten (10) days after he has
received notice of the acceptance of his Bid, shall forfeit to the Owner the security deposited
with his bid, as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal. Such forfeiture shall be the lesser
of (i) the difference between the bid for which the bond was written and the bid of the next low
responsive and responsible bidder to this IFB, to whom a contract is awarded; or (ii) the face
amount of the bid bond.
9.2 All Bidders shall provide evidence of a certificate of registration as required by Chapter 11 of
Title 54.1 Virginia Code Ann. before their bids will be considered. If a bid is $70,000 or more,
or if the Contractor's annual volume is $500,000 or more, the Contractor must be licensed as a
"Class A Contractor." If a bid is $1,500 or more but less than $70,000, the Contractor must be
licensed as at least a "Class B Contractor."
The Bidder shall place on the outside of the envelope containing the bid and shall place in the
bid, at the place provided, whichever of the following notations is appropriate:
"Licensed Class A Virginia Contractor No. _______________"
"Licensed Class B Virginia Contractor No. _______________"
"Contract is less than $1,500 therefore licensure is not required."
9.3 SITE CONDITIONS AND CONDITIONS OF THE WORK
9.3.1 Each Bidder must acquaint himself thoroughly with the character and nature of the work to
be done. Each Bidder furthermore must make a careful examination of the site of the work and
inform himself fully as to the difficulties to be encountered in the performance of the work, the
facilities for delivering, storing and placing materials and equipment, and other conditions
relating to construction and labor.
9.3.2 The successful Bidder assumes all risk as to the nature of the soil or subsurface conditions
which underlie the work or are adjacent thereto, or difficulties that may be due to any
unfavorable conditions that may be encountered in the work, whether apparent on surface
inspection or disclosed after construction begins. The successful Bidder also assumes all risk as
to the condition of any existing improvements.
9.3.3 No pleas of ignorance of any conditions that exist or may hereafter exist on the site of the
work, or difficulties that may be encountered in the execution of the work, or a result of failure to
make necessary investigations and examinations, will be accepted as an excuse for any failure or
omission on the part of the successful Bidder to fulfill in every detail all the requirements of the
Contract Documents and to complete the work for the consideration set forth therein, or as a
basis for any claim whatsoever.
9.3.4 Insofar as possible, the successful Bidder, in carrying out his work, must employ such
methods or means as will not cause interruption or interference with the work of the Owner or
any separate contractor.
Sec. 2.0-4
IFB# PSR-09-02
9.3.5 This Contract includes excavation on an unclassified basis. The cost of all excavation
required under this Contract shall be merged into the Base Bid. No distinction will be made for
payment purposes between earth and rock.
9.4 SECURITY FOR FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE
9.4.1 The successful Bidder shall furnish a Performance Bond in an amount equal to one hundred
percent (100%) of the Contract Sum as security for the faithful performance of this Contract in
strict conformity with the plans, specifications and conditions of this Contract and also a Labor
and Materials Payment Bond in an amount not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the
Contract Sum, as security for the payment of all persons performing labor and furnishing
materials under this Contract. The Performance Bond and the Labor and Materials Payment
Bond shall be in separate instruments in the form attached hereto in accordance with State law
and shall be delivered to the Owner not later than the date of execution of the Contract.
9.5 TIME FOR COMPLETION
9.5.1 The time for completion of this Contract shall be as fixed in the Owner-Contractor
Agreement.
9.6 LIABILITY INSURANCE AND WORKER'S COMPENSATION
9.6.1 The successful bidder will be required to carry public liability and worker's compensation
and other insurance in the amounts and under the terms stipulated under Paragraph 11 of the
General Conditions.
9.7 BIDDERS REFERRED TO LAWS
9.7.1 The attention of the Bidder is called to the provisions of all Municipal, County, and State
laws, regulations, ordinances, and resolutions and permits relating to obstructing streets,
maintaining signals, storing and handling of explosives, or otherwise affecting the Bidder, or his
employees or his work hereunder in his relation to the Owner or any other person. The Bidder
shall obey all such laws, regulations, ordinances, permits, or resolutions controlling or limiting
Contractors while engaged in the prosecution of work under this contract.
9.7.2 The provisions of the awarded contract shall be interpreted in accordance with the laws of
Virginia and in accordance with the laws, ordinances, regulations, permits and resolutions of the
Town of Purcellville.
9.7.3 The Town of Purcellville Purchasing Regulations, and the Virginia Public Procurement
Law are incorporated herein by reference into this Invitation for Bids. In the event of a conflict
the Purchasing Regulations and Public Procurement Act shall govern. Where the word Director
is used in the text, the Town of Purcellville’s Procurement Officer may be considered to have the
same powers as the Director for purposes of Town of Purcellville Procurements.

Sec. 2.0-5
IFB# PSR-09-02
9.7.4 CONFLICT OF INTEREST -- This Bid is subject to the provisions of Section (2.2-3100 et
seq.) Virginia Code Ann. No member of the Town of Purcellville Council, or Town of
Purcellville, or any member or employee of any governmental agency, commission or board or
the spouse or any relative who resides in the same household as any of the foregoing, may be a
contractor or subcontractor in connection with any Bid or have a personal interest therein as
defined in Section 2.2-3101 of the Code, unless permitted under the Act. Any contract entered
into in violation of the provisions of this Act may be declared void by the Town of Purcellville
within 5 years of the date of such contract. The successful Bidder/Contractor shall incorporate
the provisions of the above paragraph, Conflict of Interest, in each Subcontract.
9.7.5 The Contractor agrees to abide by the provisions of Section 59.1-9.1 et seq. of the Virginia
Code Ann. known as the Virginia Antitrust Act.
9.8 FORM OF BID
9.8.1 Bids shall be submitted using the enclosed Form of Tender form. One original and four (4)
copies shall be submitted.
9.9 NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE
9.9.1 A written award (or Acceptance of Bid) mailed or otherwise furnished to the successful
Bidder within the time for acceptance specified in the Invitation for Bids shall be deemed to
result in a binding contract without further action by either party. Bidder, nevertheless, shall be
obligated to execute the Owner-Contractor Agreement and provide required bonds in order to
avoid breach of such contract.
9.10 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY
9.10.1 During the performance of this contract the successful Bidder/Contractor shall agree to
abide by all provisions of, Town of Purcellville Purchasing Regulations that relate to equal
opportunity.
9.11 ACCESS TO DOCUMENTS
9.11.1 During the performance of this contract the successful Bidder/Contractor shall agree to
abide by all provisions of, Town of Purcellville, that relate to access to documents.
9.12 NEGOTIATIONS WITH LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER(S): Unless canceled or

rejected, a responsible bid from the lowest responsible bidder shall be accepted as submitted,
except that if the bid from the lowest responsible bidder exceeds available funds, the Town of
Purcellville may negotiate with the apparent low bidder to obtain a contract price within
available funds. Such negotiations may be directed towards the: (a) reduction of goods or
services procured; (b) substitution of materials; and/or change in the period for completion of the
project.
At its option, during such negotiations, the Town of Purcellville may identify the amount of
Sec. 2.0-6
IFB# PSR-09-02
funds available for the project, direct that certain items of the project be excluded from the bid
and ask the apparent low bidder to submit a final revised bid on the revised project. If the
apparent low bidder thereafter submits a bid for the revised project in excess of the available
funds identified for the project, the Town of Purcellville may terminate negotiations with such
bidder and ask the next apparent low bidder to submit a bid for the exact same revised project. If
the next low bidder submits a revised bid that is within budget, the Town of Purcellville may
award the revised contract to such bidder.
END OF SECTION

Sec. 2.0-7
IFB# PSR-09-02
SECTION 3.0
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
Sec. 3.0-1
IFB# PSR-09-02
OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT made this day of 20__, by and between the

Town of Purcellville, hereinafter called "Owner" and __________. (an individual or a
Partnership or a Corporation) duly organized under the laws of the Commonwealth of
Virginia, State of __________________ and authorized to conduct business in the
Commonwealth of Virginia, hereinafter called "Contractor".
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements

hereinafter mentioned:
1. The Contractor shall commence and complete Alterations of the Purcellville

Roller Skating Rink.
2. The Contractor shall furnish all of the material, supplies, tools, equipment,
labor and other services necessary for the construction and completion of the
project described herein.
3. The Contractor shall commence the work required by the Contract

Documents within seven (7) days of the issuance of the Notice to Proceed.
4. The Contractor agrees to perform all of the Work described in the Contract
Documents for the total sum of $______________ (in
numbers)_______________________________________________________
______________________________________________ (in words).
4a. The contractor shall:

Perform at least 20 percent of the total work with forces that are in direct
employment of the contractor.
5. The term "Contract Documents" means and includes the following:

a. Invitation for Bids
b. Instructions to Bidders
c. Supplementary Instructions to Bidders
d. Contractor Bid Proposal
e. Bid Bond
f. This Owner-Contractor Agreement
g. Payment Bond
h. Performance Bond
i. Notice of Award
j. Notice to Proceed
k. Change Order(s)
l. General Contract Terms and Conditions
m. Supplementary Conditions to the Contract
n. Construction Document consisting of plans, specifications; prepared
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
Sec. 3.0-2
IFB# PSR-09-02
and issued by Shaffer Wilson Sarver & Gray (SWSG).
o. Addenda, reference Section 7.
p. Sections 1.0 through Sections 8.0 and Division 1
6. Progress payments shall be made monthly, assuming timely and proper submission
of invoices by Contractor with required documentation.
7. The Contractor does not, and shall not during the performance of the contract for
goods and services in the Commonwealth of Virginia; knowingly employ an
unauthorized alien as defined in the federal Immigration Reform and Control Act
of 1986.
8. During the performance of the Work described in the Contract Documents, the
Contractor agrees as follows:
a. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for
employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age,
disability, or other basis prohibited by state law relating to discrimination in
employment, except where there is a bona fide occupational qualification
reasonably necessary to the normal operation of the Contractor. The
Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and
applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of this
nondiscrimination clause.
b. The Contractor, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed
by or on behalf of the Contractor, will state that such Contractor is an equal
opportunity employer.
c. Notices, advertisements and solicitations placed in accordance with federal
law, rule or regulation shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of meeting
the requirements of this Paragraph 8.
d. The Contractor will include the provisions of the foregoing paragraphs a, b,
and c in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the
provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor.
9. During the performance of the Work described in the Contract Documents, the
Contractor agrees to:
a. provide a drug-free workplace for the Contractor’s employees;

b. post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for
employment, a statement notifying employees that the unlawful
manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of a
controlled substance or marijuana is prohibited in the Contractor’s
workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees
for violations of such prohibition;
c. state in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on
behalf of the Contractor that the Contractor maintains a drug-free
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
Sec. 3.0-3
IFB# PSR-09-02
workplace; and
d. include the provisions of the foregoing clauses in every subcontract or
purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon
each subcontractor or vendor.
10. This Agreement shall be binding upon all parties hereto and their respective heirs,
executors, administrators, successors, and assigns.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed, or caused to be executed by

their duly authorized officials, this Agreement in two copies, each of which shall be
deemed an original on the date first above written.
OWNER:
By__________________________________
Name________________________________
Title__________________________________
CONTRACTOR:
___________________________________
BY ________________________________
[CORPORATE SEAL]
Name ______________________________
Title _______________________________
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
Sec. 3.0-4
IFB# PSR-09-02
SECTION 4.0
GENERAL CONTRACT TERMS AND CONDITIONS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Sec. 4.0-1
IFB# PSR-09-02
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CONDITIONS
General Construction Contract Conditions
The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction are set forth in the American
Institute of Architects Document A201-2007, entitled "General Conditions of the
Contract for Construction," containing Articles 1 through 15 and are hereby made part of
this Specification to the same extent as if bound herein.
These General Conditions shall become a part of the Contract and shall apply to the
Contractor and all Subcontractors and suppliers.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Sec. 4.0-2
IFB# PSR-09-02
SECTION 5.0
GENERAL CONDITIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

Sec. 5.0-1
IFB# PSR-09-02
The General Conditions and Instructions set out below shall apply to all formal bid
solicitations and resulting contract award issued by the Town of Purcellville unless
otherwise specified. Bidders are responsible for informing themselves of these
requirements prior to submission of bids. Failure to do so will be at the bidder’s own
risk, and pleas of error or ignorance shall not be honored. Bidders requiring additional
information about the General Conditions and Instructions set forth below should contact
the Purchasing Office.
In the event there is a conflict between the American Institute of Architects Document
A201-2007, entitled “General Conditions of the Contract for Constriction”, containing
Articles 1 through 15 and any other terms and conditions that may be included elsewhere
in this solicitation, the other terms and conditions shall prevail.
1. Bids shall be awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible bidder. When the
terms and conditions of multiple bids are so provided in the Invitation to Bid,
awards may be made to more than one bidder. Bidders may restrict bids to
consideration in aggregate by specifically stating same in writing on the Bid
Form. Bidders should, however, give unit prices where requested. Failure to do
so may constitute an informality. Unless otherwise specified, the Town reserves
the right: (1) to award in part or in whole (2) to reject any or all bids, and (3) to
waive any informality in bids, and (4) to award so as to best serve the interest of
the Town. Awards made in response to a RFP will be made to the most qualified
offeror whose proposal is determined, in writing, to be the most advantageous to
the Town, taking into consideration the evaluation factors set forth in the RFP.
2. Unless canceled or rejected for good cause, a responsive bid from the lowest
responsible bidder shall be accepted as submitted except that if the bid from the
lowest responsible bidder exceeds available funds or is deemed excessive..
3. If received after the time specified for Public Bid Opening, formal bids,
amendments thereto, or requests for withdrawal of bids will not be considered.
Late bids will be returned to the bidder UNOPENED if the bidder’s return address
is shown. If the Town declares administrative or liberal leave, scheduled bid
openings or receipt of proposals will be extended to the next business day at the
same time.
4. Bids must be properly identified as a “SEALED BID”, noting the project name,
and IFB bid number. Properly marked bids received prior to the specified time of
Public Bid Opening will be securely kept, unopened, in the office of the
Purchasing Manager. The Purchasing Manager or duly appointed representative
will determine when the specified time has arrived and no bid shall be received
thereafter.
Sec. 5.0-2
IFB# PSR-09-02
5. No liability shall attach to the Purchasing Manager or appointed representative for
the premature opening of an improperly addressed or improperly identified bid.
When improperly identified bids are received, the bidder takes the risk that the
envelope may be inadvertently opened and the information compromised, which
may cause the bid to be disqualified. The Town reserves the right to declare such
a bid as non-responsive.
6. Unless specifically authorized in the solicitation, telegraphic, electronic or

facsimile bids will not be considered.
7. At the time fixed for the opening of responses to a bid, bids will be opened in
public and read aloud and bid contents will be made public for the information of
bidders and other interested parties who may be present either in person or by
representative. Bids are available for public inspection subsequent to the Public
Bid Opening for a period of not less than 60 days. At the time fixed for the receipt
of responses for Request for Proposals, only the names of the offerors will be read
and made available to the public. Please note that all proceedings, records,
contracts and other records relating to procurement transactions shall be open to
the inspection of any citizen, or any interested person, firm or corporation in
accordance with the Freedom of Information Act subject to the exemptions
therein.
8. In the event a vendor cannot submit a bid on a solicitation, he or she is requested
to return the solicitation cover sheet as a “No Bid” with an explanation as to why
he or she is unable to bid on these requirements. Because of the large number of
firms listed on the Town’s Bidders List, it may be necessary to delete from this
list the names of those persons, firms or corporations who fail to respond after
having been invited to bid for three (3) consecutive solicitations.
9. Unless otherwise specified in the solicitation, all original bids shall be submitted
with four copies, properly signed in permanent blue ink in the proper spaces, and
submitted in a sealed envelope. The item pages of the solicitation which do not
include any items for which a bid price or signature is required need not be
included in the submission of a bid.
10. The bidder must supply all information required by the Invitation to Bid,
Instructions to Bidders, Specifications, and Bid Forms. Failure to fill all blanks
may result in disqualification of the bid.
11. Unless otherwise specified by the Town, all formal bids submitted shall be
binding for Town acceptance for ninety (90) days from the date of the bid
opening.

Sec. 5.0-3
IFB# PSR-09-02
12. Bid prices must be net, including transportation and handling charges fully
prepaid by the contractor to destination, and subject only to cash discount for
prompt payment of invoice.
13. A bidder for a public construction contract, other than a contract for construction
or maintenance of public highways, may withdraw his bid from consideration if
provided the bid was submitted in good faith, and the mistake was a clerical
arithmetic error or an unintentional omission of a quantity of work, labor or
unintentional omission can be clearly shown by objective evidence drawn from
the bid sought to be withdrawn.
If a bid contains both clerical and judgment mistakes, a bidder may withdraw his
bid from consideration if the price bid would have been substantially lower than
the other bids due solely to the clerical mistake, that was an unintentional
arithmetic error or an unintentional omission of a quantity of work, labor or
material made directly in the compilation of a bid that shall be clearly shown by
objective evidence drawn from inspection of original work papers, documents and
materials used in the preparation of the bid sought to be withdrawn.
A Bidder wishing to withdraw his bid shall give notice in writing of his claim of
right to withdraw his bid within two business days after the conclusion of the bid
opening procedure and shall submit original work papers with such notice
14. When an error is made in computing the extension of total price(s), the unit bid
price will govern. Erasures in bids must be initialed by the bidder. Carelessness
in quoting prices or in preparation of bid otherwise, will not relieve the bidder.
Bidders are cautioned to recheck their bids for possible error. The bidder will be
required to perform if his or her bid is accepted and a Contract is executed based
on the bid submitted.
15. Bidders must submit any and all exceptions to conditions of specifications in
writing at time of bid as part of the bid submission.
16. Unless otherwise provided in the Invitation to Bid, any catalog, brand name, or
make or manufacturer’s reference shall not restrict bidders to the specified brand,
make or manufacturer named; rather it conveys the general style, type, character,
and quality of the article desired, and any article which the Town, in its sole
discretion, determines to be the equal of that specified, considering quality,
workmanship, economy of operation, and suitability for the purpose intended,
shall be accepted.
17. No employee of the Town shall be admitted to any share or part of this contract or
to any benefit that may arise there from.

Sec. 5.0-4
IFB# PSR-09-02
18. Specific requirements as to bid bonds and performance bonds shall be
incorporated in individual bid specifications, if required.
19. A written notice of award (or acceptance of bid) shall be provided to the
successful bidder within the specified acceptance period. It may be in the form of
a letter as included in Section 7.0 or a purchase order, either of which shall be
deemed a binding contract without further action by either party.
20. Delivery of merchandise must conform to instructions in the bid and/or in the
applicable notice of award or purchase order(s). All Owner supplied goods are
purchased F.O.B. destination. All costs for coordinating, tracking, receiving,
inventorying, inspecting, reporting, storing, reordering and tracking reorders of
Owner supplied goods shall be borne by the Contractor. Transportation charges
are included in the unit prices bid unless otherwise specified.
21. When required in bid specifications, samples shall be delivered to a location

determined by the Owner at the bidder’s expense by the date and time specified in
the bid documents. In no case shall said time be later than the bid opening.
Samples shall be removed by the bidder at the bidders own expense within thirty
(30) days after written notice to do so.
Failure to do so may result in storage of the property at the bidder’s risk and
expense, or in its declaration as abandoned property – subject to disposal as such.
22. The Town of Purcellville does not discriminate against faith-based organizations
in accordance with the Code of Virginia, 11-35.1 or against a bidder or offeror
because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age, disability, or any other
basis prohibited by state law relating to discrimination in employment.
23. The Town requests that bids be printed on recycled paper, using both sides of
each page and a minimum font size of 12.
24. This procurement is being conducted on behalf of other public bodies, in

accordance with Section 2.2-4304 (A) of the Code of Virginia. The successful
consultant will be required to provide these same services, at the same price, for
any contract awarded as a result of this solicitation to any public body within the
Commonwealth of Virginia.
25. By submitting their bids, bidders certify that they are not currently debarred by
the Commonwealth of Virginia and by the Federal Government from submitting
bids or proposals on contracts for the type of goods and/or services covered by
this solicitation, nor are they an agent of any person or entity that is currently so
debarred."

Sec. 5.0-5
IFB# PSR-09-02
26. The Town will undertake every reasonable effort to increase the opportunity for
participation in the procurement process by small, minority and woman owned
firms.
The foregoing conditions shall be binding on all sealed bid solicitations unless
specifically deleted or amended by reference within the bid documents.
END OF SECTION

Sec. 5.0-6
IFB# PSR-09-02
SECTION 6
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT

Sec. 6.0-1
IFB# PSR-09-02
Supplementary Construction Contract Conditions
These Supplementary Conditions contain modifications and additions to the General Conditions
referenced above in Section 4. Where no part of the General Conditions is modified or voided
by the Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered provisions shall remain in effect. Under all
Articles, delete all references to Arbitration throughout the General Conditions.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
The following supplementary conditions modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction", AIA Document A201 - 2007. Where any part of the general conditions is
modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered provisions of that Article,
Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect.
First page:
ADD project name and location: “Purcellville Roller Rink Alterations (Phase 2), 250 South
Nursery Avenue, Purcellville, VA 20132”
ADD Owner’s name and address: “Town of Purcellville, 130 East Main Street, Purcellville, VA
20132”
ADD Architect’s name and address: “Shaffer Wilson Sarver & Gray (SWSG), 1821 Michael
Faraday Drive, Suite 302, Reston, VA 20190”
Article I; Contract Documents
1.1.1 The Contract Documents.

In the first sentence following the words "consist of the", insert the words "Invitation for Bids,
Instructions to Bidders and Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, Bid Proposal, Bid Bond,
Payment Bond, Performance Bond, Notice of Award, Notice to Proceed Change Order,". In the
second sentence change the word "Architect" to "Owner".
1.1.8 Delete “Claims in accordance with Section 15.2 and certify”.
1.1.2 The Contract.

Delete the fourth sentence and replace it with “The Contract Documents shall not be construed to
create a contractual relationship of any kind between any persons or entities other than the
Owner and Contractor”. Delete the fifth sentence in its entirety.
1.2.1 Delete the second sentence in its entirety.
ADD 1.2.4 Anything shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications or
mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings shall have the same effect as if
shown or mentioned respectively in both. Technical specifications take priority over General

Sec. 6.0-2
IFB# PSR-09-02
Specifications and detail drawings take precedence over general drawings. Any conflict or
inconsistency in the drawing shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner whose decisions
thereon shall be conclusive. In case of conflict or inconsistency between the drawings and
specifications, the specifications shall govern.
ADD "1.2.5 Should any work or material be required which is not denoted in the Drawings and
Specifications either directly or indirectly, but which is nevertheless, necessary for the proper
carrying out of the intent thereof, it is understood and agreed that the same is implied and
required and that the Contractor shall perform such work and furnish such materials as fully as if
they were completely delineated and prescribed."
ADD "1.2.6 Where variances occur between the Drawings and Specifications or within either
documents, or if work required is detailed in the Contract Documents so as to render it
impossible for the Contractor to produce first class work, or where the Contractor believes that
there is insufficient detail contained in the Drawings and Specifications from which to make a
proper determination as to their intent, the Contractor shall bring such matters to the immediate
attention of the Owner for clarification or other decision as provided in the Contract Documents.
The Owner shall determine which document takes precedence, or will give instructions as to the
intent of the Contract Documents, in accordance with this Contract. Failure of the Contractor to
bring such variances of which he knew or should have known will constitute a waiver of any
claim based on the Owner's interpretation of the drawings or specifications. Figured dimensions
take precedence over scaled dimensions; large scale drawings over small. Repetitive features not
completely described and/or detailed shall be constructed in accordance with corresponding
features that are completely described and/or detailed."
ADD "1.2.7 The Contractor shall make no changes in the Work without having first received
written permission from the Owner according to the provisions of this Contract regarding
Change Orders.
ADD "1.2.8 The Owner will not rule on any matter in dispute between any Subcontractors as to
scope of subcontracts, nor rule on disputes between Contractor and any Subcontractor as to
scope of subcontracts."
Article 2; Owner
2.1.1 Delete the third sentence.
ADD "2.1.3 The term "Owner" or "Owner's Representative" specifically excludes any and all
inspectors having building code or County ordinance responsibilities or jurisdiction under the
requirements of the Building or other permits."
2.2.3 Delete the second sentence and replace it with: "Unless otherwise specified in this
Contract, any reports or analyses provided by Owner are for the Contractor's information only,

Sec. 6.0-3
IFB# PSR-09-02
and their accuracy and completeness are not guaranteed or warranted by the Owner and such
reports are not adopted by reference into, nor are they part of the Contract Documents."
Delete Subparagraph 2.2.5 in its entirety and substitute the following:
2.2.5 The Contractor will be furnished free of charge five (5) copies of Drawings and
Specifications. Additional sets will be furnished at the cost of reproduction, postage and
handling.
2.4 Delete the third and fourth sentence in its entirety.
ADD "2.4.1 Neither Owner nor its officers, agents, assignees or employees are in any way liable
or accountable to the Contractor or his surety for the method by which work performed by the
Owner, or at the Owner's direction, or any portion thereof, is accomplished or for the price paid
therefore.
Notwithstanding the Owner's right to carry out a portion of the Work, maintenance and
protection of the Work remains the Contractor's and Surety's responsibility as provided for in the
Performance Bond of the Contractor pursuant to this Contract."
Article 3; Contractor
3.1.3 Change “Architect” to “Owner” and “Architect’s” to “Owner’s”.
ADD 3.2.1.1 Unless the Contract Documents indicate to the contrary, Contractor assumes full
responsibility for inspection of the site and determination of the character, quality and quantity
of any soil, surface or subsurface conditions that may be encountered or which may affect the
work, and for the means and methods of construction that he employs when performing the
Work. The Owner shall not be liable for any additional work or costs arising as a result of any
conclusions reached or assumptions derived by the Contractor from or based upon any such
geotechnical, soils or other reports, surveys and analyses which Owner makes available for the
Contractor's information and review."
3.2.2 In the second sentence change all references to "Architect" to "Owner".
3.3.1 ADD to end of the second sentence: "subject, however, to the Owner's right to reject means
and methods proposed by the Contractor which are unsafe or otherwise not in compliance with
the Contract Documents."
Delete the third, fourth, and fifth sentences ADD at end of the paragraph: "This supervision
shall be applied on a full-time basis, shall extend to all levels and phases of the Contract, and
shall continue through the final disposition of the punch list."
3.3.2 ADD to the end: “in the same manner as if they were directly employed by the Contractor."

Sec. 6.0-4
IFB# PSR-09-02
ADD "3.3.4 All grades, lines, levels and benchmarks shall be established and maintained by the
Contractor. Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions indicated on the
drawings, and shall report all inconsistencies before commencing work."
ADD "3.3.5 Contractor shall complete the Work specified and provide all items needed for
construction of the Project, complete and in good order."
ADD "3.4.4 Work and materials which are necessary in the construction but which are not
specifically referred to in the Specifications or shown in the drawings but implied by the
Contract shall be furnished by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. Such work and
materials shall correspond with the general character of the Work as may be determined by the
Owner whose decision as to the necessity for and character of such work and materials shall be
final and conclusive."
ADD "3.4.5 Where materials, equipment or execution of work is specified to conform to a

referenced standard or specification, any material, equipment or execution of work meeting or
exceeding such standard or specification may be used in the work."
ADD "3.4.6 Wherever in the specifications or contract documents a particular material is shown
or specified shall be regarded merely as a standard. Any other material, which is recognized the
equal of that specified, considering quality, and is suitable for the purpose intended, shall be
considered responsive to the specification.
ADD "3.4.7Substitution of materials, equipment or execution of work required by the Contract

Documents shall not be permitted, except in the case of bonafide emergency, in which case the
procedures under Article 12 shall apply."
ADD "3.4.8Materials and equipment shall be manufactured and/or supplied by domestic sources
unless otherwise approved by the Owner."
ADD "3.4.9 Unless otherwise provided in this Invitation for Bid, the name of a certain brand,
make or manufacturer does not restrict bidders to the specific brand, make, or manufacturer
named; it conveys the general style, type, character, and quality of the article desired, and any
article which the Town of Purcellville in its sole discretion determines to be the equal of that
specified, considering quality, workmanship, economy of operation, and suitability for the
purpose intended, shall be accepted."
3.5 In the first sentence delete the words "and Architect". In the fifth sentence change
"Architect" to "Owner".
3.6 Add the following sentence to this Subparagraph:

The Contractor shall not charge the Owner for any taxes paid pursuant to this paragraph.
3.7.1 Add the following sentence to this Subparagraph:

Sec. 6.0-5
IFB# PSR-09-02
The Owner shall be responsible for securing and paying for the Town of Purcellville Site
Development Fee.
ADD "3.7.2.1 Contractor shall include in the Work, without additional cost to the Owner, all
labor, materials, services, apparatus, drawings (in addition to the Contract Documents), required
to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether or not shown or
specified."
3.7.4 In the first sentence change “21” to “7”. In the second and third sentences change
“Architect” to “Owner”. Delete the last sentence.
3.9.2 In the first sentence omit “through the Architect”. In the second sentence omit “The
Architect” and insert “A”. In the second sentence omit “or the Architect”. In the second sentence
omit the second “Architect” and insert “Owner”. In the third sentence omit the second
“Architect” and insert “Owner”.
3.9.3 Omit “or Architect”
3.10.1 In the first sentence delete the words "and Architect's".
3.10.2 Change "Architect" to "Owner" and “Architect’s” to “Owner’s” in all instances. Add to
the end of the second sentence “and be provided within two weeks”. Add to the third sentence
after reasonable time “or two weeks”
3.11 Delete the last sentence and replace with "These shall be delivered to the Owner upon
completion of the work."
3.12.4 Delete the third sentence and change “Architect” to “Owner” in the fourth and fifth
sentences.
3.12.5 Change "Architect" to "Owner" in all instances.
3.12.7 Delete "Architect" and replace with "Owner".
3.12.8 In the first and second sentence delete the words “Architect” and "Architect’s" and
replace with the words “Owner” and "Owner’s". In the first sentence delete the words
"Architect" and replace with the word "Owner".
3.12.9 Change "Architect" to "Owner" and “Architect’s” to “Owner’s”.
3.12.10 Delete “and the Architect” from the third sentence and insert “has”. Change “Architect”
to “Owner” in the fifth sentence. Delete both “and the Architect” phrases from the sixth
sentence. Delete the seventh sentence.

Sec. 6.0-6
IFB# PSR-09-02
3.16 Delete the words "and Architect".
3.17.1 Delete the words "and Architect” and “or Architect” in the second sentence. In the last
sentence substitute "Owner" for the word "Architect".
3.18.1 Delete the word "Architect" in the first sentence and change "Architect's consultant" to
"Owner's consultant".
ADD the following:
3.19 EXAMINATION OF RECORDS

3.19.1 Contractor agrees that the Owner or any of its duly authorized representatives shall, until
the expiration of three (3) years after final payment under this Contract, have access to and the
right to examine any directly pertinent books, documents, papers and records of the Contractor
involving transactions related to this Contract.
3.19.2 Contractor further agrees to include in all his subcontracts hereunder provisions to the
effect that the Subcontractor agrees that the Owner or any of its duly authorized representatives
shall, until the expiration of 3 years after final payment under the subcontract, have access to and
the right to examine any directly pertinent books, documents, papers and records of such
Subcontractor involved in transactions related to the subcontract. The term "subcontract" as used
in this clause excludes subcontractors or purchase orders for public utility services at rates
established for uniform applicability to the general public.
3.19.3 The periods of access and examination described in 3.19.1 and 3.19.2 above, for books,
papers, documents and records which may relate to any litigation, arbitration or the settlement of
claims arising out of the performance of this Contract, shall continue until any appeals, litigation
arbitration or claims shall have been finally disposed of.
Article 4; Administration of the Contract
Delete Subparagraph 4.1.1 in its entirety.
4.2.1 In the first sentence omit the first reference to “Architect” and insert “Owner or Owner’s
Representative”. In the first references omit the second reference to "Architect" and insert
"Owner". In the second sentence omit “Architect” and insert “Owner’s representative”
4.2.2 In the first, second and third sentences, change the word "Architect" to "Owner".

Sec. 6.0-7
IFB# PSR-09-02
4.2.3 In the first and second sentences, change "Architect" to "Owner". Delete the third sentence
in its entirety.
4.2.4 Delete the first two sentences in their entirety.
4.2.5 Delete the word "Architect" and “Architect’s” and substitute with "Owner" and “Owner’s”.
4.2.6 Delete in its entirety.
4.2.7 The Owner will review and approve Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings,
Product Data and Samples, but only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and
with the information given in the Contract Documents.
4.2.8 Change the word "Architect" to "Owner" in all instances.
4.2.9 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following:
4.2.9 The Owner will conduct inspections to determine the dates of Substantial and Final
Completion. The Contractor will assemble written warranties and related documents required by
the Contract and forward them to the Owner. The Owner shall make final payment according to
the requirements of Paragraph 9.10.
4.2.11 Change all references to "Architect" to "Owner" and “Architect’s” to “Owner’s”. At the
end of this subparagraph, add the following sentence. "Not withstanding this provision, the
Owner's decision to questions involving artistic effect shall be final only if the Owner determines
them to be consistent with the intent of the contract documents."
ADD the following;
4.3 DECISION OF OWNER. Claims by the Contractor shall be referred initially to the Owner’s
Construction Manager on the project for action. The Owner, as provided shall be required to
render a decision with respect to the recommendation of the Construction Manager as a condition
precedent to litigation of a claim between the Contractor and Owner as to all such matters arising
prior to the date final payment is due, regardless of (1) whether such matters relate to execution
and progress of the work or (2) the extent to which the work has been completed. The decision
by the Owner in response to a claim shall not be a condition precedent to litigation in the event

Sec. 6.0-8
IFB# PSR-09-02
(1) the Owner has not received evidence or has failed to render a decision within agreed time
limits, (2) the Owner has failed to take action required within 30 days after the claim is made, (3)
45 days have passed after the claim has been referred to the Owner or (4) the claim relates to a
mechanic's lien.
In accordance with 11-69, VA Code Ann., this provision shall be followed for consideration and
handling of all claims by the Contractor under this Contract. Section 11-71, VA Code Ann., is
not applicable to this Contract, and under no circumstances is this paragraph to be construed as
an administrative appeals procedure governed by 11-71, VA Code Ann.
Notice of the intent to submit a claim setting forth the bases for any claim shall be submitted in
writing within ten (10) days after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim, or within
ten (10) days of discovering the condition giving rise to the claim, whichever is later. In no event
shall any claim arising out of this Contract be filed after the submission of the request for Final
Payment by the Contractor.
Claims by the Contractor with respect to this Contract shall be submitted in writing in the first
instance for consideration by the Owner’s Construction Manager for this Contract. The
Construction Manager will develop a recommendation to the Director of Public Works within 30
days from the receipt of the claim from the Contractor.
The Director of Public Works will render a decision based on the recommendation of the
Construction Manager. The decision of the Director of Public Works shall be rendered in writing
within fifteen (15) days from the receipt of the recommendation from the Construction Manager.
If the Contractor is not satisfied with the decision of the Director of Public Works, the Contractor
may file an appeal with the Town of Purcellville Town Manager, which appeal shall be received
within thirty (30) days of the date of the decision by the Director of Public Works. The Town
Manager will refer the appeal to a separate Construction Management Consultant, under contract
to the Town, where such Construction Management Consultant is impartial and not involved
with the daily activities and progress of the project. The Construction Management Consultant
shall review the appeal and reduce his or her decision on the claim to a report within forty-five
(45) days of the receipt of the claim from the Contractor. The Town Manager shall render a
decision, based on the Construction Management Consultant report, to be final on behalf of the
Town of Purcellville.

Sec. 6.0-9
IFB# PSR-09-02
The Town Manager’s decision on the claim shall be rendered in writing to the Contractor
within forty-five (45) days from receipt of the Construction Management Consultant
report, and shall be final and binding on behalf of the Town of Purcellville, unless the
Contractor submits the claim for determination by the Town Council within thirty (30)
days of the Town of Purcellville Town Manager’s decision. Claims are submitted to the
Town of Purcellville Town Council by furnishing the Town Manager a copy of the claim,
along with a request for determination by the Town Council. The Town Council shall
consider the claim and render a decision on the claim in writing within forty-five (45)
days of the date on which the Town Council hears the claim in open meeting. The Town
Council's procedure in considering claims under this contract shall be the same as that for
other decisions of the Town Council on claims made under 15.1-550, et seq., VA Code
Ann.
Should any decision-maker designated under this procedure fail to make a decision on a
claim within the time period specified, then the claim is deemed to have been denied by
the decision maker.
Pending a final determination of a claim, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with the
performance of the Contract in accordance with the decision of the Director of Streets
and Maintenance.
In accordance with the provisions of 11-69, VA Code Ann., full compliance with this
procedure set forth in the provision shall be a precondition to the filing of any lawsuit by
the Contractor against the Town of Purcellville Council arising out of this Contract.
Article 5; Subcontractors
5.2.1 In the first sentence delete the words "through the Architect". Delete the second
and third sentences in their entirety and replace with the following:
"The Owner will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not he,
after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity.
Failure of the Owner to reply shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. Failure
of the Owner to object to any Subcontractor shall in no way affect the liability of the
Contractor to the Owner regarding performance of all obligations by the Subcontractors."
5.2.2 In the first sentence delete the words "or Architect".
5.2.3 Delete the words "or Architect" where it appears two times.
5.2.4 Delete the words "or Architect".
5.3 In the first and second sentences delete the words "and Architect". In the fourth
sentence add “complete” before Contract Documents.
Sec. 6.0-10
IFB# PSR-09-01
Article 6; Construction by Owner or by separate Contractors
6.2.2 In the first sentence change "Architect" to "Owner".
6.3 Change “Architect “to “Owner”.
Article 7; Changes in the Work
7.1.2 Delete Paragraph 7.1.2 in its entirety and substitute the following: "A change order
shall be based upon agreement between the Owner and Contractor; a change directive or
order for a minor change in the work may be issued by the Owner and may or may not be
agreed to by the Contractor."
ADD "7.1.4 After issuance of a Change Order, Contractor shall ensure that the amount of
the Performance Bond and Labor and Materials Payment Bond coverage has been revised
to reflect the increase in the Contract Sum due to the Change Order and shall provide
Owner written notice of same."
7.2.1 Change the word "Architect" to "Owner" and replace the phrase, "Contractor and
Architect" with "and Contractor".
Add the following:
7.2.2 The successful Contractor shall respond to the Town of Purcellville's request for
Change Orders with their cost proposal within ten (10) working days. The Town of
Purcellville shall process Change Orders within approximately ten (10) working days. In
the event an agreement cannot be reached between the Town of Purcellville and the
Contractor on a Change Order, the Town of Purcellville will issue a unilateral Change
Order to proceed with Work. Resolution between the Town of Purcellville's Change
Order and Contractor's cost proposal shall be made within five (5) days after completion
of Change Order Work.
Add the following:
7.2.3 A fixed fee limit for overhead and profit on Change Orders shall apply according to
the following schedule:
1. If the General Contractor does the Work, 10% of the labor and material
costs.
2. If the Work is done through the General Contractor's Subcontractor, the
subcontractor involved shall be allowed 10% of the labor and materials
cost and the General Contractor shall be allowed 5% of the
subcontractor's total involved.

Sec. 6.0-11
IFB# PSR-09-01
3. This shall be the complete compensation for "Overhead and Profit" and
shall include the costs of supervision, equipment, bond, permits, profit,
insurance, bookkeeping, clerical, estimating and any other general
expense including any delay and impact costs." Proof of Payment of
increase in bond premium will be required.
Add the following:
7.2.4 To facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those
so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a
complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and subcontractors. Labor and
materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are
subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change involving over
$100.00 be approved without such itemization.
Add the following:
7.2.5 All Change Orders shall include the following statement on the Change Order
Form:
"The agreed upon Change Order amount contained herein constitutes all costs
associated with this change including all delay and impact costs."
7.3.1 In the first sentence delete "by the Architect" and "and Architect,”.
7.3.5.Change “Architect” to “Owner”
7.3.7 Change "Architect" to "Owner" in the first and second sentence.
7.3.8 Change "Architect" to "Owner" in the first sentence.
7.3.9 Change "Architect" to "Owner" and “Architect’s” to “Owner’s” in all instances.
7.4 In the first and second sentence change "Architect" to "Owner".
Article 8; Time
8.1.3 Delete the words "by the Architect".
ADD "8.1.5 The date of Final Completion of the Work is the date certified by the
Owner when the Work is totally complete, to include punch list work, in accordance with
the Contract Documents and the Owner may fully occupy and utilize the Work for the
use for which it is intended."

Sec. 6.0-12
IFB# PSR-09-01
8.3.1 Delete "or Architect", "of either", "pending” and “and arbitration and or by other
causes which the Architect determines may justify delay." Change "Architect" to
"Owner" at the end of the sentence.
Article 9; Payments and Completion
9.2 Change all references to "Architect" to "Owner".
9.3.1 In the first sentence change "Architect" to "Owner". In the second sentence
following the word "Owner" delete the words "or Architect".
9.3.1.1 ADD the following to the end: "The form for each progress payment shall be the
"Application and Certificate for Payment, AIA Documents G702 and 703". The forms
shall be complete and submitted in the original and 2 copies. The Contractor shall submit
with every Application for Payment after the first Certificate of Payment is issued,
certification that due and payable amounts and bills have been paid by the Contractor for
work for which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and payments received
from the Owner."
Add the following clause 9.3.2.1:
9.3.2.1 Until substantial completion, the Owner will pay no more than 95 percent (95%)
of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. Remaining five
percent (5%) of total contract amount will be paid to Contractor upon complying with
requirements of 9.10.5.1 of Supplemental Conditions.
Delete 9.4.1 in its entirety and substitute the following:
9.4.1 Within seven (7) days after the receipt of the Contractor's application for payment,
the Owner will take appropriate action on said application for payment, and issue
payment for 95% of the amount the Owner determines to be due.
9.5.1 The Owner may decline to make payment in whole or in part, to the extent
necessary to protect itself, if in his opinion the Contractor has not met his obligations as
specified in the Contract Documents. If the Owner and the Contractor are unable to reach
an agreement on a revised amount, the Owner will promptly make payment for an
amount the Owner determines to be equitable. The Owner may also decline payment to
such extent as may be necessary to protect itself against loss because of:
1. defective work not remedied;

Sec. 6.0-13
IFB# PSR-09-01
2. third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of
such claims;
3. failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to subcontractors or for

labor, materials or equipment;
4. reasonable evidence that the work cannot be completed for the unpaid
balance of the Contract sum;
5. damage to the Owner or another Contractor;
6. reasonable evidence that the work will not be completed within the Contract
time; or
7. persistent failure to carry out the work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
9.5.3 Contractor may not stop Work as a result of any payment or portion thereof being
withheld in accordance with this Paragraph. If the Contractor does order the Work
stopped, or if the Work is stopped in whole or in part as a result thereof, the Contractor
shall be wholly liable for any damage from delay, or otherwise, which may arise because
of such stoppage.
9.6.1 Upon approval of the Contractor's application for payment the Owner shall make
payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents.
9.6.2 The Contractor will take one of the two following actions within seven (7) days
after receipt of amounts paid to the Contractor by Owner for work performed by a
Subcontractor: (1) Pay the Subcontractor for the proportionate share of the total payment
received from the Owner attributable to the work performed by that Subcontractor. (2)
Notify the Owner and the Subcontractor, in writing, of its intention to withhold all or a
part of the Subcontractor's payment with the reason for non-payment.
Individual contractors shall provide their social security numbers and proprietorships,
partnerships, and corporations shall provide their federal employer identification numbers
to Owner, reference Section 2.2 - 4354 (2)
The Contractor shall be obligated to pay interest to a Subcontractor on all monies owed
by Contractor that remain unpaid after seven days following receipt by the Contractor of
Sec. 6.0-14
IFB# PSR-09-01
payment from the Owner for work performed by a Subcontractor, except for amounts
withheld under Section 1 (b) above. The Contractor's obligation to pay interest to a
Subcontractor pursuant to the provisions of these sections may not be construed to be an
obligation to the Owner.
Unless otherwise provided under the terms of this Agreement, interest shall accrue at the
rate of one (1) percent per month.
Contractor is hereby required to include in each of its subcontracts a provision requiring

each of its Subcontractors to otherwise be subject to the same payment and interest
requirements set forth in Subparagraphs 1-3 of this section with respect to each lower tier
Subcontractor.
9.6.3 Change all references to "Architect" to "Owner".
9.6.4 Delete the words "neither" and "nor Architect". Also add the word "not" after the
word "shall".
Delete Subparagraph 9.7 in its entirety.
9.8.1 Add after the words "Contract Documents", "and an occupancy permit has been
issued".
9.8.3 Change all references to “Architect” and “Architect’s” to “Owner” and “Owner’s”.
9.8.4 Change “Architect” to “Owner” in the first sentence.
ADD “9.8.6 The Issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion does not indicate
final acceptance of the Project by the Owner, and the Contractor is not relieved of any
responsibility for the Project except as specifically stated in the Certificate of Substantial
Completion."
9.9.1 Change all references to "Architect" to "Owner" and delete the words "or, if no
agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect." in the last sentence.
9.9.2 Delete the words "and Architect".
9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and
acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Owner will promptly
make such inspection to determine if the Work is acceptable under the Contract
Documents.
Sec. 6.0-15
IFB# PSR-09-01
9.10.2 In the first sentence change "Architect" to "Owner".
9.10.3 In the first sentence delete the words "and the Architect so confirms" and the
words "and certification by the Architect". In the second sentence change "Architect" to
"Owner".
9.10.5 Delete in its entirety and ADD the following;
9.10.5 Final payment shall be due 30 days after Date of Final Completion, provided the
Work has been completed and the Contract fully performed. Final inspections shall be
scheduled at a time not less than 3 days and not more than 10 days after receipt by Owner
of Contractor's required written notice.
ADD “9.10.5.1 The following listed documents complete in all respects shall be
submitted before or with final request for payment and approved before final payment:
(a) Documents AIA G-707 "Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment"

(b) As-Built Site Plan - 1 sepia mylar transparency and 2 black line prints,
plus an electronic set
(c) All guarantees and bonds required by the Specifications
(d) Record As-Built sets - Electrical, Plumbing, and Mechanical included
(e) Maintenance Manuals and all manufacturers' warranty certificates
(f) Certificate(s) of final inspection(s) from state and/or local agencies in
accordance with applicable codes, laws and ordinances
The issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion does not indicate final
acceptance of the Project by the Owner, and the Contractor is not relieved of any
responsibility for the Project except those outlined by the document."
ADD
9.11 MECHANIC’S LIEN
9.11.1 Contractor shall provide a sworn statement detailing all subcontractors and the
total amount of each subcontract.
9.11.2 Final waiver of lien is required from Contractor and all subcontractors and
suppliers before final payment is made."
Article 10; Protection of Persons and Property
ADD “10.1.2 This project shall be subject to the provisions of the current edition of the
'Rules and Regulations Covering Construction, Demolition and All Excavation' adopted
by the Safety Codes Commission of the Commonwealth of Virginia."
10.2.5 In the first sentence delete the words "or Architect".

Sec. 6.0-16
IFB# PSR-09-01
10.2.6 In the second sentence delete the words "and Architect".
ADD 10.2.8 Contractor shall provide written confirmation that their site specific safety
plan meets minimum OSHA requirements.
10.3.1 In the second sentence delete the words “and Architect”.
10.3.2 Delete “and Architect” From the second sentence and change all other references
to “Architect” to “Owner”.
10.5 Delete in its entirety.
Article 11; Insurance and Bonds
Add the following clause 11.1.1.9 to 11.1.1
11.1.1.9 Liability Insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a
comprehensive basis including:
1. Premises Operation (including X-C/U as applicable)
2. Products and Completed Operations
3. Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion deleted
4. Owned, non-owned and hired motor vehicles
5. Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations
6. Umbrella Excess Liability
7. Builders risk insurance for work to be performed not less than the contract
price.
8. Contractual Indemnity/Hold Harmless.
Add the following clause 11.1.2.1 to 11.1.2:
11.1.2.1 The Insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than
the following, or greater if required by law:
1. Workers' Compensation:
a) State: Statutory
b) Applicable Federal Statutory
c) Employer's Liability $ 300,000
2. Comprehensive General Liability (including Premises-Operations;

Independent Contractors' Protective; Products and Completed Operations;
Broad Form Property Damage):

Sec. 6.0-17
IFB# PSR-09-01
a) Bodily Injury:
$1,000,000 Each Occurrence
b) Property Damage:
c) Products and Completed Operations to be
maintained for one (1) year after final payment.
d) Property Damage Liability Insurance shall provide
X & C coverage as applicable.
3. Contractual Liability:
a) Bodily Injury:
b) Property Damage:
4. Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion Deleted:

5. Comprehensive Automobile Liability:
a) Bodily Injury:
$1,000,000 Each Person
b) Property Damage:
6. Umbrella Excess Liability:

$ 1,000,000 over primary insurance.
$ 1,000,000 retention for self-insured hazards Each Occurrence.
Add the following clause 11.1.3.1 to 11.1.3:
11.1.3.1 The Contractor shall furnish one (1) copy each of Certificates of Insurance
herein required for each copy of the Agreement at the time of execution of the contract,
which shall specifically set, forth evidence of all coverage required by this Article as
amended. The form of the Certificate shall be "ACORD". The Contractor shall
immediately furnish to the Owner copies of any endorsements that are subsequently
issued amending coverage or limits.
11.3.1 Change “Owner” to “Contractor” in first sentence. In the first sentence after
"other," insert "cost of all existing materials supplied and installed,"
11.3.1.2 Delete in its entirety.

Sec. 6.0-18
IFB# PSR-09-01
11.3.1.3 Change “Owner” to “Contractor”
11.3.10 Omit the last sentence
11.4.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance from a company
licensed to conduct insurance underwriting in the Commonwealth of Virginia on the
entire Work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. The cost of this insurance shall
be included in the base bid. Such insurance shall be with a company or companies
against which the Owner has no reasonable objection.
This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors
and Sub-subcontractors in the Work and shall insure against the perils of fire and
extended coverage and shall include "all risk" insurance for physical loss or damage
including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief. If
not covered under "all risk" insurance or otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
the Contractor shall effect and maintain similar property insurance on portions of the
Work stored off the site or in transit when such portions of the Work are to be included in
an Application for Payment under Subparagraph 9.3.2. The all risk insurance shall not
expire prior to the substantial completion by the Contractor of the Work, or the beneficial
occupancy of the Work by the Owner, whichever shall occur later.
ADD the following;
11.5 HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT

11.5 Contractor shall attach to each liability insurance policy with the exception of
Worker's Compensation, the following endorsement: 'Contractor shall save Owner
harmless from any and all claims, damages, liabilities, expenses of litigation, including
attorney's fees, and losses arising out of injury to, or death of, any of Contractor's
employees or any other person while on or about Owner's premises in connection with
any matters relating to or arising out of the performance of this Contract'.
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor is at all times acting as an independent
contractor."
ADD the following
11.6 GENERAL CONDITIONS

Sec. 6.0-19
IFB# PSR-09-01
11.6.1 "All insurance provided pursuant to this Article shall be issued by companies
admitted within the Commonwealth of Virginia with a Best's Key Rating of at least
A:XII."
11.6.2 “If an 'ACORD' Insurance Certificate form is used by the Contractor's insurance
agent, the words, 'endeavor to' and '...but failure to mail such other notice shall impose no
obligation or liability of any kind upon the company.' in the 'Cancellation' paragraph of
the form shall be deleted."
11.6.3 “Contractor shall secure and maintain all insurance policies of its subcontractors
which shall be made available to the Owner on demand."
11.6.4 "If the Contractor fails to maintain the insurance required by the Contract
Documents, the Owner shall have the absolute right to terminate the Contract without any
further obligation to the Contractor or may purchase the required insurance and charge
the cost thereof to the Contractor."
11.6.5 "Nothing in this Paragraph shall be construed to shift the risk of loss or damage
from the Owner or the Contractor for damages which are not covered by any insurance
policy required by this Article to be purchased by either."
Article 12; Uncovering and Correction of Work
12.1.1 Change all references to "Architect" and “Architect’s” to "Owner" and “Owner’s”.
12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
12.2.1 In the first sentence change "Architect" to "Owner". Delete the second sentence in
its entirety and replace with: "The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such
rejected work."
12.2.2.1 Delete the last sentence.
12.2.2.1 ADD after last sentence: "The one-year guarantee period as defined above shall
not be decreased by any warranty or guarantee held by a subcontractor on materials or
equipment supplied."
ADD “12.2.2.2.1 If at any time deficiencies in the Work are discovered which are found
to have resulted from fraud or misrepresentation, or an intent or attempt to defraud the
Owner by the Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, the Contractor shall be liable for
replacement or correction of such Work and any damages which Owner has incurred
related thereto, regardless of time limit of any guarantee or warranty."

Sec. 6.0-20
IFB# PSR-09-01
Article 13; Miscellaneous Provisions
13.1 Omit “except that, if the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding
dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4.
13.5.1 In the third sentence change all references to "Architect" where it appears two
times to "Owner".
13.5.2 If the Owner determines that any work requires special inspection, testing, or
approval which Subparagraph 13.5.1 does not include, the Owner will instruct the
Contractor to order such special inspection, testing or approval, and the Contractor shall
give notice as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.1. If such special inspection or testing
reveals a failure of the work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents,
the Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, otherwise the Owner shall bear such costs, and
an appropriate Change Order shall be issued.
13.5.3 Change "Architect’s" to "Owner’s".
13.5.4 Change "Architect" to "Owner".
Article 14; Termination of the Contract
14.1.1.3 Change all references to "Architect" to "Owner".
14.1.3 Delete the words "and Architect".
14.1.4 Delete the words "and the Architect".
14.2.2 Delete the words "upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that sufficient
cause exists to justify such action".
14.2.4 In the third sentence delete the words ", shall be certified by the Initial Decision
Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment".
14.3 and 14.4 are deleted in its entirety and are replaced with the following:
14.3 Termination
14.3.1Subject to the provisions below, the Contract may be terminated by the Town of
Purcellville upon thirty (30) days advance written notice to the other party. If any work
or service hereunder is in progress, but not completed as of the date of termination, then

Sec. 6.0-21
IFB# PSR-09-01
this contract may be extended upon written approval of the Town of Purcellville until
said work or services are completed and accepted.
14.3.2 Termination for Convenience

14.3.2.1 In the event that this Contract is terminated or canceled upon request and for the
convenience of the Town of Purcellville, without the required thirty (30) days advance
written notice, then the Town of Purcellville shall negotiate reasonable termination costs,
if applicable.
14.4 Termination for Cause

14.4.1Termination by the Town of Purcellville of for cause, default or negligence on the
part of the Contractor shall be excluded from the foregoing provision; termination costs,
if any, shall not apply. The thirty (30) days advance notice requirement is waived in the
event of Termination for Cause.
14.5 Termination Due to Unavailability of Funds in Succeeding Fiscal Years.

15.5.1When funds are not appropriated or otherwise made available to support
continuation of performance in a subsequent fiscal year, the Contract shall be canceled
and the Contractor shall be reimbursed for the reasonable value of any non-recurring
costs incurred but not amortized in the price of the supplies or services delivered under
the contract.
Delete Article 15 Claims and Disputes in it entirety and add the following
ARTICLE 15 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY

15.1 Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows:
A. During the performance of the Work described in the Contract Documents, the
Contractor agrees as follows:
1. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for
employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age,
disability, or other basis prohibited by state law relating to discrimination in
employment, except where there is a bona fide occupational qualification
reasonably necessary to the normal operation of the Contractor. The
Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and
applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of this
nondiscrimination clause.
2. The Contractor, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed
by or on behalf of the Contractor, will state that such Contractor is an equal
opportunity employer.
3. Notices, advertisements and solicitations placed in accordance with federal
law, rule or regulation shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of meeting
the requirements of this Paragraph 8.
4. The Contractor will include the provisions of the foregoing paragraphs a, b,
Sec. 6.0-22
IFB# PSR-09-01
and c in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the
provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor.
B. During the performance of the Work described in the Contract Documents, the
Contractor agrees to:
1 provide a drug-free workplace for the Contractor’s employees;

2 post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for
employment, a statement notifying employees that the unlawful
manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of a
controlled substance or marijuana is prohibited in the Contractor’s
workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees
for violations of such prohibition;
3 state in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on
behalf of the Contractor that the Contractor maintains a drug-free
workplace; and
4 include the provisions of the foregoing clauses in every subcontract or
purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon
each subcontractor or vendor.
END OF SECTION

Sec. 6.0-23
IFB# PSR-09-01
SECTION 7.0
APPENDICES
APPENDICES AND EXHIBITS

Sec. 7.0-1
IFB# PSR-09-02
EXHIBIT A
SCHEDULE OF WORK

Sec. 7.0-2
IFB# PSR-09-02
Appendix A: Schedule of Work
Work shall be completed as outlined in the Time for Completion of Base Bid Work in Section
1.0, Instructions to Bidders: Tender/Bid Form.
Notice to Proceed - 04/14/10

Activities will occur in two major phases.

Work will proceed to face of building with geothermal lines properly
protected, all grades restored, all surfaces restored and the entire parking
lot will be reopened for use. There will be no interior work conducted
during Phase 1 as the Roller Rink will be occupied and in use.

Phase 2 Final completion - 12/02/10 to 12/17/10
Contractor shall provide a work schedule in the following format. Provide a work schedule in the
selected format.
[X] Bar chart schedule.
[ ] Critical path method schedule (CPM).
[ ] Cost loaded critical path method schedule.
[ ] Cost and resource loaded critical path method schedule.

Sec. 7.0-3
IFB# PSR-09-02
Appendix B: Bidders References
BIDDERS SHALL PROVIDE REFERENCES ON THIS FORM
1. Firm Name_____________________________________________________________
Contact________________________________________________________________
Title___________________________________________________________________
Mailing Address_________________________________________________________
Phone/Email____________________________________________________________
2. Firm Name_____________________________________________________________
Contact________________________________________________________________
Title___________________________________________________________________
Mailing Address_________________________________________________________
Phone/Email____________________________________________________________
3. Firm Name_____________________________________________________________
Contact________________________________________________________________
Title___________________________________________________________________
Mailing Address_________________________________________________________
Phone/Email____________________________________________________________
4. Firm Name_____________________________________________________________
Contact________________________________________________________________
Title___________________________________________________________________
Mailing Address_________________________________________________________
Phone/Email____________________________________________________________
5. Firm Name_____________________________________________________________
Contact________________________________________________________________
Title___________________________________________________________________
Mailing Address_________________________________________________________
Phone/Email____________________________________________________________

Sec. 7.0-4
IFB# PSR-09-01
Appendix C: Addendum Acknowledgment
The undersigned bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda, and any required
adjustments have been included in the bid sum:
Addendum No. , dated __________________
CONTRACTOR_____________________________________ (sign)
CONTRACTOR_____________________________________ (print)
FIRM NAME_______________________________________
ADDRESS__________________________________________
ADDRESS__________________________________________

Sec. 7.0-5
IFB# PSR-09-01
Appendix D: Virginia Contractor’s License
Contractor to include a copy of their current Virginia Contractor’s License with their Bid
Submission.

Sec. 7.0-6
IFB# PSR-09-01
Appendix E: General Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of liens
TO: (Owner) CONTRACT FOR: CONSTRUCTION

Town of Purcellville CONTRACT DATE: _______________
Purcellville, Virginia 20132
PROJECT: Purcellville Roller Skating Rink Alterations

State of: Virginia
County of: Loudoun
The undersigned, pursuant to Article 9 of the General Conditions of the Construction Contract
hereby certifies to the best of his knowledge information and belief that all subcontractors,
materialmen, suppliers, equipment suppliers or any other person or equity having claim on the
above project arising out of the performance of the Construction Contract have been paid or
satisfied in full, and the undersigned further holds the owner, heirs, or assigns harmless from
liens, claims or demands upon said project property forever, pursuant to the exception noted as
follows.
EXCEPTIONS: (if none, write "None") None.
This Affidavit of Release of Liens is conditioned upon receipt of $__________________ now

due and owing to General Contractor from said owner, heirs, and assigns and the signing of this
Affidavit is so conditioned for any and all claims arising hereto.
I (we) hereby declare all claims satisfied or paid in full as stated above.
By:______________________________________________________________
Attest: _______________________________________________________
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day________________, 20___.
Notary Public: _________________________________________________
My Commission Expires: ________________________________________
Sec. 7.0-7
IFB# PSR-09-01
Appendix F: Schedule of Proposed
Subcontract Value
Work to be as a
Work to be Percentage
Name Address Performed of Total Contract
The Tenderer shall state in the space provided above or on separate sheets the names of all
subcontractors he proposes to use together with any details of the nature and the scope of work to
be subcontracted including resumes of their key personnel.
Subcontractors proposed by Tenderer to perform any portion of the WORKS are subject to the
approval of OWNER meeting the construction document standards, maintaining insurance limits
and requirements as noted in the construction Documents.
Upon acceptance of his Tender, Contractor may not change any Subcontractor without the prior
written approval of the OWNER.

Sec. 7.0-8
IFB# PSR-09-01
Appendix G: Bid Bond
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, __________________________ of
_________________________ (hereinafter called the “Principal”), and ____________________
__________________, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of
_________________, with its principal office in __________________, and authorized to do
business in the Commonwealth of Virginia as a surety (hereinafter called the “Surety”), are held
and firmly bound unto TOWN OF PURCELLVILLE (hereinafter called the “Obligee”) in the
full and just sum which is equal to 5% of the total amount of the Principal’s Bid (as that term is
defined below), as submitted to the Obligee (such total amount referred to herein as the “Total
Bid”), in good and lawful money of the United States of America, to be paid upon demand of the
Obligee, for the payment of such sum well and truly to be made, the Principal and the Surety
bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and
severally and firmly by these presents. The Total Bid is the aggregate amount (including
amounts set forth with respect to any and all Alternates) set forth on the Principal’s Bid Form for
performance of the work described below, as submitted to and maintained by the Obligee (such
Bid Form referred to herein as the “Bid”). The Surety hereby acknowledges and agrees that the
Bid shall be deemed to be incorporated by reference in this Bid Bond to the same extent as if set
forth fully herein.
WHEREAS, the Principal intends to submit, or has submitted to the Obligee, a Bid for
the Principal to perform work for the Obligee, designated as:
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
(hereinafter called the “Project”) and,
WHEREAS, the Principal desires to provide this Bid Bond in lieu of a certified check or
cash escrow otherwise required to accompany the Principal’s Bid.
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH THAT,

if the Bid be accepted by the Obligee, and if the Principal shall, within ten days after the date of
receipt of a written Notice of Award from the Obligee or any agency or department thereof, (i)
execute a Contract in accordance with the Bid and upon the terms, conditions and price set forth
therein, in the form and manner required by the Obligee, (ii) execute a sufficient and satisfactory
Performance Bond in the amount of 100% of the total Contract Sum and a sufficient and
satisfactory Payment Bond in the amount of 100% of the total Contract Sum, each payable to the
Obligee, in a form and with a surety satisfactory to the Obligee, and (iii) provide the Obligee
with copies of all required insurance policies, then this obligation is to be void; otherwise this
Sec. 7.0-9
IFB# PSR-09-01
obligation shall be and remain in full force and in the event of the failure of any or all of the
foregoing requirements to be satisfied within the time period specified above, the Principal
immediately shall pay to the Obligee, upon demand, the lesser of: (a) the amount hereof and (b)
the difference between the Bid and the next low bid for the Project, in each case in good and
lawful money of the United States of America, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have caused this Bid Bond to be
signed and sealed by their duly authorized officers this _____ day of ____________, 200__.
(Seal)
________________________________
Principal
By: _________________________
Name: ___________________________
Title: _________________________
(Seal) ________________________________
Surety
By: _________________________,
Attorney-in-Fact (Attach
Copy of Power of Attorney)
Name: _________________________
Title: _________________________

Sec. 7.0-10
IFB# PSR-09-01
Appendix H: Payment Bond
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE HERE PRESENT: that Name of Contractor:

___________________________________________________________
Address of Contractor: _____________________________________________________
(STREET, CITY, STATE) (ZIP CODE)
a (Corporation, Partnership or Individual), hereinafter called Principal, and (Name of
Surety)_________________________________________________________________,
(Address of Surety) _______________________________________________________,
hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Town of Purcellville, 130
East Main Street, Purcellville, Virginia 20132, hereinafter called Owner, in the sum of
___________________________ dollars, ($____________) in lawful money of the
United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind
ourselves, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that whereas, the Principal entered
into a certain contract with the Owner, dated the ______ day of ___________________,
20____, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the:
Rehabilitation of Purcellville Roller Skating Rink
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall promptly make payment to all persons, firms,
subcontractors, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the
prosecution of the work provided for in such contract, and any authorized extension or
modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, repairs on machinery,
equipment and tools, consumed or used in connection with the construction of such work,
and all insurance premiums on said work and for all labor performed in such work
whether by subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it
shall remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received hereby stipulates and
agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract
or the work to be performed there under or the specifications accompanying the same
shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any
such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the
work or to the specifications.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Contractor
shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied.

Sec. 7.0-11
IFB# PSR-09-01
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in ______________
counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this
the _____ day of _______________, 20____.
ATTEST: Principal:
Principal Secretary _________________________________
____________________________ By: ___________________________(s)

(SEAL)
Address: _________________________
Witness as to Principal __________________________________
____________________________
Notary Public Commission Expires:
Surety:
ATTEST: __________________________________
Surety Secretary: By: (Attorney in Fact)
____________________________
__________________________________
(SEAL) Address: _________________________

Witness as to Surety __________________________________
____________________________
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract.

If Contractor is Partnership, all general partners should execute Bond.
IMPORTANT: Surety companies executing bonds must appear on the Treasury

Department's most current list (Circular 570, as amended) and be authorized to transact
business in Virginia. Powers of Attorney must be attached and valid through date of
Bond.

Sec. 7.0-12
IFB# PSR-09-01
Appendix I: Performance Bond
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE HERE PRESENT: that

Name of Contractor: _____________________________________________
Address of Contractor: __________________________________________

a (Corporation, Partnership or Individual), hereinafter called Principal, and (Name of
Surety) _________________________________________________________________,
(Address of Surety) _______________________________________________________,

hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Town of Purcellville, 130
East Main Street, Purcellville, Virginia 20132, hereinafter called Owner, in the sum of
_______________________________ dollars, ($____________) in lawful money of the
United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind
ourselves, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that whereas, the Principal entered
into a certain contract with the Owner, dated the ______ day of ___________________,
20____, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the:
Rehabilitation of Purcellville Roller Skating Rink
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall commence work well, truly and faithfully
perform its duties, all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, and agreements of
said contract during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be
granted by the Owner, with or without notice to the Surety and during one year guaranty
period, and if he shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such contract, and
shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all costs and damages which it
may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the Owner all
outlay and expense which the Owner may incur in making good any default, then this
obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received hereby stipulates and
agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract
or the work to be performed there under or the specifications accompanying the same
shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any
such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the
work or to the specifications.
Sec. 7.0-13
IFB# PSR-09-01
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in ______________
counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this
the _____ day of _______________, 20____.
ATTEST: Principal:
Principal Secretary _____________________________
____________________________ By: ________________________(s)

(SEAL)
Address: _______________________
Witness as to Principal _______________________________
_____________________________
Surety:
ATTEST: _______________________________
Surety Secretary: By: (Attorney in Fact)
____________________________ _______________________________
(SEAL) Address: ______________________
Witness as to Surety __________________________
____________________________
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract. If Contractor is

Partnership, all general partners should execute Bond.
IMPORTANT: Surety companies executing bonds must appear on the Treasury

Department's most current list (Circular 570, as amended and be authorized to transact
business in Virginia. Powers of Attorney must be attached and valid through date of
Bond.

Sec. 7.0-14
IFB# PSR-09-01
To:
Project Description: Purcellville Roller Skating Rink Alterations
The OWNER has considered the BID submitted by you for the above described work in
response to its Invitation for Bids dated February 23, 2010 and Information for Bidders.
You are hereby notified that your BID has been accepted in the amount of
$_______________________________.
You are required by the Instructions to Bidders to execute the Agreement and furnish the
required Contractor's Performance Bond, Payment Bond and Certificate of Insurance.
If you fail to execute said Agreement and to furnish said bonds said OWNER will be
entitled to consider all your rights arising out of the OWNER'S acceptance of your Bid as
abandoned and as a forfeiture of the Bid Bond. The OWNER will be entitled to such
other rights as may be granted by law.
Dated this________ day of_________, 20____
OWNER: Town of Purcellville
BY: ________________________________________
TITLE: ________________________________________

Sec. 7.0-15
IFB# PSR-09-01
TO:
DATE: _______________________________
PROJECT: Purcellville Roller Skating Rink Alterations
You are hereby notified to commence work in accordance with the Agreement dated
_______________________________________, 20____.
You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this NOTICE TO PROCEED to the
OWNER.
OWNER: Town of Purcellville
BY: __________________________________
TITLE:__________________________________
ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE
Receipt of the above NOTICE TO PROCEED
is hereby acknowledged by ____________
______________________________________
this _____________________________ day of
______________________________________
BY: __________________________________
Contractor
TITLE: _______________________________

Sec. 7.0-16
IFB# PSR-09-01
Order No. _________________

Date: _____________________
Agreement Date: ____________
Name of Project: _________________________________

Owner: ___________________________________________
Contractor: ______________________________________
The following changes are hereby made to the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
NOTE: This Change Order does not include changes in the Contract Sum, Contract Time
or Guaranteed Maximum Price which have been authorized by Construction Change
Directives until the cost and time have been agreed upon by both the Owner and
Contractor, in which case a Change Order is executed to supersede the Construction
Change Directive.
ALSO NOTE that no fixed price Contract may be increased by more than 25% of the
amount of the Contract, or $50,000, whichever is greater, without advance written
approval of the Town Council, reference Section 2.2 - 4309.
Original Contract Price: $ _____________________
Current Contract Price adjusted by previous Change Order(s): $ __________________.
Contract Price due to this Change Order will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by
$ _____________________.
New Contract Price including this Change Order will be $__________________.
Current date for completion: ____________________ (date)
The Contract date for completion will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by

___________ calendar days.
The date for completion of all work will be _____________ (date).
The agreed upon Change order amount contained herein constitutes all costs associated
with this change including all impact and delay costs.
ACCEPTED BY: ________________________________

ACCEPTED BY: _______________________________

Contractor
Sec. 7.0-17
IFB# PSR-09-01
1.0 GENERAL
Prior to final payment, the Contractor shall sign the attached warranty prepared by
the Director of Public Works. The Work shall be warranted for a period of two
years from acceptance of the verified as-built records. These records shall be
referenced in the warranty and shall become a part of the warranty so repairs
under warranty can be located. The warranty shall assign the rights to materials
and manufacturer’s warranties to the Owner. Work shall be warranted against
failure and other defects in material and workmanship shall also be included in
the warranty.
PROJECT ACCEPTANCE LETTER AND WARRANTY
In accordance with the contract dated _______________________, and addenda

dated __________________between (Contractor)_______________________
and (Owner) Town of Purcellville for the above referenced project, an inspection
of this work has been conducted by Contractor. Work has been found to be
complete and in accordance with contract specifications. The warranty start date
shall commence ______________________and expire _____________________.
Attached are copies of applicable manufacturer’s warranties. Rights to materials

and manufacturer’s warranties are hereby assigned to the Owner. Work is
warranted against defective materials & workmanship and shall be replaced by
Contractor during Period of Warranty, upon notification by Owner and at no cost
to Owner.
PROJECT ACCEPTANCE LETTER AND WARRANTY
Project Name_______________________________________________________
Number: ________________________________________________________
Address: _________________________________________________________
Address: _________________________________________________________
Engineer: _______________________________________
Date: ________________
Project Identification: (Description of Work)

Sec. 7.0-18
IFB# PSR-09-01
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Attachments: (Drawings and other documents)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Exception to Original Contract: List all or None - None
__________________________________________________________________
ACCEPTED BY:
__________________________________________________________________
ENGINEER (Representing the Owner)
_______________________________________________
Contractor
_______________________________________________
Address
_______________________________________________
Address
_______________________________________________
Contact Name & Title
_______________________________________________
Telephone Number Date

Sec. 7.0-19
IFB# PSR-09-01
SECTION 8.0
TREE PRESERVATION PROCEDURES & SPECIFICATIONS

Sec. 08-1
IFB# PSR-09-02
TREE PRESERVATION PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS
IN
LOUDOUN COUNTY, VIRGINIA
ORDINANCE NO. 06-04-01 PRESENTED: April 4, 2006

ADOPTED: November 14, 2006
AN ORDINANCE: AMENDING CHAPTER 86. VEGETATION; BY CREATING

SECTION 86-2 TREE CONSERVATION; OF THE TOWN CODE
OF THE TOWN OF PURCELLVILLE PURSUANT TO SECTION
10.1-1127.1 OF THE CODE OF VIRGINIA AND SECTION 15.2
THE CODE OF VIRGINIA
BE IT ENACTED AND ORDAINED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE TOWN OF

PURCELLVILLE THAT CHAPTER 86 OF THE TOWN CODE OF THE TOWN OF
PURCELLVILLE IS HEREBY AMENDED BY ADDING A NEW SECTION 86-2 AND
RENUMBERING THE RESERVED SECTIONS AS FOLLOWS:
Chapter 86. VEGETATION
Section 86-1. Weeds and other foreign growth on vacant developed or undeveloped property.
Section 86-2. Tree Conservation
Section 86-2.3 Purpose.
The purpose of this section is to encourage the planting and proper care of trees throughout
the Town, to promote the preservation of existing trees and the replenishment of tree stock to the
maximum extent possible. These actions are intended to promote and contribute to the health,
safety and general welfare of the Town and its inhabitants by decreasing flooding, soil erosion,
air pollution and noise, by removing unsafe and hazardous conditions and by improving
aesthetics and quality of life.
Section 86-22 Definitions.
The following words, terms and phrases, when used in this section,
shall have the meanings ascribed to them in this section, except where the context clearly requires a different
Sec. 08-2
IFB# PSR-09-02
meaning:
Arborist or Urban Forester - A person trained in arboriculture, forestry, landscape

architecture, horticulture or related fields and experienced in the conservation and preservation of
trees.
Critical root zone (CRZ) – This is the root zone of the tree that extends out from the trunk to
the normal drip line and beyond. At a minimum, the CRZ is defined to be 1 foot per diameter
inch up to 1.5 feet per diameter inch depending on the species.
Diameter at breast height (dbh) – The diameter of a tree is determined by measuring the
circumference of the trunk at 4.5 feet above the ground or at breast height. In the case of multiple
trunks, the collective diameter of all trunks at 4.5 feet above grade will constitute this
measurement.
Drip Line – A line depicting the circumference of the spread of the tree.
Heritage tree - Any tree which has been individually designated by the Town Council to have
notable historic or cultural interest.
Memorial tree - Any tree which has been individually designated by the Town Council to be
a special commemorating memorial.
Park tree – Any tree, shrub or woody vegetation in an individually named public park and in
all public property owned by the town and to which the public has free access such as a park.
Private property – Any parcel of land, right-of-way or easement owned by a private entity.
Public property - Any parcel of land, right-of-way or easement owned by a public entity,
including but not limited to the Town of Purcellville, Loudoun County and the Northern Virginia
Regional Park Authority.
Silviculture - The management of forests or woodlands for the production of timber and other
wood products; i.e., growing trees as a crop.
Specimen tree – Any tree which has been individually designated by the Town Council to be
notable by virtue of its outstanding size and quality for its particular species.
Street tree – Any tree which has been individually designated by the Town Council and
which grows or is proposed to be grown in the street right-of-way, in a public tree planting
easement or on private property as authorized by the owner and placed or planted there by the
Town.
Sec. 08-3
IFB# PSR-09-02
Town Arborist – The Arborist or Urban Forester designated by the [Town Council] [Town
Manager].
Tree – A woody perennial plant having at least one well-defined stem or trunk and with a
diameter of 4 inches or more at a point 4.5 feet above ground. The Town Arborist/Tree and
Beautification Commission (or Town designee) shall have the right to determine whether any
specific woody plant shall be considered a tree or a shrub. Such determination shall be final and
not subject to appeal.
Tree and Beautification Commission – The commission established by Ordinance No. 04-09-
01 on November 9, 2004 with a majority of the members being residents of the town.
Tree topping - The severe cutting back of limbs to stubs to such a degree so as to remove the
normal canopy, injure and/or disfigure the tree.
Vision Clearance – The area included within the street that, if obstructed, will materially
impede the view of a driver of a vehicle approaching a street intersection.
Section 86-3.0 Plan for care of trees on public property
The Town Arborist/Tree and Beautification Commission

(or Town designee) shall develop, update annually, and administer a management plan for the
care, preservation, pruning, planting, replanting, removal or disposition of trees and shrubs in
parks, along streets, and in other public property. The plan shall be submitted at the end of the
fiscal year to the Town Council.
The standards and specifications contained within the plan shall apply not only to work
performed by the Town but to private individuals and contractors as well.
Section 86-3.1 Listing of trees acceptable for planting (See Town of Purcellville Zoning
Ordinance)
The Town Arborist/Tree and Beautification Commission (or Town designee) shall develop,
maintain and update a listing of trees considered most desirable for planting along streets in the
following three size classes based on mature height:
Small (under 15 feet)

Medium (15 to 30 feet)
Large (over 30 feet)
A list of trees not suitable for planting shall also be developed and regularly reviewed and
updated by the Town Arborist/Tree and Beautification Commission (or Town designee). This

Sec. 08-4
IFB# PSR-09-02
list will include, among others, trees considered to be invasive and those that are considered to be
water-seeking trees.
Section 86-3.2 Spacing between street trees
Street trees shall be planted no closer together than the following:
Small size class 25 feet

Medium size class 40 feet
Large size class 50 feet
An exception may be made to the above spacing for special plantings depending upon the
species, setting or purpose as authorized by the Town Arborist/Tree and Beautification
Commission (or Town designee) and as described in the Town of Purcellville Zoning Ordinance.
Section 86 -3.3 Plantings near Curbs and Sidewalks (See Town of Purcellville Zoning
Ordinance)
Street trees may be planted no closer than 4 feet to any curb or sidewalk. An exception may
be made for special plantings if authorized by the Town Arborist/Tree and Beautification
Commission (or Town designee).
Section 86-3.4 Plantings Near Street Corners and Fire Hydrants
No tree shall be planted near street corners or curbs in such a way as to obstruct visual
clearance in conformance with VDOT site clearance standards. No tree shall be planted within
10 feet of any fire hydrant.
Section 86-3.5 Plantings Near Overhead Utilities
No street tree shall be planted near overhead utilities other than those species included in the
Virginia Cooperative Extension publication 430-029.
An exception may be made for special plantings if authorized by the Town Arborist/Tree and
Beautification Commission (or Town designee).
Section 86-3.6 Pruning Street Trees by Utility Companies
Public utility companies shall notify the Town Arborist/Tree and Beautification Commission
(or Town designee) in writing prior to any pruning of any tree located on Town owned property
or within a Town easement for the purpose of maintaining safe line clearance. Such work shall be
performed in accordance with accepted arboricultural standards set forth by the International
Society of Arboriculture.

Sec. 08-5
IFB# PSR-09-02
Section 86-4.0 Planting, Maintenance and Removal
The Town shall have the right to plant, maintain, and remove trees, plants and other woody
ornamentals or parts thereof on public property or within Town easements. The Town
Arborist/Tree and Beautification Commission (or Town designee) may remove or order to
remove any tree or part thereof which is in an unsafe condition, or which by reason of its nature
is injurious to, or limits access to sewers, fire hydrants, electric lines, or other utility lines (pipes),
or any other public improvements,
or is affected with any injurious disease, insect or condition.
This section does not prohibit the planting of street trees within the road right-of-way by
abutting property owners as a donation or contribution, provided the Town Arborist/Tree and
Beautification Commission (or Town designee) grants prior written approval. The selection and
location of said trees shall be in accordance with the provisions of this ordinance, the Town of
Purcellville Zoning Ordinance and any other applicable Town regulations.
The Town may also allow Right-of-Way (ROW) plantings provided the Town Arborist/Tree
and Beautification Commission (or Town designee) gives prior written permission. A written
request to install ROW plantings shall be addressed to the Town Arborist/Tree and Beautification
Commission (or Town A tree management plan is required with site development plans and
subdivision applications as noted in the Town of Purcellville Zoning Ordinance.
designee).
Section 86-4.1 Tree Management Plan (to be included in Zoning Ordinance)
The Tree and Beautification Commission may serve in an advisory capacity to the Planning
Commission in the administration of the Town’s landscaping, screening and open space
regulations.
Section 86-4.2 Installation of Tree Lights
Prior written approval of the Town Arborist/Tree and Beautification Commission (or Town
designee) is required to install decorative lights in Town-owned trees on public property and such
lights may be installed only for periods which will not interfere with the proper growth and
maintenance of the trees. All lighting must fully comply with the Town of Purcellville Zoning
Ordinance outdoor lighting regulations. Effort should be made to install power at the time of
initial tree planting.
Section 86-4.3 Pruning of Privately Owned Trees
Every owner of any tree overhanging any public street or public right-of-way within the
Town shall prune the branches so that such branches shall not severely obstruct the light from
any street lamp or obstruct the view of any street intersection, and so that there shall be a clear

Sec. 08-6
IFB# PSR-09-02
space of fourteen feet (14’) above street surface or eight (8’) above the sidewalk surface. Said
owners shall remove all dead or diseased trees or all broken and decayed limbs which constitute
an elevated risk to public safety.
In the event any such tree is not pruned or removed as required in this section, a Notice of
Intent to Prune shall be sent to the homeowner by certified mail. The homeowner will have 60
days from the date of such Notice to comply.
If compliance is not met within this time frame, the Town may perform the pruning and
charge the costs to the homeowner by presenting evidence of the costs incurred to the
homeowner. The homeowner shall then pay such costs within 60 days after the receipt of
evidence of such costs.
Section 86-4.4 Removal of Tree Stumps
Tree stumps located on public property shall be removed below the surface of the ground so
that the top of the stump shall not project above the existing grade.
Section. 86-5.0 Acts Harmful to Trees on Public Property.
(a) No person shall abuse, mutilate or otherwise damage any tree located on public property,
or any tree protected by Section 86-7.0 (below), including those street trees located along street
frontages within a subdivision. However, nothing in this section shall be construed to prevent
reasonable and proper trimming of trees located on public property by authorized persons in
accordance with accepted arboricultural standards set forth by the International Society of
Arboriculture.
(b) No person shall attach any sign, notice, placard, electrical wire or other injurious device
to any tree, nor shall any person cause any substance harmful to trees to come in contact with
them, or prevent water and oxygen from reaching their roots. The use of tree-climbing spikes is
prohibited except for removals or in emergencies.
(c) No person shall cover the ground with impervious material any closer to the trunk of a
tree than its drip line. This provision may be waived by the Town Arborist, Tree and
Beautification Commission (or Town designee) if it is determined that the proposed action will
not harm the tree.
(d) Unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Town Arborist/Tree and Beautification
Commission (or Town designee), it shall be unlawful as a normal practice for any person or firm
to top any tree on public property.
(e) Trees severely damaged by storms or other causes, or certain trees under utility wires or
other obstructions where other pruning practices are impractical, may be exempted from this

Sec. 08-7
IFB# PSR-09-02
ordinance at the determination of the Town Arborist/Tree and Beautification Commission (or
Town designee).
Section 86-6.0. Diseased or Dangerous Trees on Private Property.
When the Town Arborist/Tree and Beautification Commission (or Town designee) finds
that a tree growing on private property creates an elevated risk to the public safety or welfare,
s/he shall order the owner to remove the tree or otherwise eliminate the hazardous condition. If
the property owner fails to comply with such order within thirty (30) days of notification by
certified mail, or sooner if necessary to protect the public safety, the Town Arborist (or Town
designee) may enter the property, remove the tree or otherwise mitigate the hazardous condition,
and assess the cost thereof against the property owner.
Sec 86-7.0. Designation and Preservation of Special Trees.
This section shall regulate the preservation and removal of heritage, specimen,
memorial and street trees as specified in State Code section 10.1 -1127
(a) The designation of a tree as heritage, memorial, specimen or street, as defined in this
ordinance shall be recommended by the Town Arborist and approved by the Town Council
through adoption of this ordinance. No tree on private property shall be designated without the
express written consent of the property owner.
(b) This article does not apply to:
1. Work conducted on federal or state property;

2. Emergency work to protect life, limb or property;
3. Routine installation, maintenance and repair of cable and wires used to provide cable
television, electric, gas or telephone service;
4. Activities with minor effects on trees, including but not limited to home gardening
and landscaping of individual homes; and
5. Commercial silvicultural or horticultural activities including but not limited to
planting, managing, or harvesting forest or tree crops.
(c) If the application of this section results in any taking of private property for a public
purpose or use, the Town shall compensate by fee or other consideration the property owner for
such taking.
(d) In the event of such a taking, the provisions of Chapter 2 of Title 25.1 of the Code of
Virginia, revised, shall apply. However, it is the intent of the Town that the application of this
article shall not result in any taking of private property for public purposes without the express

Sec. 08-8
IFB# PSR-09-02
written consent of the owner. To the extent that the owner’s express written consent grants the
Town any rights, that grant of rights is a gift.
(e) In deciding whether to designate trees, the Town shall consider planned land use by the
property owner and by the Purcellville Comprehensive Plan.
(f) Designation of a tree under this section does not obligate the Town to inspect, maintain,
or take any other action with regard to that tree.
(g) The Town will maintain a database of all designated trees.
Section 86-8.0 Education, Advice, and Assistance
(a) The Town Arborist/Tree and Beautification Commission (or Town designee) shall
educate the public on the benefits of tree designation and the monetary and non monetary value
of trees.
(b) The Town Arborist/Tree and Beautification Commission (or Town designee) shall
provide information on the care, preservation, maintenance and/or removal of trees specifically
designated as heritage, memorial or specimen trees to owners of the trees upon written request.
(c) The Town Arborist/Tree and Beautification Commission (or Town designee) may
provide materials to property owners of designated trees for tree care, including fertilizer, soil
conditioners, and ecologically safe pesticides when available.
(d) Any site plan, subdivision plan, or zoning permit application that concerns a property
which has a designated tree, the Town Arborist/Tree and Beautification Commission (or Town
designee) shall advise the property owner of its presence and suggest ways of preserving and
maintaining the designated tree. Additionally, the provisions contained in Code of Virginia,
Sections 15.2-960 and 15.2-961, as revised, shall apply.
[Upon reasonable notice, t]he Town Arborist/Tree and Beautification Commission (or Town
designee) may inspect designated trees from time to time for safety and maintenance. When the
Town Arborist conducts an inspection, s/he will give the owners of the property his/her written
findings and recommendations, if any, related to the designated trees.
86-9.0. Violations.
Violation of this ordinance shall constitute a civil offense and be subject to fines up to
$2500 for each violation. For purposes of this section, each tree removed or harmed without
meeting the provisions of this article shall constitute a separate offense.
86-10.0 Enforcement.

Sec. 08-9
IFB# PSR-09-02
The Town Arborist/Tree Beautification Commission (or Town Designee) is hereby
charged with the responsibility for the enforcement of this ordinance.
86-11.0. Liability.
Nothing in this ordinance shall be deemed to impose any liability upon the Town, its
officers or employees, the Town Arborist, the Tree and Beautification Commission or its
members, nor to relieve the owner of any private property from the duty to keep any tree, shrub
or plant upon any street tree area on his property or under his control in such condition as to
prevent it from constituting a hazard or an impediment to travel or vision upon any street, park or
other public place within the Town.
86-12.0 Appeals.
Appeals from official actions taken in response to the provisions of this ordinance shall
be made to the Town Council. The procedure for such appeals shall be the same as that set forth
in the Ordinance for appeals from the Board of Architectural Review.
86.13.0 Severability.
Should any subsection, sentence, clause, provision or part of this section be held invalid
for any reason, the remainder of this section shall not be affected thereby, but shall remain in full
force and effect.
86.14.0 Effective Date.
This section is hereby declared to be in full force and effective from and after its passage
and publication as provided by law.
Section 86-15.0 thru 86-40. RESERVED
State law reference: 10.1-1127.1
PASSED THE 14th DAY OF NOVEMBER 2006
___________________________________
Robert W. Lazaro, Jr., Mayor
ATTEST:
________________________________
Jennifer L. Moore, Clerk of Council

Sec. 08-10
IFB# PSR-09-02
SECTION 01015 - BIDDING PROCESS
A. Bidding Documents
1. Bidding Documents are on file and may be examined at the office of the Director of Public
Works and Capital Projects, 130 E Main St, Purcellville, Virginia, 20132, as well as those plan
rooms listed in the Invitation to Bid.
2. The Owner, in making copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does
so only for the purpose of obtaining bids on Work and does not confer a license or grant for
any other use.
3. Bidding documents include the following:
a) Invitation to Bid
b) Proposal Form
c) Specifications
d) Drawings
e) All Supplements and Addenda to the Bidding Documents issued
4. Bidders shall promptly review all Drawings, Details, Specifications, Addenda and the like to
assure completeness. If for any reason an item is missing from the transmitted list; the
Bidder shall so notify, in writing, the Owner who will assist in his receiving said item(s).
Missing item(s) shall not constitute grounds for modification of the Contract.
5. Supplements, Addenda, and any other material or information issued during the bidding
period, will be issued only to contractors and suppliers with deposits on file and in the
quantities of sets transmitted.
6. Access to Documents
6.1 During the performance of this Contract the successful Bidder/Contractor shall agree to
abide by all provisions of Paragraph 100.12, Town of Purcellville Purchasing Regulations,
that relate to access to documents.
B. Inspection of Site
1. Each bidder should visit the site of the proposed work and fully acquaint themselves with the
existing conditions relating to construction and labor, and should fully inform himself as to the
facilities involved, the difficulties, restrictions, and logical extensions of scope attending the
performance of the Contract. The Bidder should thoroughly examine and familiarize himself
with the Drawings, Technical Specifications and all other Contract Documents. The
Contractor, by the execution of the Contract, shall in no way be relieved of any obligation
under it because of his failure to receive or examine any form or document or to visit the site
and inform himself thoroughly regarding any and all conditions and requirements that may in
any manner affect the Work to be performed under the Contract. Lack of knowledge on the
part of the Contractor will in no way relieve him of the obligation and responsibilities assumed
under the Contract.
C. Interpretations and Addenda
BIDDING 01050 - 1
1. Bidders shall promptly notify the Owner of all ambiguities, inconsistencies or errors which
they may discover upon examination of the Bidding Documents for each portion of the Project
and for descriptions of the site and local conditions. No oral interpretation will be made to any
bidder as to the meaning of the Contract Documents or any part thereof. Every request for
such an interpretation shall be made in writing to the Town of Purcellville at the address in the
Invitation to Bid.
2. Any inquiry received seven (7) or more business days prior to the date fixed for opening of
bids will be given consideration. Every interpretation made to a Bidder will be in the form of a
Supplement to the Contract Documents and, when issued, will be on file in all of the offices
where the Contract Documents are located, at least seven (7) business days before bids are
due.
In addition, all Supplements will be mailed to each firm to whom Contract Documents have
been issued, but it shall be the Bidder's responsibility to make inquiry as to, and to obtain, the
Supplements issued, if any. All such Supplements and Addenda shall be listed in the Bid
Form in the space provided and shall become part of the Contract. Each bidder shall be
bound by such Supplements, whether or not received by the Bidder. Only a written
interpretation or correction by Supplement issued by the Owner will be binding.
D. Post Bid Information
1. Unless waived by the Owner, the successful Bidder shall, within fifteen (15) days of
notification of selection for the award of a contract for the Work, submits the following
information to the Owner.
a) The percentage of the Work to be performed by the Bidder with his own forces.
b) The proprietary names and the suppliers of principal items or systems of material and
equipment proposed for the Work.
c) A list of names of the Subcontractors or other persons or organizations, including

those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design and/or
those who are to provide inspection and testing services, proposed for the principal
portions of the Work.
2. After award of the Contract, the successful Bidder will be notified by the Owner whether he,
after due investigation, has reasonable and substantial objection to any person or
organization on such list. If such an objection is expressed and if the Owner refuses, in
writing, to accept such person or organization, the bidder may submit an acceptable
substitute Subcontractor with an increase or decrease in his bid price to cover the difference
in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may, at his discretion, accept the
revised bid price or he may disqualify the Bidder. In the event of disqualification under this
subparagraph, bid security will not be forfeited.
3. Subcontractors and other persons and organizations proposed by the Bidder and accepted
by the Owner, must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and accepted and
shall not be changed except with the written approval of the Owner.
4. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, the Owner reserves the right to
remove or cause to be removed from the Project, any employee of the Contractor or his
contractors, whenever the Owner deems, in his sole discretion, such action to be in the best
interest of the Project.
BIDDING 01050 - 2
E. Technical Specifications
1. The Technical Specifications contained in the Project Specifications (hereinafter referred to

as "Specifications"), are arranged, numbered and titled in conformance with The Construction
Specification Institute (CSI).
2. Where compliance with two (2) or more sets of requirements is specified, and overlapping of
those requirements establishes two different levels or minimums for a particular quality, the
more stringent level will be enforced; this is generally the more costly of the two levels. Refer
instances of different but equal requirements to the engineer through the Owner for decision.
Refer instances of uncertainty as to which of two levels of quality is more stringent to the
Engineer through the Owner for decision.
F. Substitutions
1. The materials, products and equipment described or named in the Bidding Documents
establish a standard, required function, dimension, appearance and/or quality to be met by
any proposed substitution. Each bid shall be based upon the materials and equipment
described or named in the bidding documents. Where systems or products are designated in
the Specifications or on the Drawings by reference to trade names, manufacturer's names,
model numbers, catalog numbers, etc., the bid shall be based on the specific system or
products so designated and the Contract will be awarded on that basis. The foregoing
applies regardless of whether the listing of manufacturer's and/or products in the
specifications is prefaced by phrases such as "equal to", "such as" or the like. The listing of
manufacturers' names or proprietary projects in the Specifications does not, however, imply
Engineer's approval of deviations from specification requirements.
2. Request for substitutions will be considered only during the bidding period when the proposed
substitute will offer better service, more advantageous delivery date, or lesser price, with full
credit to the Owner, without sacrificing quality, appearance or function. No substitution will be
considered unless written request for approval has been submitted by the bidder to the
Owner prior to 7 business days before the bid opening date. No substitutions will be
accepted after the deadline established above.
3. Each substitution request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is
to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including drawing,
cuts, performance and test data and any other information necessary for an evaluation. A
statement setting forth any changes in other materials, equipment or work that incorporation
of the substitute would require shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the
proposed substitute is upon the proposer. The Engineer's decision of approval or
disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final and it shall be understood that approval
or rejection is in no way endorsement or derogation of the product.
4. If the Engineer approves any proposed substitution, such approval will be set forth in an
Addendum issued by the Owner. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other
manner.
G. Safety Requirements
All Contractors will be required to comply with the provisions of the "Construction Safety Act"
and the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970". The
Contractor shall submit to the Owner a site specific written safety program, for approval. This
program shall adhere to all applicable Federal, State, local and project requirements.
BIDDING 01050 - 3
H. Unit Prices
1. Unit prices, if requested in the Proposal Form shall be used, where applicable, to make
adjustments to the cost of the Work of the Contract due to changes to the Work required by
the drawings and Specifications. The prices shall be predicated upon the materials, methods
and standards of quality set forth in the Specifications. Unit prices submitted shall be
reasonably within the range of current pricing in the region, and acceptable to the Owner for
complete in-place work. Unit prices shall include all cost for overhead, profit, all applicable
Federal, State, Municipal or local taxes, labor, materials, equipment, or any other incidentals
related to the completion of the Work.
I. The Contractor shall prepare a Material Status Report not later than (10) calendar days after the
project schedule is approved. The report shall include a complete list of suppliers, items to be
purchased from them, the fabricator and/or manufacturer, time required and the promised delivery
dates for each item. This report shall be updated and submitted with the payment requisition
monthly or as requested by the Owners representative.
J. Soil testing to be performed by an independent testing laboratory under direct contract with the
Owner.
END OF SECTION 01050
BIDDING 01050 - 4
SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.

2. Type of the Contract.
3. Owner's occupancy requirements.
4. Specification formats and conventions.
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Purcellville Roller Rink Repair
1. Project Location: 250 South Nursery Avenue, Purcellville, VA 20132
B. Owner: Town of Purcellville
C. Project Administrator: Town of Purcellville Public Works
1. Contact: Mr. Samer S. Beidas, P.E., C.C.M.

Director of Public Works
130 East Main Street, Purcellville, VA 20132
D. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated February 21, 2010 were prepared for
the Project by Shaffer, Wilson, Sarver, and Gray, PC., 1821 Michael Faraday Drive, Suite 302,
Reston, VA 20190
E. The Work includes but is not limited to alteration of existing toilet rooms, addition of new
mechanical room and areas for mechanical equipment, replacing existing mechanical system
with new geothermal mechanical system, installation of new sprinkler system, replacing existing
water service with larger service, installation of rolling counter door, replacing existing stage
stair with new one and refinishing interior surfaces.
1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT
A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
SUMMARY 01100 - 1
1.5 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of the areas within the scope of the project for
construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only
by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
1.6 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy
and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial
Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such
placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of
the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.
2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
occupancy.
3. Before partial Owner occupancy, electrical systems shall be fully operational, and
required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner
will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of
building.
1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the
Specifications.
1.8 WORK HOURS
A. All work on this project shall be conducted between the hours of 7:00 AM and 5:00 PM M-F.
Additional hours after 5:00 PM M-F and on weekends will be considered, provided the
Contractor complies with the Town ordnance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
SUMMARY 01100 - 2
SECTION 01110 – GENERAL
Contractor and Subcontractors shall review, check, and verify all dimensions and details on the drawings
for correctness and conformance with the specifications, in advance of proceeding with all phases of the
Work. Any variations and/or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Owner for resolution in
advance of proceeding with the Work.
All work shall be in accordance with applicable VDOT County, IEBC, Virginia USBC, UL codes and ordin-
ances, all other applicable codes, and the 2007 edition of AIA Document A201, "General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction." All materials and equipment shall be selected and installed in strict accor-
dance with the Plans and Specifications, and the manufacturer's recommendations.
The procurement of all other permits and inspections associated with this job will be the responsibility of
the General Contractor, as well as all fees for permits and inspections.
General Applicability of Standards: Applicable standards of construction industry have same force and
effect (and are made a part of contract documents by reference) as if set forth directly in the contract
documents, or as if published copies were bound herewith.
Reference standards: For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade or Federal Stan-
dards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or
are required by applicable codes.
Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents.
Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarifica-
tion from Owner before proceeding.
The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the
Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, the Contractor immediately upon receipt
shall submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settle-
ments, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence and
records established in conjunction with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work.
Working hours: All work hours shall conform to the requirements of the Town’s noise ordinance and re-
strictions on work within the right-of-way.
Utility locations: Contractor shall confirm location of all utilities that may impact work and shall coordinate
with Miss Utility to mark/identify all utility locations prior to start of work and or a third party location
service.
Coordinating: Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling and coordinating all aspects of work.
Tree Protection: Tree protection, limits of clearing & grading, specific vegetation to be removed shall be
confirmed in field by the Town Arborist prior to start of work and Section 8.0 Tree Preservation
Procedures & Specifications.
Traffic Regulations: Procedures described in Virginia Department of Transportation Specifications, Sec-

tion 105 shall be followed as if herein specified. Traffic control must be coordinated in advance, minimum
of three (3) working days with Director of Public Works, and Police Department. This requirement applies
to all emergency egress routes.
GENERAL 01110 - 1
Progress Meetings, Reporting: In addition to specific coordination meetings for each element of work,
and other regular project meetings for other purposes, the Contractor shall hold general progress meet-
ings (one per month) prior to the pay request. The pay request shall be submitted on the 25th of the
month.
Payment Requests: Except as otherwise indicated, sequence of progress payments is to be regular, and
each must be consistent with previous applications and payments. It is recognized that certain applica-
tions involve extra requirements, including initial application, application at times of substantial comple-
tion, and final payment application.
Payment Application Times: The "date" for each progress payment is as indicated in Owner-Contractor
Agreement. The period of construction work covered by each payment request is the period indicated in
Owner-Contractor Agreement.
Payment Application Forms: The Contractor shall obtain and use AIA Document G702 and Continuation
Sheets; available from Publications Div., The American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue,
NW, Washington, DC 20006 (also available at most local AIA Chapter offices) for all payment applica-
tions.
Initial Payment Application: The principal administration actions and submittals which must precede by
ten (10) working days and coincide with first payment application can be summarized as follows, but not
necessarily by way of limitation.
Listing of subcontractors and principal suppliers and fabricators.
Schedule of values.
Progress schedule (preliminary if not final).
Listing of contractor's staff assignments and principal consultants.
Copies of acquired building permits and similar authorizations and licenses from governing au-
thorities for current performance of the work as required.
Application at Time of Substantial Completion: A "special" payment application must be prepared and
submitted by the Contractor. The principal administrative actions and submittals which must proceed or
coincide with such special applications can be summarized as follows, but not necessarily by way of limi-
tation:
Final Acceptance and similar approvals or certifications by governing authorities assuring Own-
er's full access and use of completed work, specifically use of the building, sanitary sewer and
waterline.
Warranties, guarantees, maintenance agreements, similar provisions of contract documents.
Maintenance instructions, meter readings and similar changeover information germane to Own-
er's occupancy, use, operation and maintenance of completed work.
Final cleaning of the work.
Listing of Contractor's incomplete work in the form of a "punch list" with a schedule for comple-
tion.
Final Payment Application: The administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide
with submittal of final payment, excluding retention, application can be summarized as follows, but not
necessarily by way of limitation:
GENERAL 01110 - 2
Completion of project close-out requirements.
Completion of items specified for completion beyond time of substantial completion (regardless of
whether special payment application was previously made).
Submit certifications that construction has been completed in accordance with local code re-
quirements from all agencies having jurisdiction as provided by law.
Proof, satisfactory to Owner, that taxes, fees and similar obligations of Contractor have been
paid.
Removal of temporary facilities, services, surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements.
Provide notarized copies of warranties. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors,
suppliers and manufacturers.
Provide all Lien releases.
Inspections, Tests, and Reports: Required inspection and testing services are intended to assist in de-
termination of probable compliances of the work with requirements, but do not relieve Contractor of re-
sponsibility for those compliances, or for general fulfillment of requirements of Contract Documents. Spe-
cified inspections and tests are not intended to limit Contractor's quality control program. The Contractor
shall afford reasonable access to agencies performing tests and inspections.
Qualification of Testing Agencies: Except as otherwise indicated and except where manufacturer's test-
ing facilities are indicated as acceptable, the Owner shall engage independent testing laboratories specia-
lizing in required services and complying with "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory
Qualification" by ACIL.
Reports: The Contractor shall submit test/inspection reports, including testing agency's analysis of results
and recommendations where applicable in duplicate to Owner except as otherwise indicated, and submit
copies directly to governing authorities where required or requested.
Cutting and Patching: The Contractor shall not cut-and-patch operational elements and safety-related
components in a manner resulting in reduction of capacities to perform in manner intended or resulting in
decreased operational life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety. The Contractor shall remove
and replace work judged by Owner to be cut-and-patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
Materials: The Contractor shall except as otherwise indicated or approved by Owner, provide materials
for cutting-and-patching which will result in equal-or-better work than work being cut-and-patched; in
terms of performance characteristics and including visual effect where applicable. The Contractor shall
use materials identical with original materials where feasible and where recognized by the Owner that
satisfactory results can be produced thereby.
General Submittal Requirements: The Contractor shall coordinate preparation and processing of submit-
tals with performance of the work so that work will not be delayed by submittals. The Contractor shall
coordinate and sequence different categories of submittals for same work, and for interfacing units of
work, so that one will not be delayed for coordination with another.
Submittal Certification: The Contractor shall review all submittals and drawings before submission to
Owner, the Contractor shall make necessary corrections, and certify that each submittal and drawing has
met the specification requirements and all dimensions, conditions, and quantities are verified as shown
and/or corrected on the drawing. This certification shall be signed by an authorized representative for the
General Contractor.
GENERAL 01110 - 3
Corrections: If Owner's correction or absence of correction on a submittal or shop drawing or sample in-
volves work which Contractor considers an extra to contract, such correction or lack of correction shall not
be construed as an order for extra or additional work. In this event, the Contractor shall submit a claim as
provided in Article 12 of General Conditions, prior to proceeding with the work in question.
Submittal: The Contractor shall submit 3 prints or copies, plus 2 additional prints or copies where re-
quired for maintenance manuals; plus number of prints or copies needed for distribution to others; 3 prints
or copies will be retained by the Owner and remainder will be returned to the Contractor.
Guarantees: Upon completion of the Work prior to final payment, guarantees required by technical divi-
sions of specifications shall be properly executed in duplicate by Subcontractors and submitted to the
Contractor who shall submit them to the Owner. Where separate guarantees for certain portions of work
are for periods greater than one year, the General Contractor's guarantee shall extend to cover such
longer periods.
The Contractor shall submit guarantee covering entire project for one year. This guarantee shall com-
mence on the day all close-out requirements, including punch list, have been satisfied. The guarantee
shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
1. Guarantee all work shown on drawings and specified with approved modifications as fol-
lows:
A. Against faulty or imperfect material or workmanship.
B. That the work shall be entirely watertight and leak proof.
C. That all mechanical devices and equipment shall operate satisfactory with ordinary
care and shall perform their specified or intended functions.
2. Contractor shall replace, correct, or repair any work found to be imperfect, improper, not
watertight, not leak proof or which does not operate satisfactorily or perform as specified,
at no expense of the Owner.
3. In the event of such required correction, Contractor shall make good all damage to other
work caused by such corrective measures.
4. Contractor shall also comply with all other guarantees stipulated elsewhere in the specifi-
cations.
5. Neither final payment, final certificate, nor any provision of Contract Documents, relieves
the Contractor from their responsibilities under this guarantee.
6. If at any time, deficiencies in the work are discovered which result from a deliberate at-
tempt to defraud the Owner, the Contractor will be held liable for replacement or correc-
tion, regardless of the time limit on the guarantee.
As-built Drawings: Contractor shall provide the Owner with a complete set of As-built Drawings indicating
final location and elevations of all features of the project obscured from view to include, but not be limited
to, the sanitary sewer lines, elevations of structures and inverts, and the location and elevation of water-
line.
Surveyor: The Contractor shall engage a land surveyor or professional engineer experienced and specia-
lizing in land survey work, who is registered in the state where the project is located, to perform those
services specified in this article.
Survey Procedures: Before proceeding with the layout of actual work, the Contractor shall verify the
layout information shown on the drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing bench marks.
GENERAL 01110 - 4
As work proceeds, the Contractor shall check every major element for line, level and plumb. The Con-
tractor shall maintain a surveyor's log or record book of such checks; make this log or record book availa-
ble for the Owner's reference. The Contractor shall record deviations from required lines and levels, and
advise the Owner promptly upon detection of deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerance.
The Contractor shall record deviations which are accepted, and not corrected, on record drawings.
Final Property Survey: Before substantial completion, the Contractor shall prepare a final as-built survey
showing significant features (real property) that have resulted from construction of the project. Including
on the survey a certification, signed by the surveyor, to the effect that principle lines and levels of the
project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.
Submit one (1) reproducible sepia mylar, one (1) electronic and two (2) black line prints of final
property survey to the Owner.
GENERAL 01110 - 5
SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate

work of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing,
of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred
for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification

Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the
work described under each alternate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
ALTERNATES 01230 - 1
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Deduct alternate No. One (1): Installing new 4” diameter sprinkler main and system instead of 6”
diameter sprinkler and system as the base bid. The work includes all site, plumbing and other
associated work pertaining to sprinkler system.
ALTERNATES 01230 - 2
SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE

CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed
in Table of Contents, shall be included in and made part of this Section.
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements required for handling
Change Orders including, but not limited to:
1. Preliminary procedures.
2. Documentation of proposals and claims.
3. Preparation of Change Orders.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Spe-
cification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited to:
1. Agreement: Amounts of established unit prices.
2. Conditions of the Contract: Methods of determining cost or credit to Owner resulting

from changes in Work made on time and material basis, and Contractor's claims for
additional costs.
3. Section 01290, PAYMENT PROCEDURES.
4. Section 01770, CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Change Order; reference Section 7.0 of the IFB.
B. Construction Change Directive: Written order to Contractor, signed by Owner and Architect
to amend Contract Documents as described, and directs Contractor to proceed at once with
change that affects Contract Sum or Contract Time, for inclusion in subsequent Change
Order.
1.04 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
A. Only the Owner may initiate change by submitting Proposal Request to Contractor. Re-
quest will include:
1. Detailed description of Change, Products, and location of change in Project.
2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications.
3. Projected time span for making change, and specific statement as to whether over-
time work is, or is not, authorized.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 1

4. Specific period of time during which requested price will be considered valid.
5. Such request is for information only, and is not an instruction to execute changes,
nor to stop Work in progress.
B. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting written notice to the Owner containing:
1. Description of proposed changes.
2. Statement of reason for making changes.
3. State of effect on Contract Sum and Contract Time.
4. Statement of effect on work of separate contractors.
5. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time, as appro-

priate.
1.05 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Instead of Proposal Request, Owner may issue Construction Change Directive for Contrac-
tor to proceed with change for subsequent inclusion in Change Order.
B. Directive will describe change in Work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of
revised Contract Documents to define details of change, and will designate method of de-
termining any change in Contract Sum and any change in Contract Time.
C. The Owner will prepare the Construction Change Directive.
D. Once authorized by Owner, the Contractor shall sign and date Construction Change Direc-
tive to indicate agreement with terms therein and return two signed copies to Architect and
Owner.
1.06 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS
A. Support each quotation for lump-sum proposal, and for each unit price which has not pre-
viously been established, with sufficient substantiating data to allow Owner to evaluate quo-
tation.
B. Upon request, contractor, to provide additional data to support time and cost computations
including, but not limited to:
1. Labor required.
2. Equipment required.
3. Products required including recommended source of purchase and unit cost, and
quantities required.
4. Taxes, insurance, and bonds.
5. Credit for work deleted from Contract similarly documented.
6. Overhead and profit.
7. Justification for any change in Contract Time.

C. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on time-and-material/force ac-
count basis, with documentation as required for lump-sum proposal, plus additional infor-
mation:
1. Name of Owner's authorized agent who ordered work, and date of order.
2. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom.
3. Time record, summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid.
4. Receipts and invoices for:
a. Equipment used, listing dates and times of use.
b. Products used, listing quantities.
c. Subcontracts.
D. Document requests for substitutions for Products.
1.07 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS
A. Owner will prepare each Change Order.
B. Form: Change Order, reference Section 7.0 of the IFB.
C. Change Order will describe changes in Work, both additions and deletions, with attach-
ments of revised Contract Documents to define details of change.
D. The maximum mark up for overhead and profit shall be 10% of materials, rental equipment
and labor. A contractor may mark up a subcontractor’s proposal a maximum of 5%.
1.08 LUMP-SUM/FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER
A. Content of Change Orders will be based on either:
1. Architect’s Proposal Request and Contractor's responsive Proposal as mutually

agreed between Owner and Contractor.
2. Contractor's Proposal for change, as recommended by Architect.
B. Owner and Architect will sign and date Change Order as authorized for Contractor to pro-
ceed with changes.
C. Contractor shall sign and date Change Order to indicate agreement with terms therein.
D. No fixed price contract may be increased more than 25% of the amount of the contract or
$50,000, whichever is greater, without advance written approval of the Town Council, refer-
ence Section 2.2 – 4309.
1.09 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER
A. Content of Change Orders will be based on, either:
1. Architect’s definition of scope of required changes.

2. Contractor's Proposal for change, as recommended by Architect.
3. Survey of completed Work.
B. Amounts of unit prices shall be:
1. Those stated in Agreement.
2. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor.
C. When quantities of each items affected by Change Order can be determined prior to start of
Work:
1. Owner and Architect will sign and date Change Order as authorized for Contractor to
proceed with changes.
2. Contractor shall sign and date Change Order to indicate agreement with terms there-
in.
D. When quantities of items cannot be determined prior to start of Work:
1. Owner will issue Construction Change Directive directing Contractor to proceed with
change on basis of unit prices, and will cite applicable unit prices.
2. At completion of change, Architect and Owner will determine cost of such work
based on unit prices and quantities used.
a. Contractor shall submit documentation to establish number of units of each

item and any claims for change in Contract Time.
3. Architect will sign and date Change Order to establish change in Contract Sum and
in Contract Time.
4. Owner and Contractor will sign and date Change Order to indicate their agreement
with terms therein.
1.10 TIME AND MATERIAL/FORCE ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDER/CONSTRUCTION CHANGE

DIRECTIVE
A. Owner will issue Construction Change Directive directing Contractor to proceed with
changes.
B. At completion of change, Contractor shall submit itemized accounting and supporting data
as provided in this Section.
C. Owner will determine allowable cost of such work.
D. Architect will sign and date Change Order to establish change in Contract Sum and in Con-
tract Time.
E. Owner and Contractor will sign and date Change Order to indicate their agreement there-
with.
F, Owner or Owner’s representative to review and sign time and material tickets.

1.11 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS
A. Periodically revise Schedule of Values and Request for

Payment Forms to record each change as separate item of Work, and to record adjusted
Contract Sum.
B. Periodically revise Construction Progress Schedule to reflect each change in Contract

Time. Revise sub-schedules to show changes for other items of work affected by changes.
C. Upon completion of work under Change Order, enter pertinent changes in Record Docu-
ments.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.

SECTION 01270 - UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and
handling Change Orders.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Unit price is a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted
from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by
the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.
B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires
establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are
specified in those Sections.
C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use
of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an
independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included at the end of this Section. Specification
Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each
unit price.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES
UNIT PRICES 01270 - 1

A. Unit Price No. 1 – Rock excavation:
1. Description: Provide a unit price for rock excavation and disposal. Reference section
02300 Earthwork for description of rock.
2. Unit of Measurement: Rock shall be measured in place prior to excavation.
UNIT PRICES 01270 - 2

SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submitting:
1. Schedule of values.
2. Applications for Payment.
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other Spe-
cification Sections that relate directly to work of this Section include, but are not limited to:
1. AGREEMENT; Contract Agreement between Owner and Contractor.
2. GENERAL CONDITIONS and MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS;

Progress Payments, Retainages, Final Payment, etc.
3. Section 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES; Final Payment.
4. Division 1 Section “Contract Modification Procedures” for administrative procedures

for handling changes to the Contract.
1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Timing: Submit Schedule of Values allocated to various portions of Work within ten days
after award of Contract. Line items on Schedule of Values must correlate with the activities
on the detailed progress schedule.
B. When requested by Owner, submit substantiating data supporting values submitted.
C. Intent: Unless objections are stated by Owner, Schedule of Values will be used as basis for
Contractor's Applications for Payment.
D. Form and Content of Schedule of Values: Type schedule on 8½ in. x 11 in. white paper or
AIA G703 form. Identify schedule with title of Project and location, Architect's project num-
ber, name and address of Architect, name and address of Contractor, Contract designation,
and date of submission.
1. Line Item Categories: Follow Table of Contents of Project Manual for major category
items.
2. List installed value of component parts of Work in sufficient detail to serve as basis
for computing values for progress payments during construction.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 1

E. Sub-Values: For each major line item, list sub-values of major products or operations under
item.
F. Overhead and Profit: For various portions of Work, include directly proportional amount of
Contractor's overhead and profit.
G. Stored Material: For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored mate-
rials, break down value into sub-values:
1. Cost of material, delivered and unloaded at Project Site, with taxes paid.
2. Installation cost including overhead and profit.
H. Sum of values listed in schedule shall equal total Contract Sum.
1.04 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Format: Submit itemized applications typed on AIA Document G702, Application and Cer-
tificate for payment, and continuation sheets G703 or approved equal.
B. Provide itemized data on continuation sheet. Format, schedules, line items and values
shall match those of Schedule of Values accepted by Owner.
C. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede
submittal of initial application for payment, including:
1. List of subcontractors, suppliers, and fabricators.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Progress schedule.
4. Listing of Contractor’s staff assignments and principal Consultants.
5. Submittal schedule.
6. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for perfor-
mance of the Work.
7. Performance and payment bonds.
8. Unit price schedule (if required).
9. Certificate of Insurance
D. Preparation of Application for Payment: Execute each Application for Payment consistent
with previous applications and payments certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. Pro-
vide partial lien waivers for Work in progress, and full lien waivers for completed Work.
Fill in required information, including Change Orders information executed prior to date of
submittal of this application. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals
indicated on continuation sheets.
Execute certification with signature of responsible officer of Contractor firm. Fill out contin-
uation sheet as follows:

1. Fill in total list of scheduled component items of Work, with item number and sche-
duled dollar value for each item.
2. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been
performed or products stored. Round off values to nearest dollar, or as specified for
Schedule of Values.
3. List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission at end of continuation
sheets. List by Change Order Number and description, as if an original item of work.
E. Substantiating Data for Progress Payments: When Owner or Architect requires substantiat-
ing data; submit suitable information with cover letter, identifying Project name, Architect’s
Project number, Application number, date, and detailed list of enclosures. Submit one copy
of data and cover letter for each copy of application.
1. For stored products, identify item number and identification as shown on application
along with description of specific material.
F. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of Certificate of

Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment. Show on this Application for
Payment any Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner
Occupancy of portions of Work. Administrative actions and submittals that must precede
submittal of this Application for Payment include:
1. Occupancy permits.
2. Warranties.
3. Test/adjust/balance records.
4. Maintenance instructions.
5. Meter readings.
6. Final cleaning.
7. Consent of surety.
8. Notification of shifting insurance coverage’s.
9. Final progress photographs.
10. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect’s Certificate of Sub-

stantial Completion.
11. Warranty Bond against release of retention.
G. Preparation of Final Application for Payment (excluding retention): Fill in Application form
as specified for progress payments. Use continuation sheet for presenting final statement
of accounting as specified in Section 01700, CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. Administrative ac-
tions and submittals that must precede submittal of final Application for Payment include:
1. Completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Completion of incomplete Work.
3. Assurances that unsettled claims will be settled.

4. Transmittal of Project record documents to Owner.
5. Certified property survey transmitted to Owner.
6. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations have been paid.
7. Removal of temporary facilities and services.
8. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements.
H. Submittal Procedure: Submit Application for Payment to Owners or Owner’s representative

at intervals stipulated in Agreement, and as follows:
1. Number of Copies: Five copies of each Application.
2. When Architect finds application properly completed and correct, he will transmit
Certificate for Payment to Owner, with copy to Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.

SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on

Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Coordination Drawings.
2. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
3. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).
B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility

will be assigned to a specific contractor.
C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general
installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and
control points.
3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
4. Division 1 Section “Project Meetings” for administrative and procedural requirements for
project meetings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking information, interpretation or clarification of the Contract
Documents.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in all Sections of the Specifications

to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction
operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation,
connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 1

4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to

ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and
repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.
5. The CONTRACTOR providing services on the project shall be responsible for
coordinating the completion of work between the prime CONTRACTOR and the
OWNER’S CONTRACTORS, including a contractor who will perform lead-paint
abatement and archaeologists who will test the soil prior to grade-disturbing activities.
Additionally, Archaeologists shall test the soil beneath the front entrance slab and at the
rear ADA ramp location after demolition of the slab and existing ramp, but prior to any
new construction.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of
the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Pre-installation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
9. Project closeout activities.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials
that are designated as Owner's property.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of key personnel
assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site.
Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers,
including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
1.6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory

personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.
1. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)
A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,
and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the
form specified.
1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will
be returned with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the
following:
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Name of Contractor.
4. Name of Architect.
5. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
10. Contractor's signature.
11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,
Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing
interpretation.
a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions,

thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials,
assemblies, and attachments.
C. Hard-Copy RFIs: CSI Form 13.2A.
1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.
D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as

indicated above.
1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it.
Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m.
will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will start again.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within three days of receipt of the RFI
response.
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within three days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Include the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.

SECTION 01311 – PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings, in-
cluding but not limited to:
1. Pre-construction Meeting.
2. Pre-installation Conference.
3. Progress Meetings.
4. Coordination Meetings.
5. Special Meetings.
B. Representatives of contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers attending meetings shall be

qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
C. Architect may attend meetings to ascertain that Work is expedited consistent with Contract
Documents and construction schedules.
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect Work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that relate directly to Work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. Reference General Conditions
2. SECTION 01770, CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.
3. Division 1 Section “Construction Progress Documentation” for preparing and

submitting Contractor’s Construction Schedule.
1.03 PROJECT MEETINGS, GENERAL
A. Agendas: The Owner shall prepare agendas for Project Meetings.
B. Owner shall preside at Project Meetings.
E. Minutes: Record minutes of Project Meetings, including significant procedures and deci-
sions.
F. Distribution of Minutes: Reproduce and distribute copies of Project Meeting minutes within
three working days after each meeting to participants of meeting, to parties affected by de-
PROJECT MEETINGS 01311 - 1

cisions made at meetings, and to Architect. Contractor shall not make any claim for delay
as a result of distribution of meeting minutes.
1.04 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Schedule within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed.
B. Location: designated by Owner.
C. Attendance: Require and notify following to attend:
1. Owner's Representatives.
2. Architect and his Professional Consultants.
3. Resident Project Representative.
4. Contractor's Superintendent.
5. Major Subcontractors.
6. Major suppliers.
7. Others as appropriate.
D. Suggested Agenda:
1. Discussion of major subcontractors and suppliers.
2. Projected Construction Progress Schedules.
3. Critical Work sequencing.
4. Major equipment deliveries and priorities.
5. Project Coordination, including designation of responsible personnel.
6. Procedures and processing of:
a. Field decisions.
b. Proposal Requests.
c. Submittals.
d. Change Orders.
e. Application for Payment
7. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents.
8. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents
9. Use of premises:
a. Office, Work, and storage areas.

b. Owner's requirements.
10. Construction facilities, controls, and construction aids.
11. Temporary utilities.
12. Maintenance of Traffic and Detours
13. Safety and first-aid procedures.
14. Security procedures.
15. Housekeeping procedures.
1.05 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A. Conduct pre-installation conferences at site prior to construction activities as required. Instal-

lers, manufacturer's representatives, and fabricators of materials or systems affected shall be
required to attend. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates for major coordination is-
sues.
B. Do not allow affected Work to proceed if conference cannot be successfully concluded. In-
itiate actions necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene con-
ference at earliest feasible date.
1.06 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. The Contractor will schedule regular weekly meetings.
B. Hold called meetings as required by progress of Work.
C. Location of meetings: Town of Purcellville Town Hall or as directed by the Owner.
D. Attendance: The Owner will require and notify following to attend:
1. Owner.
2. Architect and his professional consultants as needed.
3. Contractor and subcontractors as required.
E. Suggested Agenda:
1. Review and approval of minutes of previous meeting.
2. Review of Work progress since previous meeting.
3. Field observations, problems and conflicts.
4. Problems which impede Construction Progress Schedule.
5. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule.

7. Revisions to Construction Progress Schedule.
8. Progress schedule during succeeding Work period.
9. Coordination of schedules.
10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required.
11. Maintenance of quality standards.
12. Pending changes and substitutions.
13. Review proposed changes for:
a. Effect on Construction Progress Schedule and on completion date.
b. Effect on other contracts of Project.
14. Other business.
15. Safety
1.07 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Conduct Coordination Meetings as necessary to properly coordinate trades. Require repre-

sentation of parties involved in coordination or planning of activities involved.
1.08 SPECIAL MEETINGS
A. Conduct Special Meetings as required throughout course of Work. Special meeting issues
may include, but are not limited to issues of safety, labor issues, and special scheduling is-
sues.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.

SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Preliminary Construction Schedule.

2. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
3. Submittals Schedule.
4. Daily construction reports.
5. Material location reports.
6. Field condition reports.
7. Special reports.

1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.
2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing
meeting and conference minutes.
3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
4. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction
photographs.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the
planned early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as
scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless
otherwise approved by Architect.
C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project
where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine
when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 1

D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the successor activity.
3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely
affecting the planned Project completion date.
G. Fragment: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for
greater detail.
H. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction

element.
I. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.
J. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity
relationships.
K. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of
an activity as scheduled.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals Schedule: Submit six copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.

2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category (action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
B. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit six opaque copies.
1. Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of

Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit six opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough
to show entire schedule for entire construction period.
1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to
comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated)
and date on label.
D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit six copies at progress meetings.

E. Material Location Reports: Submit six copies at progress meetings.
F. Field Condition Reports: Submit six copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
G. Special Reports: Submit six copies at time of unusual event.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pre-scheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.

2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.
3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim milestones
and partial Owner occupancy.
4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.
5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.
6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting
agencies.
8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures.
9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.
10. Review submittal requirements and procedures.
11. Review procedures for updating schedule.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of

construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of

subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required
schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates

required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary schedule. Include submittals

required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly
progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture
or fabrication.
a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule,

instead of tabulating them separately.
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning &

Scheduling."
B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of Final
Completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows
an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
C. Activities: Treat each separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element
of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 5 days, unless specifically
allowed by Architect.
a. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items
requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule.
2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in
Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
3. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 3 days for startup and testing.
4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.

2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include
delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated
stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.
5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include
delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated
stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.
6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction.

b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
c. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
f. Provisions for future construction.
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.
7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Subcontract awards.
b. Submittals.
c. Purchases.
d. Mockups.
e. Fabrication.
f. Sample testing.
g. Deliveries.
h. Installation.
i. Tests and inspections.
j. Adjusting.
k. Curing.
l. Startup and placement into final use and operation.
8. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the
Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced
or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a. Structural completion.
b. Permanent space enclosure.
c. Completion of mechanical installation.
d. Completion of electrical installation.
e. Substantial Completion.
E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.
F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned
and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for
preparation of payment requests.
1. Refer to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment
procedures.
2. Contractor shall assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Costs shall
not be assigned to submittal activities unless specified otherwise but may, with Architect's
approval, be assigned to fabrication and delivery activities. Costs shall be under required
principal subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and
maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and
demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract
Sum.
3. Each activity cost shall reflect an accurate value subject to approval by Architect.
4. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum.

G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the
proposed change on the overall project schedule.
H. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically
to manage construction schedules.
2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary construction schedule within seven days of date
established for the Notice of Award.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week. Outline significant construction activities for first 60 days of construction. Include
skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on
indicated activities.
2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type,

Contractor's Construction Schedule within 14 days of date established for the Notice of Award.
Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback
was received since the start of Project.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an

estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.
2.5 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. List of separate contractors at Project site.
3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
4. Equipment at Project site.
5. Material deliveries.
6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
7. Accidents.
8. Meetings and significant decisions.
9. Unusual events (refer to special reports).
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
11. Meter readings and similar recordings.
12. Emergency procedures.
13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
14. Change Orders received and implemented.
15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
16. Services connected and disconnected.
17. Equipment or system tests and startups.

18. Partial Completions and occupancies.

19. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of
materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials
previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on
and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project
site.
C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for
interpretation on CSI Form 13.2A. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions,
together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS
A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute
copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at
Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.
List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of
results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these
events are known or predictable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At each progress meeting, update schedule to

reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each
regularly scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,

testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in
the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction
activities.

SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment.

2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.
3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval.
Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by
Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination

with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1

1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect
will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for
coordination.
D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Unique identifier, including revision number.
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Other necessary identification.
E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on
submittals.
F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect
observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve
as final submittal.
1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of

copies to Architect.
2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken
and will be returned.
G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from
sources other than Contractor.
1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant

information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on
previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents,
including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the
related submittal.
2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
3. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Destination (To :).
d. Source (From :).
e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
f. Category and type of submittal.

g. Submittal purpose and description.

h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
i. Remarks.
j. Signature of transmitter.
H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in
connection with construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit six copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return four copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Standard color charts.
e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
g. Printed performance curves.
h. Operational range diagrams.
i. Mill reports.
j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
l. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
m. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
n. Notation of coordination requirements.
o. Provide flame spread certification and material safety data sheets. SHEETS
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.

c. Fabrication and installation drawings.

d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control
wiring.
f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
i. Design calculations.
j. Compliance with specified standards.
k. Notation of coordination requirements.
l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.
4. Number of Copies: Submit three blue- or black-line prints of each submittal, unless prints
are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit six prints where prints are
required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain one print;
remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned print as a Project Record
Drawing.
D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:
1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups.

2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
3. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified,
and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent
testing and inspection.
4. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review
of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated.
Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name or name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
5. Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's

letterhead, provide the following:
a. Size limitations.
b. Compliance with recognized standards.
c. Availability.
d. Delivery time.
6. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the

product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that
show approximate limits of the variations.
b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that
illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections,
operation, and similar construction characteristics.
7. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit one full set[s] of available choices where
color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
8. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain
two Sample sets; remainder will be returned.
a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be
demonstrated.
9. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
E. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for
the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.

2. Number and name of room or space.
3. Location within room or space.
F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment

Procedures."
G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying

products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements."
B. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
C. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements.
D. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and
Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel
certified.
E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.
F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience
where required.
G. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

material complies with requirements.
H. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements.
I. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements.
J. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
K. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements.
L. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests
performed by a qualified testing agency.
M. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization.

2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
N. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Closeout Procedures and Operation and Maintenance Data."
O. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance
and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of
assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load
diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations.
Include page numbers.
P. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents

manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Preparation of substrates.
2. Required substrate tolerances.
3. Sequence of installation or erection.
4. Required installation tolerances.
5. Required adjustments.
6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
Q. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized

service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative

making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
R. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note
corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will provide a submittal review form to indicate
action taken, as follows:
1. No Exceptions Taken
2. Make Revisions Noted
3. Revise and Resubmit
4. Not Approved
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject
and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.

SECTION 01351 - SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general protection and treatment procedures for the entire Project.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Consolidate: To strengthen loose or deteriorated materials in place.
B. Dismantle: To disassemble and detach items by hand from existing construction to the limits
indicated, using small hand tools and small one-hand power tools, so as to protect nearby
historic surfaces; and legally dispose of dismantled items off-site, unless indicated to be
salvaged or reinstalled.
C. Existing to Remain: Existing items that are not to be removed or dismantled.
D. Historic: Spaces, areas, rooms, surfaces, materials, finishes, and overall appearance which are
important to the successful preservation as determined by the Architect. Designated historic
spaces are generally described below.
1. Restoration Zones: Areas of greatest architectural importance, integrity, and visibility; to

be preserved and restored to the original, circa 1903, all restoration work on Cupolas
have been completed under phase 1 project. Other work in relation to Cupolas are mainly
in conjunction with mechanical duct installations on interior side of the Cupolas on the
roof.
2. Preservation Zones: Areas of significant architectural importance, integrity, and visibility;
to be preserved and repaired consistent with the remaining historic fabric and to the
extent shown on Drawings: The entire building.
3. Conservations Zones: Site areas and features of significant historical importance,
integrity, and visibility; to leave any remaining original features untouched insofar as is
consistent with accommodating modern uses for the building as shown on Drawings: The
site, including trees. Contractor shall not conduct any grade-disturbing activities until
authorized by Owner, Architect, or Owner’s Construction Manager. Virginia Department
of Historic Resources holds a conservation easement on the parcel that requires that
archaeology be performed prior to any grade-disturbing activities.
E. Match: To blend with adjacent construction and manifest no apparent difference in material
type, species, cut, form, detail, color, grain, texture, or finish; as approved by the Architect.
F. Reconstruct: To remove existing item, replicate damaged or missing components, and reinstall
in original position.
SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT 01351 - 1

G. Refinish: To remove existing finishes to base material and apply new finish to match original or
as otherwise indicated.
H. Reinstall: To protect removed or dismantled item, repair and clean it as indicated for reuse, and
reinstall it in original position, or where indicated.
I. Remove: Specifically for historic spaces, areas, rooms, and surfaces, the term means to detach
an item from existing construction to the limits indicated, using hand tools and hand-operated
power equipment, and legally dispose of it off-site, unless indicated to be salvaged or
reinstalled.
J. Repair: To correct damage and defects, retaining existing materials, features, and finishes
while employing as little new material as possible. Includes patching, piecing-in, splicing,
consolidating, or otherwise reinforcing or upgrading materials.
K. Replace: To remove, duplicate, and reinstall entire item with new material. The original item is
the pattern for creating duplicates unless otherwise indicated.
L. Replicate: To reproduce in exact detail, materials, and finish, unless otherwise indicated.
M. Reproduce: To fabricate a new item, accurate in detail to the original, and in either the same or
a similar material as the original, unless otherwise indicated.
N. Restore: To consolidate, replicate, reproduce, repair, and refinish as required to achieve the
indicated results.
O. Retain: To keep existing items that are not to be removed or dismantled.
P. Reversible: New construction work, treatments, or processes that can be removed or undone in
the future without damaging historic materials, unless otherwise indicated.
Q. Salvage: To protect removed or dismantled items and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse or
reinstall as dictated by contract documents.
R. Stabilize: To provide structural reinforcement of unsafe or deteriorated items while maintaining

the essential form as it exists at present; also, to reestablish a weather-resistant enclosure.
S. Strip: To remove existing finish down to base material, unless otherwise indicated.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Historic items, relics, and similar objects and other items of interest or value to Owner that may
be encountered during removal and dismantling work remain Owner's property. Carefully
dismantle and salvage each item or object.
B. Coordinate with Architect, who will establish special procedures for dismantling and salvage of
any unforeseen historic items.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Construction Schedule for Historic Treatments: Indicate for the entire Project the following for
each activity to be performed in historic spaces, areas, and rooms, and on historic surfaces:

1. Equipment Data: List gross loaded weight, axle-load distribution, and wheel-base
dimension data for mobile and heavy equipment proposed for use. Do not use such
equipment without Contractor's professional engineer's certification that the structure can
support the imposed loadings without damage.
B. Preconstruction Documentation: Show preexisting conditions of adjoining construction and site

improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
historic treatment operations.
C. Fire-Prevention Plan: Submit before work begins.
D. Inventory of Salvaged Items: After removal or dismantling work is complete, submit a list of
items that have been salvaged.
E. Damaged Siding Replacement Plan: Identify exterior siding to be replaced, rather than repaired,
for approval by Architect before work begins.
A. Fire-Prevention Plan: Prepare a written plan for preventing fires during the Work, including
placement of fire extinguishers, fire blankets, rag buckets, and other fire-prevention devices
during each phase or process. Coordinate plan with Owner's fire-protection equipment and
requirements. Include each fire watch's training, duties, and authority to enforce fire safety.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning removal and dismantling work. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6.
D. Historic Treatment Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. General: Review methods and procedures related to historic treatment including, but not
limited to, the following:
a. Review manufacturer's written instructions for precautions and effects of historic

treatment procedures on materials, components, and vegetation.
b. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
2. Removal and Dismantling:
a. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be removed or dismantled.

b. Review requirements of other work that relies on substrates exposed by removal
and dismantling work.
1.7 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF HISTORIC MATERIALS
A. Historic Materials for Reinstallation:
1. Repair and clean historic items as indicated and to functional condition for reuse.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing; cushion against damage during
handling. Label contents of containers.

3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment unless otherwise indicated. Provide connections, supports, and
miscellaneous materials to make item functional for use indicated.
B. Existing Historic Materials to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage
and soiling from construction work. Where permitted by Architect, items may be dismantled and
taken to a suitable, protected storage location during construction work and reinstalled in their
original locations after historic treatment and construction work in the vicinity is complete.
C. Storage and Protection: When taken from their existing locations, catalog and store historic
items within a weathertight enclosure where they are protected from wetting by rain, snow,
condensation, or ground water, and from freezing temperatures.
1. Identify each item with a nonpermanent mark to document its original location. Indicate
original locations on plans elevations, sections, or photographs by annotating the
identifying marks.
2. Secure stored materials to protect from theft.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General Size Limitation in Historic Spaces: Materials, products, and equipment used for
performing the Work and for transporting debris, materials, and products shall be of sizes that
clear surfaces within historic spaces, areas, rooms, and openings, including temporary
protection, by 12 inches or more.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far
as practical.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with removal and dismantling work.
D. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction affected by removal and
dismantling work. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use.
Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.
1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate historic treatment procedures in this section with public circulation patterns at
Project site. Some work is near public circulation patterns. Public circulation patterns cannot
be closed off entirely, and in places can be only temporarily redirected around small areas of
work. Plan and execute the Work accordingly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HISTORIC REMOVAL AND DISMANTLING EQUIPMENT
A. Removal Equipment: Use only hand-held tools except as follows or unless otherwise approved
by the Architect on a case-by-case basis:
1. Light jackhammers are allowed subject to Architect's approval.

2. Large air hammers are not permitted.
B. Dismantling Equipment: Use manual, hand-held tools, except as follows or otherwise approved
by the Architect on a case-by-case basis:
1. Hand-held power tools and cutting torches are permitted only as submitted in the historic
treatment program. They must be adjustable so as to penetrate or cut only the thickness
of material being removed.
2. Pry bars over 18 inches long and hammers weighing over 2 lb are not permitted for
dismantling work.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Preparation for Removal and Dismantling: Examine construction to be removed or dismantled

to determine best methods to safely and effectively perform removal and dismantling work.
Examine adjacent work to determine what protective measures will be necessary. Make
explorations, probes, and inquiries as necessary to determine condition of construction to be
removed or dismantled and location of utilities and services to remain that may be hidden by
construction that is to be removed or dismantled.
1. Verify that affected utilities have been disconnected and capped.

2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and dismantled for
reinstallation or salvage.
3. Before removal or dismantling of existing building elements that will be reproduced or
duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and
construction details required to make exact reproduction.
4. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether
removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any
portion of structure or adjacent structures as a result of removal and dismantling work.
B. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction

photographs.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation."
C. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from historic treatment
procedures.

3.3 PROTECTION, GENERAL
A. Ensure that supervisory personnel are on-site and on duty when historic treatment work begins
and during its progress.
B. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and
surrounding buildings from harm resulting from historic treatment procedures.
1. Use only proven protection methods, appropriate to each area and surface being
protected.
2. Provide barricades, barriers, and temporary directional signage to exclude public from
areas where historic treatment work is being performed.
3. Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and
vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during course of historic treatment
work.
4. Contain dust and debris generated by removal and dismantling work and prevent it from
reaching the public or adjacent surfaces.
5. Provide shoring, bracing, and supports as necessary. Do not overload structural
elements.
6. Protect floors and other surfaces along haul routes from damage, wear, and staining.
C. Temporary Protection of Historic Materials:
1. Protect existing historic materials with temporary protections and construction. Do not
deface or remove existing materials.
2. Do not attach temporary protection to historic surfaces except as indicated as part of the
historic treatment program and approved by Architect.
D. Comply with each product manufacturer's written instructions for protections and precautions.
Protect against adverse effects of products and procedures on people and adjacent materials,
components, and vegetation.
E. Utility and Communications Services:
1. Notify the Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction, owning or controlling
wires, conduits, pipes, and other services affected by the historic treatment work before
commencing operations.
2. Disconnect and cap pipes and services as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as
required for the historic treatment work.
3. Maintain existing services unless otherwise indicated; keep in service, and protect
against damage during operations. Provide temporary services during interruptions to
existing utilities.
3.4 PROTECTION FROM FIRE
A. General: Follow fire-prevention plan and the following.
1. Comply with NFPA 241 requirements unless otherwise indicated.

2. Remove and keep area free of combustibles including, rubbish, paper, waste, and
chemicals, except to the degree necessary for the immediate work.
a. If combustible material cannot be removed, provide fire blankets to cover such

materials.

3. Prohibit smoking by all persons within the Project work and staging areas.
B. Heat-Generating Equipment and Combustible Materials: Comply with the following procedures
while performing work with heat-generating equipment or highly combustible materials,
including welding, torch-cutting, soldering, brazing, paint removal with heat, or other operations
where open flames or implements utilizing high heat or combustible solvents and chemicals are
anticipated.
1. Obtain Owner's approval for operations involving use of welding or other high-heat
equipment. Use of open-flame equipment is not permitted. Notify Owner at least
seventy-two hours before each occurrence, indicating location of such work.
2. As far as practical, restrict heat-generating equipment to outside the building.
3. Do not perform work with heat-generating equipment in or near rooms or in areas where
flammable liquids or explosive vapors are present or thought to be present. Use a
combustible gas indicator test to ensure that the area is safe.
4. Prevent the spread of sparks and particles of hot metal through open windows, doors,
holes, and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings, roofs, and other openings.
C. Fire Extinguishers, Fire Blankets, and Rag Buckets: Maintain fire extinguishers, fire blankets,
and rag buckets for disposal of rags with combustible liquids. Maintain each as suitable for the
type of fire risk in each work area. Ensure that nearby personnel are trained in fire-extinguisher
and blanket operation.
3.5 GENERAL HISTORIC TREATMENT
A. Ensure that supervisory personnel are present when historic treatment work begins and during
its progress.
B. Halt the process of deterioration and stabilize conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Perform
work as indicated on Drawings. Follow the procedures in subparagraphs below and procedures
approved in historic treatment program.
1. Retain as much existing material as possible; repair and consolidate rather than replace.
2. Use additional material or structure to reinforce, strengthen, prop, tie, and support
existing material or structure.
3. Use reversible processes wherever possible.
4. Use historically accurate repair and replacement materials and techniques unless
otherwise indicated.
5. Record existing work before each procedure (preconstruction) and progress during the
work with digital preconstruction documentation photographs. Comply with requirements
in Division 1 "Photographic Documentation."
C. Where Work requires existing features to be removed or dismantled and reinstalled, perform
these operations without damage to the material itself, to adjacent materials, or to the substrate.
3.6 HISTORIC REMOVAL
A. Perform work in accordance with the historic treatment program.
1. Provide supports or reinforcement for existing construction that becomes temporarily

weakened by the work, until the work is completed.
2. Perform cutting by hand or with small power tools wherever possible. Cut holes and slots
neatly to size required, with minimum disturbance of adjacent work.

3. Do not operate air compressors inside building, unless approved by Architect in each
case.
4. Do not drill or cut columns, beams, joints, girders, structural slabs, or other structural
supporting elements, without having Contractor's professional engineer's written approval
for each location before such work is begun, unless shown on the contract documents.
B. Water-Mist Sprinkling: Use water-mist sprinkling and other wet methods to control dust only
with adequate, approved procedures and equipment that ensure that such water will not create
a hazard or adversely affect other building areas or materials.
C. Unacceptable Equipment: Keep equipment that is not permitted for historic removal or
dismantling work away from the vicinity where such work is being performed.
D. Removing Items On or Near Historic Surfaces:
1. Use only dismantling tools and procedures within 12 inches of historic surface. Protect
historic surface from contact with or damage by tools.
2. Unfasten items to be removed, in the opposite order from which they were installed.
3. Support each item as it becomes loosened to prevent stress and damage to the historic
surface.
4. Dismantle anchorages.
E. Anchorages:
1. Remove anchorages associated with removed items.

2. In non-historic surfaces, patch holes created by anchorage removal or dismantling in
accordance with the requirements for new work.

SECTION 01380 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Preconstruction photographs.
2. Periodic construction photographs.
3. Final Completion construction photographs.

1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation.
2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting digital media as Project Record
Documents at Project closeout.
3. Division 02 Section "Selective Demolition" for photographic documentation before
building demolition operations commence.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Construction Photographs: Submit digital images of each photographic view within seven days
of taking photographs.
1. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files as a Project
Record Document on CD-ROM. Identify electronic media with date photographs were
taken. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor and are uncropped.
1.4 USAGE RIGHTS
A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited
reproduction of photographic documentation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPEG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum
sensor size of 4.0 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1024 by 768 pixels.
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01380 - 1

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to
clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.
B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera,
without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.
1. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image.
2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images on CD-ROM in the field office at Project
site, available at all times for reference. Identify images same as for those submitted to
Architect.
C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of demolition, take , digital photographs

of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during
construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Construction Manager.
D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date
associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of
construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
E. Architect and Construction Manager-Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time,

Architect or Construction Manager will instruct photographer about number and
frequency digital photographs and general directions on vantage points. Select actual vantage
points and take photographs to show the status of construction and progress since last
photographs were taken.
F. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take digital photographs after date of Substantial
Completion for submission as Project Record Documents of all work.
1. Do not include date stamp.
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01380 - 2

SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,

and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"

"authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as
"directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,

assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
REFERENCES 01420 - 1
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and
acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the
recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone
numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and
up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253

Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (202) 272-0080
Available from Access Board
www.access-board.gov
CFR Code of Federal Regulations (888) 293-6498

Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1530
www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html
CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement (601) 634-2355

Available from Army Corps of Engineers
Waterways Experiment Station
www.wes.army.mil
DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-6257

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
www.dodssp.daps.mil
DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus

(See FS)
FED-STD Federal Standard

(See FS)
FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257

www.dodssp.daps.mil
Available from General Services Administration (202) 501-1021

www.fss.gsa.gov
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800

www.nibs.org
FTMS Federal Test Method Standard

(See FS)
ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587

www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543
MIL (See MILSPEC)
MIL-STD (See MILSPEC)
MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-6257

www.dodssp.daps.mil
NES (Formerly: National Evaluation Service)

(See ICC-ES)
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253

Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080
www.access-board.gov
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale
Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade &
Professional Associations of the U.S."
B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to
be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (202) 862-5100

www.aluminum.org
AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333

www.aaadm.com
AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202

www.aabchq.com
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664

www.aamanet.org
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800

Transportation Officials
www.transportation.org
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141
www.aatcc.org
ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155

www.abma-dc.org
ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700

(American Concrete Institute)
www.aci-int.org
ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216
www.concrete-pipe.org
AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530

www.aeic.org
AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878

www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700
AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000

www.aga.org
AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118

www.agc.org
AHA American Hardboard Association

(Now part of CPA)
AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955

www.aham.org
AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960

www.asphaltinstitute.org
AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837

www.aia.org (202) 626-7300
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400

www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100

www.steel.org
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559

www.aitc-glulam.org
ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (800) 395-2522

www.alca.org (703) 736-9666
ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700

www.alsc.org
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150
www.amca.org
ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020

www.ansi.org
AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts (505) 522-1437

www.aosaseed.com
APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600

www.apawood.org
APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989

www.archprecast.org
API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000

www.api.org
ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800

www.ari.org
ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917

www.asphaltroofing.org
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723

www.asce.org (703) 295-6300
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723

Air-Conditioning Engineers
www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400
ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763

(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (212) 591-7722
www.asme.org
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040

www.asse-plumbing.org
ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585

(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org
AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300

(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International)
www.awci.org
AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association

(Now WCSC)
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811

www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600
AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800

www.awpa.com
AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353

www.aws.org (305) 443-9353
AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337

www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122

www.buildershardware.com
BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010

www.bia.org
BICSI BICSI (813) 979-1991

www.bicsi.org
BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963
(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's

Association International)
www.bifma.com
BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (773) 761-4100

www.bissc.org
Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011

www.caststone.org
CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312

www.carpetcushion.org
CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282

www.copper.org (212) 251-7200
CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263

www.canelect.ca/connections_online/home.htm
CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333

www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com
CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700

www.cganet.com
CGSB Canadian General Standards Board (800) 665-2472

w3.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb (819) 956-0425
CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462

www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462
CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919

www.cisca.org
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137

www.cispi.org
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583

www.chainlinkinfo.org
CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604

www.pbmdf.com
CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772

www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607
CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846

www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200

www.crsi.org
CSA CSA International (800) 463-6727

(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000
www.csa-international.org
CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900

www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300
CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700

www.cedarbureau.org
CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087

(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)
www.cti.org
DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010

www.dhi.org
EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500

www.eia.org
EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462

www.eima.com (770) 968-7945
EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (800) 548-2723

www.asce.org (703) 295-6300
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040

www.ejma.org
ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937

www.esda.org
FCI Fluid Controls Institute (216) 241-7333

www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org
FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball Amateur 41 22 545 00 00

(The International Basketball Federation)
www.fiba.com
FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35

(The International Volleyball Federation)
www.fivb.ch
FM Factory Mutual System

(Now FMG)
FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000

(Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System)
www.fmglobal.com
FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors (407) 671-3772
Association, Inc.
www.floridaroof.com
FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850

www.fluidsealing.com
FSC Forest Stewardship Council 52 951 5146905

www.fsc.org
GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440

www.gypsum.org
GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208

www.glasswebsite.com
GRI (Now GSI)
GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400

www.greenseal.org
GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440

www.geosynthetic-institute.org
HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744

www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700
HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200

www.gamanet.org
HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association

(Part of NAAMM)
HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900

www.hpva.org
HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550

www.hpwhite.com
IAS International Approval Services

(Now CSA International)
IBF International Badminton Federation 441-24 223-4904

www.intbadfed.org
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369

www.icea.net
ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830

www.icri.org
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11

www.iec.ch
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900
www.ieee.org
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000

www.iesna.org
IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234

www.igcc.org
IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) (613) 233-1510

www.igmaonline.org
ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426

www.iliai.com
ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11

www.iso.ch
ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (702) 567-8150

www.issfa.net
ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851

www.intertek.com (607) 753-6711
ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11

www.itu.int/home
KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690

www.kcma.org
LMA Laminating Materials Association

(Now part of CPA)
LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864

www.lightning.org (847) 577-7200
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333

www.mbma.com
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association (847) 480-9138

www.maplefloor.org
MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610

www.metalframingmfg.org
MH Material Handling
(Now MHIA)
MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815

www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190
MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222

www.marble-institute.com
MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937

www.paintinfo.com
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613

Fittings Industry Inc.
www.mss-hq.com
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405

www.naamm.org
NACE NACE International (281) 228-6200

(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)
www.nace.org
NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926

www.nadca.com
NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193,
ext. 453
www.aahperd.org/nagws/
NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The) (703) 684-0084

www.naima.org
NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848

www.nbgqa.com
NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222

www.ncaa.org
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900

www.ncma.org
NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094

www.ncpi.org
NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550

www.ncta.com
NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698

www.nebb.org
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110

www.necanet.org
NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901

www.nelma.org
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200

www.nema.org
NETA International Electrical Testing Association (303) 697-8441

www.netaworld.org
NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900

www.nfhs.org
NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555

(National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000
www.nfpa.org
NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776

www.nfrc.org
NGA National Glass Association (703) 442-4890

www.glass.org
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318

www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818
NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393

www.nlga.org
NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016

www.nofma.org
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545

www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622

www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400
NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275

(National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010
www.nsf.org
NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415

www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788
NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (800) 323-9736

www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930
NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association

(Now TRI)
NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association

(Now WDMA)
OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (800) 966-5253

www.opl.com (210) 635-8100
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300

www.pci.org
PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322

www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322
PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956

www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720
PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929

http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu
PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540

www.post-tensioning.org
RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400

www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580

www.rfci.com
RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339

www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662
RTI (Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers
Association)
(Now TRI)
SAE SAE International (724) 776-4841

www.sae.org
SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 462-1930

www.sdi.org
SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010

www.steeldoor.org
SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424

www.sefalabs.com
SEI Structural Engineering Institute (800) 548-2723

www.seinstitute.com (703) 295-6195
SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234

www.sgcc.org
SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075

www.siaonline.org
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association

(Now IGMA)
SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995

www.steeljoist.org
SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991

www.smacentral.org
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980

National Association
www.smacna.org
SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100

www.smpte.org
SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154

(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics
Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)
www.sprayfoam.org
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611

www.spib.org
SPI/SPFD Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. (The)

Spray Polyurethane Foam Division
(Now SPFA)
SPRI SPRI (781) 647-7026

(Single Ply Roofing Institute)
www.spri.org
SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355

www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630
SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772

www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331
STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265

www.steeltank.com
SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333

www.steelwindows.com
SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974

www.swrionline.org
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453

www.tileusa.com
TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700

Industries Alliance
www.tiaonline.org
TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700

www.masonrysociety.org
TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (608) 833-5900

www.tpinst.org
TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873

www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 705-9898
TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177

(Formerly: RTI - Roof Tile Institute)
www.tileroofing.org
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 285-4476

www.ul.com (847) 272-8800
UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902

www.uni-bell.org
USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539

www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800
USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422

www.usgbc.org
USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488
www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463
WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869

www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486

www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651
WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association

(Now WCSC)
WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636

(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers (212) 661-4261
Association)
www.windowcoverings.org
WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301

(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and (847) 299-5200
Door Association)
www.wdma.com
WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of (916) 372-9943

California)
www.wicnet.org
WIC Woodwork Institute of California

(Now WI)
WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889

www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591
WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333

www.wsrca.com (650) 548-0112
WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930

www.wwpa.org
C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to
be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
BOCA BOCA International, Inc.

(See ICC)
CABO Council of American Building Officials

(See ICC)
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100

www.iapmo.org
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials

(See ICC)
ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc.

(See ICC-ES)
ICC International Code Council (703) 931-4533

(Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials)
www.iccsafe.org
ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587

www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543
NES National Evaluation Service

(See ICC-ES)
SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.

(See ICC)
D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and
are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CE Army Corps of Engineers

www.usace.army.mil
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772

www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-6816
DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000

www.commerce.gov
DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257

www.dodssp.daps.mil
DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220

www.eren.doe.gov
EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167

www.epa.gov
FAA Federal Aviation Administration (202) 366-4000

www.faa.gov
FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322

www.fcc.gov
FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332

www.fda.gov
GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111

www.gsa.gov (202) 501-1888
HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112

www.hud.gov
LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000

www.lbl.gov
NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program

(See TRB)
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478

www.nist.gov
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742

www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999
PBS Public Building Service

(See GSA)
PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694

http://phs.os.dhhs.gov
RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540

(See USDA)
SD State Department (202) 647-4000

www.state.gov
TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934

www.nas.edu/trb
USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791

www.usda.gov
USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000

www.usps.com
E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are
believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs (800) 952-5210

Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation (916) 574-2041
www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti
CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415) 703-2782

www.cpuc.ca.gov
TFS Texas Forest Service (936) 639-8180

Forest Products Laboratory
http://txforestservice.tamu.edu
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary
utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Sewers and drainage.

2. Water service and distribution.
3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities.
4. Heating and cooling facilities.
5. Ventilation.
6. Electric power service.
7. Lighting.
8. Telephone service.
C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Waste disposal facilities.

2. Field offices.
3. Storage and fabrication sheds.
4. Lifts and hoists.
5. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Environmental protection.
2. Storm water control.
3. Pest control.
4. Site enclosure fence.
5. Security enclosure and lockup.
E. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of

implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.
2. Divisions 2 through 16 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for
products in those Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 1

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is

complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
1.4 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect
and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Owner's construction forces.

2. Occupants of Project.
3. Architect.
4. Testing agencies.
5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges, whether metered or otherwise,
for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site.
A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.
1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary

utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.
2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use
of temporary service to use of permanent service.
B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by
all parties engaged in the Work:
1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat.

2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable

condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended.

B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric
fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line
posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails.
Provide concrete bases for supporting posts.
C. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous

Carpentry."
D. Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread rating of 15 or less.
E. Water: Potable.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended.
B. Field Offices: Existing building interior may be used as field office. Heating and cooling to be
provided for such space by Contractor.
C. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as
indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size
required by location and class of fire exposure.
D. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation or

combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar
nonabsorbent material.
E. Heating Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide
vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic
control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating

units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed.
F. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to

120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset
button, and pilot light.
G. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for
surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be
nonmetallic sheathed cable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as
required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use
of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to
existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder
with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company
recommendations.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is
available, provide trucked-in services.
3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements
cannot be used for that purpose.
B. Water Service: Existing water to building is shut off as part of winterization of the whole
building. Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before
use.
1. Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site.
C. Sanitary Facilities: Existing water/sewer facilities in building are shut off as part of winterization
of the whole building; therefore, provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water
fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and
maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar
disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste
containers for disposal of used material.
2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy.
D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that
will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F in permanently enclosed portions of

building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F for finishing activities and areas
where meetings are held and finished Work has been installed.
E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction

activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation
requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
F. Electric Power Service: Existing electric service at the building may be used by Contractor for
construction operation.

G. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and
equipment.
1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if

single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not
exceed safe length-voltage ratio.
H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
2. Install exterior-yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction
operations, traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the Work is being performed.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction
and support facilities for easy access.
2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Construction Crew Parking Facility: Designated area of existing parking facility on east side of
building to be used by Contractor’s construction crew and other people associated with the
construction project at this building.
C. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle

waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or
unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled,

for each type of waste material to be deposited.
D. Common-Use Field Office: One of the rooms inside existing building is to be utilized as
common-use field office for conducting on-site meetings between Contractor, Architect, Owner,
Construction Manager, and others who may be associated with the project. If the existing
building will not facilitate a space due to ongoing activities or noise then the Contractor is
provide a temporary filed office within the staging area on site. Contractor is to provide
adequate lighting, temperature, seating and tables.
E. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be open
shelters or fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on-site.
1. Construct framing, sheathing, and siding using fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood.
2. Use of existing building interior space for providing storage and fabrication areas must
include taking extra precaution in protecting existing floor, columns, walls, and ceiling
finishes in addition to protecting existing floor structural integrity.
a. Existing floor to receive double layers of plywood sheathing in the areas where
temporary storage and fabrication will be located.

b. Building materials storage and construction equipment and operation on interior

floor area must be done in a manner that would not produce excessive vibration
and not exceed allowable design loads indicated as follows:
1) 100 psf – uniform load or

2) 1,000 lbs – concentrated load
c. Construction Loads – Materials and equipment used in construction shall not

exceed the allowable design loads. Where it is anticipated construction loads will
exceed the design live loads, the Contractor shall submit for approval plans signed
by a professional structural engineer to provide planking on the floor, shoring, or
other load distribution methods as required.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of
noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms
near Project site.
B. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
C. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for
erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning
signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed,
provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
D. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities,
install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against
reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.
1. Provide fire extinguishers visible and accessible from space being served.
a. Class ABC dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-
recommended classes for exposures.
b. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended
purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each
usable stairwell.
2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.

3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-
protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking
in hazardous fire-exposure areas.
4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition.
5. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for
personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish
procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post
warnings and information.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from
damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
1. Maintain operation of heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities
on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of
damage.
2. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines.
Protect from damage during excavation operations.
C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section
"Closeout Procedures."

SECTION 01510 – SAFETY
PART 1 - GENERAL

CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in
Table of Contents, shall be included in and made part of this Section.
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the safety requirements and procedures required for this project.
1.02 REQUIREMENTS
A. All Contractors will be required to comply with the provisions of the "Construction Safety Act"
and the "Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970". The Contractor shall submit to the
Owner a written safety program for approval. This program shall adhere to all applicable
Federal, State and local requirements.
B. The Contractor safety program shall include as a minimum:
1. A formal safety training and orientation program for all new employees with written
confirmation provided upon request.
2. Periodic refresher training for each worker with written confirmation provided upon re-
quest.
3. A formal supervisory safety training program for all supervisors with written confirma-
tion provided upon request.
4. A program of regular site visits by safety personnel to review, evaluate, and control job
hazards with written confirmation provided upon request.
5. Provision of adequate personal protective equipment (hard hats, clothing, boots, safety
glasses, etc.), first-aid equipment, and trained emergency personnel.
6. An established procedure for the emergency evacuation of injured workers with written
confirmation provided upon request.
7. Provisions for maintaining safety records and reporting accidents in compliance with
OSHA requirements with written confirmation provided to Owner.
8. The safety plan shall be site specific.
9. Contractor shall provide a written statement that their site specific safety plan complies
with current OSHA standards.
C. The Contractor safety program/procedures shall cover at a minimum the following:
1. General housekeeping and cleaning.
2. Equipment operations and maintenance.
SAFETY 01510 - 1
3. Excavations
4. Construction of structures.
5. Noise control.
6. Dust control.
7. Heat.
8. Radiation.
9. Toxic materials.
10. Ladder usage.
11. Water intrusion.
12. Fall Protection.
13. Scaffolding.
14. Personal Protection.
15. Administrative Procedures.
16. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
17. Competent Person (on site).
18. Electrical Hazards (cords, tools CFCI).
19. Emergency action plan.
D. Contractor shall comply with all requests for safety related provisions as given by the Owner’s
or Owner’s representative as a supplement to the Contractor’s safety effort and in no way re-
lieves the Contractor or transfers responsibility.
SAFETY 01510 - 2
SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of
products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard
warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout.
2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and

accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for

a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1

E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents,
either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for
Owner.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names
of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each
product.
1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals
Schedule.
2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:
a. Specification Section number and title.

b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents.
c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.
d. Manufacturer's name and address.
e. Supplier's name and address.
f. Installer's name and address.
g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.
h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery
date.
3. Completed List: Within 45 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3
copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and
for variations from Contract requirements.
4. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt
of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product
selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack
of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the
Contract Documents.
B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 131A.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.

g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce
indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order.

b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1

Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.

7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
9. Protect stored products from damage.
B. Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed.
2. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish "salient characteristics" of products.
7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or
equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable
Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:

1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a

single product and manufacturer, provide the product named.
a. Substitutions may be considered.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled

"Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by
the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements.
3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce

a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed
that complies with requirements.
4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers"

introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers
listed that complies with requirements.
5. Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available

Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of
the products listed or another product that complies with requirements. Comply with
provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed
product.
6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
"Available Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by
one of the manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements.
Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an
unnamed product.
7. Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that
size, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product
or system, provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable
product or system by another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in "Product
Substitutions" Article.
8. Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
"Basis-of-Design Product[s]" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of
manufacturers' names, provide either the specified product or a comparable product by
one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes,
profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.
Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an
unnamed product.
a. Substitutions may be considered provide there a no additional time or cost

impacts.
9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established

Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and
matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed
product matches satisfactorily.

a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and

complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract
Documents on "substitutions" for selection of a matching product.
10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and
manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements.
a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of

colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.
b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture
from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
11. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in

Division 1 for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for
processing such selections.
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 45 days after the
Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at
discretion of Architect.
B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy

conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has
been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible
with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to
other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.

SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. General installation of products.
3. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
4. Progress cleaning.
5. Starting and adjusting.
6. Protection of installed construction.
7. Correction of the Work.
1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for

coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.
2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and
patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work.
4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.
5. Division 1 Section “Field Engineering” for procedural requirements for obtaining
topographical surveys.
1.3 SUBMITTALS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1

verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the
existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical
services.
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or

Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
a. Description of the Work.

b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
d. Recommended corrections.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or
relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances
located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a
detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out work verify, layout information shown on drawing in
relation to stormwater daylight locations by obtaining a field survey from a qualified surveyor per
Division 1 Section 01711.
B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including storm sewer daylighting
locations.
C. Submittals:
1. Survey: Before proceeding with lay out work, obtain topographical survey in areas of
stormwater discharge pipes.
2. Profile and Layout: Prepare and submit a profile of the proposed stormwater discharge
pipe and layout showing discharge locations.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need to
extend the stormwater discharge pipes beyond what is shown on the Construction Documents,
submit a request for information to Architect. Include survey, profile, and layout plan. Coordinate
with Owner’s archaeologists for additional testing.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels and or
exceed the Town ordnance limits.
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and

items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.5 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces.
B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by
Owner's construction forces.
1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for

Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually
agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences
in actual construction progress.
2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation
conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend
preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the
Work depend on Owner's construction.
3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed
surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to
ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper
operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and
finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up

with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.

SECTION 01711 – FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies field engineering services required for Project, including but not li-
mited to:
1. Survey Work.
2. Civil, structural, or other professional engineering services specified, or required.
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect Work of this Section. Other
Specification Sections that relate directly to Work of this Section include, but are not limited
to:
1. GENERAL CONDITIONS and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS.
2. SUMMARY OF WORK; Project description.
3. Section 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES; Record documents.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS OF SURVEYOR OR ENGINEER
A. Qualified engineer or registered land surveyor, acceptable to Owner.
B. Registered professional engineer of discipline required for specific service on Project, li-
censed in the Commonwealth of Virginia.
1.04 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
A. The Contractor shall include in his lump sum bid price the cost for a licensed surveyor to
provide field surveying including reestablishing bench marks and control.
B. From the reestablished benchmarks and control the Contractor shall run all lines and le-
vels, furnish, set and drive grade stakes, and do all other work necessary to lay out his
work in accordance with the dimensions and elevations shown on the drawings. The
Contractor shall employ properly qualified personnel to perform the surveying work herein
described.
FIELD ENGINEERING 01711 - 1

1.05 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Establish minimum of two permanent bench marks on-site, referenced to data established
by survey control points.
1. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.
B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate
means:
1. Site improvements.
a. Utility slopes and invert elevations.
C. From time to time, verify layouts by same methods.
1.06 RECORDS
A. Maintain complete, accurate log of control and survey Work as it progresses.
B. Before request for final inspection, provide certified as-built survey showing dimensions, lo-
cations, angles, and elevations of construction in accordance with requirements of
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit name and address of surveyor and professional engineer to Owner.
B. On request of Owner, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering Work.

C. Submit certificate signed by registered engineer or surveyor certifying that elevation and lo-
cations of improvements are in conformance, or non-conformance, with Contract Docu-
ments.
D. Provide final as-built survey of completed project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
FIELD ENGINEERING 01711 - 2

SECTION 01721 – WATER INTRUSION AND MOISTURE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Take proactive steps, to the extent possible and practical under the circumstances, to pre-
vent and control mold growth.
1.2 Each employer, contractor, subcontractor, supplier and associated entity shall train his or
her personal in moisture and mold control procedures, which shall be part of their site-
specific health and safety plan. Documentation of all training shall be maintained and availa-
ble.
1.3 The following guidelines are to be followed in addition to this specification:
a. Environmental Protection Agency Heath Guidelines on Assessment and remediation

of Fungi in schools and commercial buildings.
b. Guidelines for Remediation Building Materials with Mold Growth caused by clean
water.
1.4 The contractor(s) shall make and keep the building weather tight before and after any ma-
terial, which could be effected by moisture are installed.
1.5 The presence of water within an enclosed building shall be considered a deficiency on the
contractor(s) and immediate action will be required. The first (24) twenty-four to (48) forty-
eight hours of the moisture intrusion event are the most critical.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 All products are to appropriate to the intended task.
2.2 A material safety data sheet (MSDS) must accompany all products upon arrival to the
project.
2.3 The following equipment may be required depending on the size of the moisture intrusion
event.
a. Industrial size dehumidifier, sized to the effect space(s)
b. Carpet drying fans
c. Air scrubbers
d. Industrial size fans
e. HEPA grade vacuums
2.4 All material must be stored in a suitable and dry environment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Documentation
WATER INTRUSION AND MOISTURE CONTROL 01721 - 1

Each employer, contractor, subcontractor, supplier and associated entity shall maintain a sepa-
rate file, which shall include but is not limited to the following documentation of all moisture and
or mold related matters.
a. All contacts: owner, contractor, subcontractor, supplier and associated entity
b. Name of consultants, if required
c. Scope of Work documents
d. Photos with date stamps
e. Daily logs describing all mold related matters
f. Preconstruction assessment and remediation strategies
g. Sampling strategy and results
h. Pre and Post calibration for air sampling equipment
i. Locations, time, date and weather patterns during the sampling event
j. Laboratory Analysis
k. All written communications
l. Training documentation
m. Name and background of remediation contractor
n. MSDS for any agent used in the remediation process
Copies of all documentation shall be made available to Owner and Owner’s representative.
3.2 Remediation
3.1 Remove all wet materials within (24) twenty-four hours of the event, at no cost to the
owner.
3.2 Remove all accumulated water within (24) twenty fours of the event, at no cost to the owner.
3.3 Dry out the effected space(s) by use of air movement equipment and dehumidification
equipment, which shall be put into use within (24) twenty-four hours of the event, at no cost
to the owner.
3.4 Replace materials that were affected without changing the overall schedule and at no
cost to the owner.
3.5 Use the EPA guidelines. The most stringent and current procedures shall prevail.
WATER INTRUSION AND MOISTURE CONTROL 01721 - 2

SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the

building for alterations.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of

other Work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after
installation of other Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days
before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include
the following information:
1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate
why they cannot be avoided.
2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's
appearance and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List
utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate
how long service will be disrupted.
6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to
structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of
reinforcement with original structure.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1

A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that result in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
1. Primary operational systems and equipment.

2. Air or smoke barriers.
3. Fire-protection systems.
4. Control systems.
5. Communication systems.
6. Conveying systems.
7. Electrical wiring systems.
8. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.
C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in
a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity
to perform as intended, or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety.
1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

2. Membranes and flashings.
3. Exterior curtain-wall construction.
4. Equipment supports.
5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
6. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a
visually unsatisfactory manner.
1. If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch exposed Work listed
below. If it is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, engage another
recognized, experienced, and specialized firm.
a. Processed concrete finishes.

b. Preformed metal panels.
c. Roofing.
d. Firestopping.
e. Window wall system.
f. Fluid-applied flooring.
g. Wall covering.
h. HVAC enclosures, cabinets, or covers.
E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before
proceeding.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to
void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.
2. Extent of demolition of existing exterior wood siding that are determined to be rotted or
deteriorated and required to be replaced with new siding is described in specification
section 06201 “Exterior Finish Carpentry” subparagraph 3.5.B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,

including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of

other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
3. Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections of these Specifications.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of
patching and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint
coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface
containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent
surfaces.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-

plane surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.

SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure.

2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner
ready for reuse.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise

indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property
and shall be removed from Project site.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity.
2. Interruption of utility services.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
B. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed
and salvaged.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 1

A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work
similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Comply with Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
A. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner
as far as practical.
B. Hazardous Materials: Based on a hazardous materials survey conducted under a separate

contract by the Owner, the following surfaces should be assumed to contain lead-based paint:
• Wood windows and window frames
• Wood doors and door frames
• Wood storm shutters
• Wood exterior components
1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;

immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner
under a separate contract.
2. Contractor shall coordinate removal of hazardous materials with Owner’s Contractor.
C. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, submit
proposed alternate material using submittal procedures.
2. Use a material whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing
materials.

B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage
during selective demolition operations.
B. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving
areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
2. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding
with selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area of selective
demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
C. Utility Requirements: Refer to mechanical and electrical drawings for shutting off,
disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work
until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing by the utility
provider or the Architect.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing
regulations.

2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of

existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas.
2. Protect exterior and/or interior walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that
are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.
3. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
4. Protect existing sidewalks to remain with barricades or access restrictions.
C. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and
construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction
operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building
exterior.
3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS
A. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
B. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
demolition operations began.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression
devices during flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.

7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
10. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing
before selective demolition operations began.
B. Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:
1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
equipment to match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations
after selective demolition operations are complete.
E. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.
F. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and

remove.
G. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to

recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum.
1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the
methods recommended by RFCI.
H. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.
3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition

operations.
B. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for
new materials.
C. Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining
construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.

D. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of
uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and
replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
1. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply
with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
2. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats
over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch.
Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
3. Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity
of installation.
E. Ceilings: Patch and repair existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of
uniform appearance.
3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to

accumulate on-site.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in Table of Con-
tents, shall be included in and made part of this Section.
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements during contract closeout, in-
cluding, but not limited to:
1. Substantial Completion.
2. Final Acceptance.
3. Record document submittal.
4. Operating and maintenance data.
5. Warranties and bonds.
6. Final cleaning.
A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect Work of this Section. Other Specifi-
cation Sections that relate directly to Work of this Section include, but are not limited to:
1. GENERAL CONDITIONS and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS; Fiscal provisions,

legal submittals, and additional administrative requirements.
2. SUMMARY OF WORK, Owner occupancy.
3. Respective Sections of Specifications.
1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Prior to requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the follow-
ing:
1. On Application for Payment, show 100% completion for portions of Work claimed as
substantially complete. Submit list of incomplete items, value of incomplete Work, and
reasons Work is not complete.
2. Submission of warranties and bonds.
3. Submission of test/adjust/balance records.
4. Submission of maintenance instructions.
5. Final cleaning.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1

6. Provide Warranty Bond against release of retainage.
7. Consent of surety.
8 Notification of shifting insurance coverage’s.
9. Training and instruction to Owner staff.
B. Within reasonable time, Architect will inspect to determine status of completion.
C. Should Architect determine Work is not substantially complete Architect will promptly notify
Contractor in writing giving reasons.
D. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies, and send a second written notice of Substantial Comple-
tion. Architect will reinspect the Work.
E. When Owner and Architect determine Work is substantially complete, Architect will prepare a
Certificate of Substantial Completion in accordance with GENERAL CONDITIONS and
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS.
1.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Prior to requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, com-
plete the following:
1. Submission of final payment request with releases and supporting documentation.
2. Completion of incomplete Work.
3. Assurances that unsettled claims will be settled.
4. Submission of updated final statement, including accounting for final additional

changes to the Contract Sum. Show additional Contract Sum, additions and deduc-
tions, previous Change Orders, Total Adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and
Contract Sum due.
5. Submission of consent of surety.
6. Submission of evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insur-

ance requirements.
7. Transmit final Project Record Documents to Owner.
8. Transmit certified property survey.
9. Prove that taxes, fees, and similar obligations have been paid.
10. Remove temporary facilities and services.
11. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.
12. Certify Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
13. Certify work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents, and defi-
ciencies listed with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected.

14. Certify equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Owner's representa-
tive, and are operational.
15. Certify Work is complete and ready for final inspection.
B. Architect will inspect to verify status of completion with reasonable promptness.
C. Should Architect consider Work is incomplete or defective, Architect will promptly notify Con-
tractor in writing, listing incomplete or defective Work.
1. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy deficiencies and send a second writ-
ten certification that work is complete, and Architect will reinspect the Work.
2. When Architect finds Work is acceptable, Architect will consider closeout submittals.
3. Reinspection Fees: Should Architect perform reinspections due to failure of Work to

comply with claims made by the Contractor, Owner will compensate Architect for such
additional services, and deduct the amount of such compensation from final payment
to the Contractor.
D. Application for Final Payment: Submit Application for Final Payment in accordance with pro-
cedures and requirements in Conditions of the Contract.
1. Owner will issue final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to the Contract
Sum not previously made by Change Orders.
1.05 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Maintain a complete set of Record Documents at the site. Do not use Record Doc-
uments for construction purposes. Provide access to Record Documents for Architect and
Owner’s reference. Generally, without limitation, Record Documents shall include the follow-
ing:
1. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean set of blue or black line prints of Contract Draw-
ings and shop drawings, marked to show actual installation. Give particular attention
to concealed items.
2. Record Project Manual: Maintain a clean Project Manual, including Addenda, Change
Orders, Construction Change Directives, Architect’s Supplemental Instructions, and
other modifications, marked to show changes in actual Work performed. Give particu-
lar attention to substitutions, selection of options, and similar information.
3. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each approved Product Data submittal,
marked to show changes from products delivered, Work performed, and from manu-
facturer's recommended installation instructions.
4. Record Samples: Maintain one copy of each approved Sample submitted.
5. Record Field Test Reports: Maintain one copy of each Field Test Report.
B. Maintenance of Documents and Samples: Store documents and samples in Contractor's field
office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files and racks for document sto-
rage. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples. File documents
and samples in accordance with CSI format. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condi-

tion and in good order. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes. Make doc-
uments and samples available at all times for inspection by Architect.
C. Marking Devices: Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code des-
ignated by Architect.
D. Recording: label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters. Record
as-built information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any Work until re-
quired information is recorded.
E. Drawings: Legibly mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following:
1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.
2. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, refe-

renced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction, refe-

renced to visible and accessible features of the structure.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Changes made by Field Order or Change Order.
6. Details not in original Contract Documents.
F. Specifications and Addenda: Legibly mark each Section to record:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and item of
equipment actually installed.
2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
G. Submittal: At Contract Closeout, deliver Record Documents to Architect. Accompany submittal

with transmittal letter in duplicate, indicating the date, Project title and number, Contractor's
name and address, title and number of Record Document, and signature of Contractor or his
authorized representative.
1.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. The WORK performed and the equipment and materials supplied by CONTRACTOR under
this CONTRACT shall be in accordance with sound construction practice, all applicable codes
and regulations and provisions of this CONTRACT and CONTRACTOR shall observe and ex-
ercise therein the standards of skill, care and diligence adhered to by recognized first class
contractors performing work of a similar nature. All equipment and material furnished by
CONTRACTOR shall conform to the specifications, drawings samples and other descriptions
as set forth in this CONTRACT. All design and workmanship shall be in strict accordance with
the CONTRACT and with sound construction practice. CONTRACTOR warrants the WORKS
against defects in material and/or workmanship furnished or performed by CONTRACTOR for
a minimum period of twelve (12) month, unless otherwise specified, from and after the comple-
tion date shown in the Final Acceptance Certificates, regardless of whether the same were fur-
nished or performed by CONTRACTOR or by any of his Subcontractors or Vendors.
B. Upon receipt of written notice from OWNER of any defect arising during any applicable warran-
ty period due to defective material or workmanship the affected item or part of the WORK shall
be reworked including all necessary repair or replacement by CONTRACTOR at a time and

within a time acceptable to OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall perform such tests as OWNER
may require in order to verify that such rework complies with the requirements of the
CONTRACT. CONTRACTOR warrants such reworked item or part of the WORK against de-
fects in material or workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months from and after the date of
completion and acceptance thereof by OWNER but for no more than twenty-four (24) months
from and after the effective completion date of the related part of the WORK. All costs inciden-
tal to such rework and reinspection and/or retesting shall be borne by CONTRACTOR and
shall include without limitation the costs of the removal, replacement, reinstallation and trans-
port of any necessary equipment and/or material and/or tools and the like necessary to remedy
such defective WORK and all and any other costs incurred by CONTRACTOR as a result of
such rework and reinspection and/or retesting.
C. General: Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts, executed by
each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers, and subcontractors.
D. Number of Original Signed Copies Required: Two each.
E. If the general contractor or any Contractor or subcontractor cannot be contacted within a 24

hour period, or fails to respond within 48 hours after notification, the Town of Purcellville will be
free to undertake any corrective action it deems to be in its best interest without, jeopardizing
any warranty provision, and to back-charge the cost to the responsible party.

SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes,
systems and equipment.

1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for
operation and maintenance manuals.
2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance
manuals.
3. Divisions 3 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual
requirements for products in those Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular

interaction.
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting
inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance
directory. Architect will return 1 copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of
manual are acceptable.
B. Final Submittal: Submit 1 copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final
inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.
1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of
each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 1

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more

than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information
furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1. List of documents.
2. List of systems.
3. List of equipment.
4. Table of contents.
B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation
and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and
maintenance manual.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with the same designation used in the
Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE
Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."
2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for
each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a
system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
6. Name and address of Architect.
7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to

accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to

accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on
spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize

data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-
reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.
Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each
tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of
equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch, 20-lb/sq. ft. white bond paper.
5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1. Fire.
2. Flood.

3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
2.4 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in

individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.

6. Normal shutdown instructions.

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls
as installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance
service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in the
manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For
each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and
maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in
Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an
instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment
or systems.
E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence
and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings
to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section
"Project Record Documents."
F. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for the schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.

SECTION 01820 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel, including the following:
1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
3. Demonstration and training videotapes.
1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for

preinstruction conferences.
2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training
for products in those Sections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration
and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and
instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each
training module.
1. At completion of training, submit one complete training manual(s) for Owner's use.
B. Qualification Data: For instructor.
A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with

requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and
maintenance procedures and training.
B. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820 - 1

1. Review required content of instruction.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to

minimize disrupting Owner's operations.
B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction

time, and course content.
C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data
has been reviewed and approved by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules
for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections, and as follows:
1. Motorized doors, including overhead coiling grilles.

2. Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm and fire-extinguishing systems.
3. HVAC geothermal systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems,
distribution piping, and ground-loop valves and devices.
4. HVAC instrumentation and controls.
5. Electrical service and distribution, including panelboards and motor controls.
6. Lighting equipment and controls.
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include
a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each
module, include instruction for the following:
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
c. Operating standards.
d. Regulatory requirements.
e. Equipment function.
f. Operating characteristics.
g. Limiting conditions.
h. Performance curves.
2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a. Emergency manuals.
b. Operations manuals.

c. Maintenance manuals.
d. Project Record Documents.
e. Identification systems.
f. Warranties and bonds.
g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.

b. Instructions on stopping.
c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f. Special operating instructions and procedures.
4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Startup procedures.
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m. Special operating instructions and procedures.
5. Adjustments: Include the following:
a. Alignments.
b. Checking adjustments.
c. Noise and vibration adjustments.
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a. Diagnostic instructions.
b. Test and inspection procedures.
7. Maintenance: Include the following:
a. Inspection procedures.
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d. Procedures for routine cleaning
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.

g. Instruction on use of special tools.
8. Repairs: Include the following:
a. Diagnosis instructions.
b. Repair instructions.
c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual.
B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
3.2 INSTRUCTION
A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner, through Construction Manager, with at least seven days
advance notice.
C. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to owner. Remove
instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial
training use.

SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying
pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory structural soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward
capillary flow of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond

indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Owner or Owner’s representative.
Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to
Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
lines and dimensions without direction by Owner or Owner’s representative.
Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Owner or Owner’s
representative, shall be without additional compensation.
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders
of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for bulk excavation or [/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m)
for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment
EARTHWORK 02300 - 1
equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram
hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:
1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic

excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- (1065-mm-) wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock
bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp (103-kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force
of not less than 28,700 lbf (128 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,400 lbf (82
kN) with extra-long reach boom; measured according to SAE J-1179.
2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 230-hp (172-
kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of 47,992-lbf (213.3-kN) breakout force
with a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732.
I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or
below the ground surface.
J. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix
asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete
pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
K. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill

immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.
L. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:
1. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture.

2. Warning tapes.
B. Material Test Reports: For each borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557.
A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and

ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated.
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during earth moving operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 2
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or
B. Utility Locator Service: Notify "Miss Utility" for area where Project is located before beginning
earth moving operations.
C. Do not commence earth moving operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control
measures are in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SW, SP, SC, ML, and SM
according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than
3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other
deleterious matter.
1. Liquid Limit: Less than 30.

2. Plasticity Index: Less than 10.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups CL, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to
ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
(37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch
(25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
(37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.
I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and
natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-
inch (25-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 3
J. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150
mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with
metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal
detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows:
1. Red: Electric.
2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
4. Blue: Water systems.
5. Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth
moving operations.
B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.
C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove
temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage
ditches.
3.3 EXPLOSIVES
A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.
3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of

surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include
EARTHWORK 02300 - 4
rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time
will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent
construction without exceeding the following dimensions:
a. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast
against grade.
b. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade.
c. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches (600
mm) wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide.
B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be

classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross
sectioned by Architect. Changes in the Contract Time may be authorized for rock excavation.
1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface;

underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with
soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.
a. Intermittent drilling; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock

excavation is earth excavation.
2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and
subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without
exceeding the following dimensions:
a. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade.
b. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches (600
mm) wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25
mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and
removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.

Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms
to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility
Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or
minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing
surfaces.
3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations,
and subgrades.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 5
3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below
frost line.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than
top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels
of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp
objects along trench subgrade.
1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter, hand-excavate
trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.
2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of
trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe or conduit circumference. Fill depressions
with tamped sand backfill.
3. For flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support
conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.
3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work.
D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when
approved by Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by

Architect.
3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 6
1. Stockpile soil materials in locations designated on the construction documents. Do not

store within drip line of remaining trees.
3.11 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing,

waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.
3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings,
and bodies of conduits.
C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450
mm) of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of
footings.
D. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.
E. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm)
in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both
sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of
piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength material to a

height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities
testing.
G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6
inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.13 SOIL FILL
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 7
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.

2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in
loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12
inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95
percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below
subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 percent.
4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 90
percent.
3.16 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 8
3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS
A. Place subbase course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under pavements and walks as follows:
1. Shape subbase course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
2. Place subbase course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single
layer.
3. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross
sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according
to ASTM D 1557.
3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner shall will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the
following special inspections:
1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with
requirements.
2. Determine that fill material and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements.
3. Determine, at the required frequency, that in-place density of compacted fill complies with
requirements.
B. Testing Agency: Owner shall engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to
perform tests and inspections. Contractor shall coordinate and notify testing agency of work
progress and when testing will be needed.
C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when
approved by Architect.
E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167,
ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following
locations and frequencies:
1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill
layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building
slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.
2. Trench Backfill: At each compacted level, initial and final backfill layer, at least one test
for every 150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.
F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to
depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 9
3.19 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape
and recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.20 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 10
SECTION 02510 - WATER DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for
water service and fire-service mains.
B. Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for
installation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.
B. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.
C. PA: Polyamide (nylon) plastic.
D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
E. PP: Polypropylene plastic.
F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G. RTRF: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) fittings.
H. RTRP: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) pipe.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same
area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty
locations, and elevations.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water valves and specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 1

A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water
mains and backflow prevention.
2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping,
including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.
3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service
piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.
B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-
service-main products.
E. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve
and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression.
F. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic
water.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:
1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:
1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.
2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-
point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when
outdoor storage is necessary.
C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift.
Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or
rigging points.
D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and
handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural
capacity of floor when storing inside.
F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

A. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed

interruption of service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Construction
Manager's written permission.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K, water tube, annealed temper.
1. Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,

wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if
indicated.
2. Copper, Pressure-Seal Fittings:
a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM O-ring seal in each end.
b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Bronze fitting with stainless-steel grip ring and EPDM O-ring
seal in each end.
B. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if
required to match piping.
C. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket,

metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot
end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard

pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end
unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern

or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
C. Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125, cast iron.
2.3 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS
A. Ductile-Iron Rigid Expansion Joints:
1. Description: Three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve with

gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion
indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
a. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.
B. Ductile-Iron Flexible Expansion Joints:
1. Description: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-

joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include two gasketed ball-joint
sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset
and expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and
steel bolts.
C. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings:
1. Description: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and 1 or 2 flexing

sections for up to 15-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
2.4 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Materials and Methods" for commonly used joining
materials.
B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series.
2.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least
equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
B. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings:
1. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with center

sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners and with ends of same sizes as piping to
be joined.

a. Standard: AWWA C219.

b. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard.
c. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
d. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum.
e. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.
C. Split-Sleeve Pipe Couplings:
1. Description: Metal, bolted, split-sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling with sealing

pad and closure plates, O-ring gaskets, and bolt fasteners.
a. Standard: AWWA C219.

b. Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard.
c. Sleeve Dimensions: Of thickness and width required to provide pressure rating.
d. Gasket Material: O-rings made of EPDM rubber, unless otherwise indicated.
e. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum.
f. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.
D. Flexible Connectors:
1. Nonferrous-Metal Piping: Bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid; with copper-tube,
pressure-type, solder-joint ends or bronze flanged ends brazed to hose.
2. Ferrous-Metal Piping: Stainless-steel hose covered with stainless-steel wire braid; with
ASME B1.20.1, threaded steel pipe nipples or ASME B16.5, steel pipe flanges welded to
hose.
E. Dielectric Fittings: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, or plain end
types; and matching piping system materials.
1. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated union assembly, designed for 250-psig minimum

working pressure at 180 deg F. Include insulating material that isolates dissimilar metals
and ends with inside threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
2. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure to suit system pressures.
3. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled companion-flange assembly, full-face
or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene
bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure to suit system pressures.
4. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel couplings with inert and noncorrosive

thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225
deg F.
5. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipples with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic
lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types, and 300-psig minimum
working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.6 CORROSION-PROTECTION PIPING ENCASEMENT
A. Encasement for Underground Metal Piping:
1. Standards: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

2. Form: Sheet or tube.

3. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch minimum thickness, or high-density, crosslaminated

PE film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness.
2.7 GATE VALVES
A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products approved by
the utility.
3. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:
a. Description: Gray- or ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-
iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.
1) Standard: AWWA C509.

2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig.
3) End Connections: Mechanical joint.
4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.
4. Nonrising-Stem, High-Pressure, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:
a. Description: Ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or ductile-iron gate,

resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.

3) End Connections: Push on or mechanical joint.
4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.
5. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves:
a. Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body and bonnet, with bronze or gray- or ductile-
iron gate, resilient seats, and bronze stem.

3) End Connections: Flanged.
2.8 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies:

the utility.
2. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine.
a. Standard: MSS SP-60.

b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve
with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and
type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.

c. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, metal-seated gate valve with one raised
face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.
B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section,
adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER,"
and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5 inches in
diameter.
1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate
deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.
C. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench,
extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve.
2.9 CORPORATION VALVES AND CURB VALVES
A. Manufacturers:

the utility.
B. Service-Saddle Assemblies: Comply with AWWA C800. Include saddle and valve compatible
with tapping machine.
1. Service Saddle: Copper alloy with seal and AWWA C800, threaded outlet for corporation
valve.
2. Corporation Valve: Bronze body and ground-key plug, with AWWA C800, threaded inlet
and outlet matching service piping material.
3. Manifold: Copper fitting with two to four inlets as required, with ends matching
corporation valves and outlet matching service piping material.
C. Curb Valves: Comply with AWWA C800. Include bronze body, ground-key plug or ball, and
wide tee head, with inlet and outlet matching service piping material.
D. Service Boxes for Curb Valves: Similar to AWWA M44 requirements for cast-iron valve boxes.
Include cast-iron telescoping top section of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with
lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over curb valve and with a barrel
approximately 3 inches in diameter.
1. Shutoff Rods: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest
buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve.
2.10 WATER METERS
A. Water meters will be furnished by utility company.
2.11 WATER METER BOXES
A. Description: Cast-iron body and cover for disc-type water meter, with lettering "WATER
METER" in cover; and with slotted, open-bottom base section of length to fit over service piping.
1. Option: Base section may be cast-iron, PVC, clay, or other pipe.

B. Description: Polymer-concrete body and cover for disc-type water meter, with lettering
"WATER" in cover; and with slotted, open-bottom base section of length to fit over service
piping. Include vertical and lateral design loadings of 15,000 lb minimum over 10 by 10 inches
square.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following
applications.
B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure
rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.
D. Flanges, unions, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on aboveground
piping and piping in vaults.
E. Underground water-service piping NPS 3/4 to NPS 3 shall be any of the following:
1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; copper, pressure-seal fittings; and pressure-
sealed joints.
F. Water Meter Box Water-Service Piping NPS 3/4 to NPS 2 shall be same as underground water-
service piping.
G. Underground Fire-Service-Main Piping NPS 4 to NPS 12 shall be any of the following:
1. Ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical

joints.
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for NPS 3 and larger underground
installation. Use threaded- or flanged-end valves for installation in vaults. Use UL/FMG,
nonrising-stem gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and curb
valves with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 and smaller installation.
3.4 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. See Division 15 Section "Basic Materials and Methods" for piping-system common
requirements.

3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in
water main.
B. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company
and of size and in location indicated. Coordinate exact location with water utility company.
C. Make connections larger than NPS 2 with tapping machine according to the following:
1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP-60.

2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve.
3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main.
Remove tapping machine and connect water-service piping.
4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP-60. Install valve with stem
pointing up and with valve box.
D. Make connections NPS 2 and smaller with drilling machine according to the following:
1. Install service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves in size, quantity, and

arrangement required by utility company standards.
2. Install service-saddle assemblies on water-service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets for
corporation valves.
3. Use drilling machine compatible with service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves.
Drill hole in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water-service piping.
4. Install corporation valves into service-saddle assemblies.
5. Install manifold for multiple taps in water main.
6. Install curb valve in water-service piping with head pointing up and with service box.
E. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.
1. Install PE corrosion-protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

2. Install copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
F. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.
1. Install PE corrosion-protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
G. Install PE pipe according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 645.
H. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 30 inches, with top at least 12 inches below
level of maximum frost penetration, and according to the following:
I. Install piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other
obstructions that cannot be disturbed.
J. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building-water-piping

systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.
1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building-water-piping systems are

installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material.
Make connections to building-water-piping systems when those systems are installed.
K. Sleeves are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

L. Mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods."
M. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction.
Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.
N. See Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for fire-suppression-water piping inside the
building.
O. See Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for potable-water piping inside the building.
3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. See Division 15 Section "Basic Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.
B. Make pipe joints according to the following:
1. Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use proprietary crimping tool and procedure

recommended by copper, pressure-seal-fitting manufacturer.
2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and
AWWA M41.
3. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194.
4. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials,
with OD, and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic
Materials and Methods" for joining piping of dissimilar metals.
3.7 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION
A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and
restrained-joint types that may be used include the following:
1. Concrete thrust blocks.

2. Locking mechanical joints.
3. Set-screw mechanical retainer glands.
4. Bolted flanged joints.
5. Heat-fused joints.
6. Pipe clamps and tie rods.
B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches.
Include anchorages for the following piping systems:
1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600.

2. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23.
3. Bonded-Joint Fiberglass, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M45.
4. Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24.
C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed
ferrous anchorage devices.

3.8 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground
valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.
B. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44.
C. UL/FMG, Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in
vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.
D. UL/FMG, Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24.
E. MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system.
F. Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed up
and with service box.
G. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Install in vault or aboveground between shutoff valves.
H. Relief Valves: Comply with AWWA C512. Install aboveground with shutoff valve on inlet.
3.9 WATER METER INSTALLATION
A. Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to utility company's written instructions.
3.10 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS
A. Rough-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to utility company's written
instructions.
3.11 VACUUM BREAKER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
A. Install pressure vacuum breaker assemblies of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include
valves and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and
B. Do not install pressure vacuum breaker assemblies in vault or other space subject to flooding.
3.12 WATER METER BOX INSTALLATION
A. Install water meter boxes in paved areas flush with surface.
B. Install water meter boxes in grass or earth areas with top 2 inches above surface.
3.13 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 2 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. See Division 15 Section "Basic Materials and Methods" for piping connections to valves and
equipment.
C. Connect water-distribution piping to utility water main. Use water utility approved tapping
method: tapping sleeve and tapping valve or service clamp and corporation valve.
D. Connect water-distribution piping to interior domestic water and fire-suppression piping.
A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks
have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to
stabilize system. Use only potable water.
B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours.
1. Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments.
Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test
pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per
100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is
within allowed limits.
C. Prepare reports of testing activities.
3.15 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for
underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping.
Underground warning tapes are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
B. Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker indicating plastic water-service piping, on

main electrical meter panel. See Division 15 Section "Basic Materials and Methods" for
identifying devices.
3.16 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:
1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have
been altered, extended, or repaired before use.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in
NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty
water does not appear at points of outlet.
3. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in
AWWA C651 or do as follows:
a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm
of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours.

b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine
solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3
hours.
c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine
remains in water coming from system.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.
B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

SECTION 02552 - GROUND-LOOP, HEAT-PUMP PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping for vertical, direct-buried, ground-loop, heat-pump systems
that operate between 23 and 104 deg F.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum

working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ground-Loop, Heat-Pump Piping: 160 psig.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Pipe and fittings.

2. Joining method and equipment.
3. Propylene glycol solution.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Geothermal Loop contractor must have an IGSHPA certified installer on staff.
B. Persons fusing pipe must have a current fusing certification from any major pipe
manufacturer.
C. Driller must be licensed in Virginia and carry a class A license with a Water Well
Provider (WWP) designation.
D. Driller must use Master Tradesman drillers regulated by the VA Department of

Professional and Occupation Regulation (DPOR).
GROUND-LOOP, HEAT-PUMP PIPING 02552 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Piping from Vault to Well Field and piping in Wells: 1” RAUPEX UV Shield pipe or equal
cross linked polyethylene tubing, factory formed into a RAUGEO 4-pipe probeu-bend,
or equal, at the base of the loop. Vertical sections of pipe shall be one piece. Pipe
spacers shall be installed every five feet in each well. Pipes shall be manufacturered
using a high-pressure peroxide method for cross-linked polyethylene (Engel method
PEXa). All PEXa pipes shall also meet the requirements of ASTM F2023 for chlorine
resistance. RAUGEO 4-pipe probe u-bend shall be encased in a high strength polyester
resin. Pipe shall be rated for continuous operation at 160 psig @73 degrees F and 100
psig at 180 degrees F. Two 1-inch: diameter pipe loops shall be installed in each well to
increase heat transfer per well. Each supply and each return at the top of each
borehole shall be joined to 1-1/4” PEXa pipe supply and return piping to connect the
manifold in the vault to the well.
1. General, Cross-linked polyethylene tubing shall be manufactured by the high-

pressure peroxide method (known as PEXa), and shall conform to ASTM
Standard Specifications F-876, and F-877 or D-2513, or DIN 16892 and 16893.
Polymer electro-fusion fittings for PEXa pipes of each dimensional specification
shall conform to ASTM F-1055 or ISO 14531-2; metal cold-expansion
compression-sleeve fittings shall conform to ASTM F-2080.
2. Tubing Material PEXa material shall be high-density cross-linked polyethylene
manufactured using the high-pressure peroxide method of cross-linking with a
minimum degree of cross-linking of 75% when tested in accordance with ASTM
D-2765, Method B. The tubing material designation code as defined in ASTM F-
876 shall be PEX 1006 or PEX 1008.
3. Polymer electro-fusion fitting material. Polymer electron-fusion fitting shall be
manufactured using a material in accordance to IGSHPA Standard 1C.2.2.
4. Dimensions: PEXa tubing shall be manufactured in accordance to the
dimensional specifications of ASTM F-876, and F-877 with a minimum working
pressure rating of 160 psi (1.103 MPa) at 73.4°F (23°C).
5. Table of Working Pressure Ratings of water filled tubing at 73.4°F (23°C) for DR-
PR PEX 1006 or PEX 1008 Plastic Pipe.
a) Dimension Ratio Pressure Rating, psi

9 160
6. Fittings. All fittings used with PEXa tubing intended for geothermal applications
shall be polymer electro-fusion fittings or cold expansion compression-sleeve
metal fittings. Polymer electro-fusion fittings shall conform with ASTM F-1055 or
ISO 14531-2 whereas cold-expansion compression sleeve fittings shall conform
with ASTM F-2080, and shall have a minimum inside diameter of 82% of inside
pipe diameter.

7. Markings. Required product standard information shall be marked on PEXa tubing and
fittings as defined by the appropriate products standard specifications.
8. Provide miscellaneous caps, means to protect well, and markings for well location.
9. Provide PVC bend guides where exposed piping makes 90 degree bends.
10. Two 1-inch: diameter pipe loops shall be installed in each well to increase heat transfer
per well.
B. Provide RAUGEO 3” polymer manifold manufactured from polypropylene pipe and fittings which
meet or exceed ASTM F-2389. Each manifold shall include a fill/vent cock and tridicator to
measure pressure and temperature. Each drop shall provide a flow gauge and include a 1-1/4”
metal compression-sleeve adapter, conforming to ASTM F-2080 to connect the 1-1/4” CTS
pipe.
1. Provide each manifold with:
a. Tridicator
b. Integral flow gauges
c. Fill/vent cock
2. Provide additional specialties in piping valve box:
a. Supply and Return Manifold Circuit Isolation Valves

b. Manifold Supply and Return Isolation Valves
C. Piping from Building to Geothermal Heat Pump Vault Manifold(s) (HDPE): Pipe and fittings shall
be manufactured from high density, high molecular weight, PE3408 polyethylene resin, which
meets or exceeds ASTM D 3350 cell classification 345464C, and is listed by the Plastic Pipe
Institute in PPI TR-4 with HDB ratings of 1600 psi at 73 degrees F and 800 psi at 140 degrees
F. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D 3035. Molded Fittings are
manufactured in accordance with ASTM D 3261 (butt outlet), and ASTM D2683 (socket outlet).
Electrofusion fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM F-1055 and mechanical
fittings in accordance with ASTM D-1924, Section 3.1.6.1.
1. Clean rework material from the manufacturer’s own production may be used provided the
pipe or fittings meet all requirements of this specification. Recycled and reclaimed
material from outside the manufacturer’s plant shall not be used.
2. Approved joining methods are heat fusion, electrofusion, flanging, transition fittings, and
approved mechanical stab fittings. Persons performing heat fusion shall be qualified in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommended fusion joining procedures. Electrofusion
and mechanical joints shall be made in accordance with the fitting manufacturer’s
instructions.
3. Pipe used to fabricate HDPE fabricated fittings shall comply with the dimensions and
tolerances as specified in ASTM F714. HDPE Fabricated fittings shall be fabricated of
pipe and plate materials consisting of virgin resin in accordance with the material
specifications listed in ASTM D1248. HDPE PE3408 fabricated fittings utilize materials
extruded or molded from a Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P-3-4 resin with a cell
class of 345434C as state in ASTM D3350 and are compatible for heat fusion with any
pipe manufactured from a like or similar resin.
4. Fabricated Fitting Pressure Ratings: Provide fully Pressure Rated – meets or exceeds the
minimum required system design pressure. Generally, this is accomplished by utilizing
pipe with a thicker wall than the adjoining pipe. It can also be accomplished by fiberglass
wrapping or reinforcing the fabricated fittings.

5. Valves: Polyethylene ball valve shall be PE2406 or 3408 suitable for hdpe pipe
applications including water. The valve shall be rated at 160 PSI for water application at
70 degrees F. Valve ends shall be extra long for butt, socket, or electrofusion
applications, and the valve shall close with only ¼ turn. When the valve is in the closed
position, the seating shall be maximized as the pressure from the ball is forced against
the seat. Valves shall meet or exceed ASSI B-16.40, ASTM D2513, DOT part 192, and
are manufactured in accordance with ISO 9002, a total quality management system.
6. Provide transition fittings as required to connect to steel, copper, and RUAGEO piping.
2.2 BOREHOLE BACKFILL
A. Grout: Fully grout each borehole with thermally enhanced grout with a thermal conductivity (K
value) greater than 1.05 Btu/h x sq. ft. x deg F, subject to State and Local approval for such
use.
1. Record for each borehole the quantity of bags of grout mix used for each hole every day.
Provide records to the construction manager daily.
B. Backfill below Surface Seal: Natural or manufactured sand specified in Division 2 Section
"Earthwork."
2.3 ANTIFREEZE SOLUTION
A. Propylene Glycol: Minimum 20 percent propylene glycol with corrosion inhibitors and
environmental stabilizer additives to be mixed with water to protect the piping circuit and
connected equipment from physical damage from freezing or corrosion.
B. Quantity: Sufficient solution for initial system startup and for preventive maintenance for one
year from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Dilution Water: Chloride content shall be less than 25 ppm, sulfate less than 25 ppm, and
hardness less than 100 ppm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORK PREPARATION
A. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to determine if existing underground utilities are located in the
proposed borehole site. Contractor shall repair piping damaged during Work and return the
utility to service.
B. Provide proper site protection for the moving, setting up, operating, and removing of the drill rig
including protection to curbs and sidewalks, protection to existing trees, shrubs, and lawn,
drilling mud sediment basins, erosion control barriers, etc. Notify the Owner of obstacles to the
drilling operation before actions are taken to remove obstacles.
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, warning tape, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section
"Earthwork."

3.3 HORIZONTAL PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Separate trenches by 10 feet minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Remove rocks in trenches
that could contact pipe.
B. Backfill to minimum 30 inches above pipe with mud developed from excavated rock-free soil or
with sand, pea gravel, or fly ash. Backfill from slurry level to grade with excavated soil,
compacting as specified for pipe burial in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
C. Install HPPE piping in trenches according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM F 645.
1. Clean PE pipe and fittings and make heat-fusion joints according to ASTM D 2657.
Minimize number of joints.
2. Heating Surface temperature: 490°-510° F. The use of an insulated heat shield is
recommended for this fusion.
3. Clean and Secure the pipe ends. Clean each pipe end with a clean cotton cloth or paper
towel. Remove all foreign matter. Install and secure the ends in the machine. The ends
should protrude past the clamps enough so that facing will be complete. Tighten the
clamps to prevent slippage of the pipe.
4. Face and Align. Place the facing tool into the unit between the ends and face them to
establish smooth, clean parallel mating surfaces. Remove the facing tool and bring the
ends together. DO NOT TOUCH THE PIPE ENDS AFTER FACING. Check alignment
and adjust if needed. Always tighten the high side never loosen the low side. Ends should
be squared and aligned with no gaps between the ends. Reface if adjustment is made.
5. Melt. Verify the heating tool is maintaining the correct temperature. Install the insulated
heat shield between the PE 3408 end and the heating tool, bring the ends together
against the heating tool and hold contact without force. After the pipe has achieved
approximately ½ of the proper melt bead size, remove the insulated heat shield and bring
the PE 3408 pipe into contact with the heating tool and continue heating for the proper
melt bead size on the PE 3408 pipe.
6. Joining and Inspection. When the proper melt bead size is formed, quickly separate the
ends and remove the heating tool. Quickly inspect (within approximately 3 seconds) the
melted ends, which should be flat, smooth and completely melted. Bring the melted ends
together and apply enough joining force* to roll the melted beads over to the pipe
surface. NOTE: The pipe side of the bead may not roll completely down against the pipe
surface. The PE 3408 melt bead must be rolled completely down against the pipe
surface.
7. Cooling. Allow the fusion joint to cool properly (until cool to the touch). Cool for about 30-
90 seconds per inch of pipe diameter. DO NOT TRY TO SHORTEN THE COOLING
TIME BY APPLYING WATER OR WET CLOTHS.
D. Purge, flush, and pressure test piping before backfilling trenches.
E. Install continuous detectable warning tape for underground piping. Locate tape a minimum of
24 inches below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified
in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
F. Extend HDPE main to connect to building condenser water distribution system. Provide
temporary guard or enclosure to protect the heat exchanger stub until final connections are
made.
G. Common piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Materials
and Methods."

3.4 VERTICAL PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install PEX piping in boreholes according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM F 645.
1. PEXa tubing may not be butt-fused or socket-fused to fittings. Polymer electro-fusion

fittings may be used with PEXa tubing when installed in accordance with manufacturer’s
published procedures. Cold-expansion compression-sleeve fittings may be used for all
PEXa connections when installed according to the manufacturer’s published procedures
and is permitted to be direct buried with manufacturer approved corrosion covering.
B. The Contractor shall install piping in accordance with International Ground Source Heat Pump
Association (IGSHPA) certified methods and utilizing IGSPHA certified technicians. After
installation of the heat exchanger, the Contractor shall pressure grout the bore hole with
thermally enhanced grout, Thermal grout 85, or Grout Mix 111, subject to state EPA approval.
C. Purge, flush, and pressure test piping before backfilling boreholes with grout.
D. After installation of loop pipe in borehole, fill piping loop with antifreeze solution and pressure
test piping.
E. Pump backfill grout into borehole to discharge at base of borehole using a tremie pump. Fill
borehole with backfill to a point at least 30 inches below grade and backfill remainder with
surface seal material.
F. Connect four (4), 1-inch REHAU PEXa continuous pipes leaving borehole in trench with “Y”-
reducer connections using REHAU Everlock compression sleeve fittings. Reduce two (2), 1-inch
supply to one (1), 1 ¼-inch supply and two (2), 1-inch return to one (1) 1 ¼-inch return pipe.
G. Extend PEXa 1 1/4 –inch vertical supply and return pipes from each borehole and connect to
HDPE horizontal water-source, ground-loop, heat-pump piping system in vault in locations with
pipe sizes indicated.
3.5 ANTIFREEZE SOLUTION FILL
A. Fill system with required quantity of propylene glycol and water.
B. Test the dilute solution using gas chromatography to verity concentration of propylene glycol,
and forward report to Architect.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
A. Piping Tests: Fill piping 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize piping. Use
potable water only.
B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times the pipe working-pressure rating allowing
for static pressure of borehole depth.

1. Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments.
Hold at test pressure for 30 minutes. Slowly increase to next test pressure increment and
hold for 30 minutes. After testing at maximum test pressure, reduce pressure to 30 psig.
Hold for 90 minutes, and measure pressure at 30-minute intervals. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
C. Prepare reports of testing activity.

SECTION 02920 - LAWNS AND GRASSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Seeding.
1. Division 2 Section “Earthwork” for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough
grading.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
B. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand
with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
C. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to
become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.
D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface
of a fill or backfill immediately beneath planting soil.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture
stating the botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety,
and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date
of packaging.
C. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for each type of planting.
A. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers.
LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 1

1.6 SCHEDULING
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit.
1.7 LAWN MAINTENANCE
A. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is
established, but for not less than the following periods:
1. Seeded Lawns: 60 days from date of Substantial Completion.
a. When full maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if
lawn is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.
B. Maintain and establish lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and
other operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a
uniformly smooth lawn.
C. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn-watering equipment to
convey water from sources and to keep lawn uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches.
1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or

mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted
areas.
2. Water lawn at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week.
D. Mow lawn as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified
height without cutting more than 40 percent of grass height. Remove no more than 40 percent
of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades
bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet.
E. Lawn Post Fertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry.
1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. to lawn area.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEED
A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed
Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.
B. Seed Species: State-certified seed of grass species, to match predominant type in existing
lawn.
2.2 TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4 percent organic material content;
free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant
growth.

1. Topsoil Source: Amend existing in-place surface soil to produce topsoil. Verify suitability
of surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay
lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
a. Surface soil may be supplemented with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-
site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or
mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from
agricultural land, bogs or marshes.
2.3 PLANTING ACCESSORIES
A. Selective Herbicides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer for
application.
2.4 MULCHES
A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of
wheat, rye, oats, or barley.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive lawns and grass for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and
plantings from damage caused by planting operations.
B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of

soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.3 LAWN PREPARATION
A. Limit lawn subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.
B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches, remove stones
larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and
legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1. Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 4 inches but not less than required to meet finish
grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or
subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

a. Spread approximately one-half the thickness of planting soil mix over loosened
subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 2 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of
planting soil mix.
b. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.
C. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly
fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove
ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be
planted in the immediate future.
D. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface
to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
E. Restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting.
3.4 SEEDING
A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind
velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at
right angles to each other.
1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.
B. Sow seed at the recommended rate per square foot for the grass specie used.
C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.
D. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread
uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches in loose
depth over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.
1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into topsoil with suitable mechanical equipment.
E. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying topsoil within 24 hours
after completing seeding operations. Soak and scatter uniformly to a depth of 3/16 inch and roll
to a smooth surface.
3.5 LAWN RENOVATION
A. Renovate existing lawn.
B. Renovate existing lawn damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or

equipment and movement of vehicles.
1. Reestablish lawn where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is

required.
C. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory lawn areas; do not bury in soil.
D. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor's operations, including oil
drippings, fuel spills, stone, gravel, and other construction materials, and replace with new
topsoil.

E. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing lawn.
F. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as
required. Do not use pre-emergence herbicides.
G. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf,
and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
H. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches.
I. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new lawns and mix
thoroughly into top 4 inches of existing soil. Provide new planting soil to fill low spots and meet
finish grades.
J. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch as required for new lawns.
K. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new lawn is established.
3.6 SATISFACTORY LAWNS
A. Satisfactory Seeded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of
grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding
90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches.
B. Reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until lawns
are satisfactory.
3.7 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by lawn work from paved areas. Clean wheels of
vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.
B. Erect barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic.
Maintain barricades throughout maintenance period and remove after lawn is established.
C. Remove erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.

SECTION 03301 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mix
design, placement procedures, and finishes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: In addition to the following, comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301.
B. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
C. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete

products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same
manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same
manufacturer.
D. Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
F. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following, unless
modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. General requirements, including submittals, quality assurance, acceptance of structure,

and protection of in-place concrete.
2. Formwork and form accessories.
3. Steel reinforcement and supports.
4. Concrete mixtures.
5. Handling, placing, and constructing concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03301 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMWORK
A. Furnish formwork and form accessories according to ACI 301.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel
wire into flat sheets.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Types I or II or Type I/II.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded.
C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and
manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, #57 stone, complying with deleterious substance
limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.
B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or
self-expanding cork.
C. Sealer: Apply concrete sealer by Euclid or approved equal over all new concrete work, other
than floor slab.
2.6 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application

to fresh concrete.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315,

Type 1, Class A.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1,
Class A.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.
B. Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as

follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4,000 psi at 28 days.

2. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
3. Air Content: Maintain within range of 5 to 7 percent.
C. Light-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi at 28 days.

2. Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight: 110 lb/cu. ft. plus or minus 3 lb/cu. ft. as determined
by ASTM C 567.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 2 percent at point of delivery for nominal maximum
aggregate size greater than 3/8 inch.
5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/ C
94M, and furnish batch ticket information:
1. When air temperature is between 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60
minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, construct, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.
3.2 VAPOR RETARDER
A. Install, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in
position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.
B. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting
reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Comply with recommendations in ACI 301 for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing
concrete.
B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 301.
C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
D. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.
3.5 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Surface Finish (Floor Slab): Concrete finish shall be roughened as approved by Manufacturer’s
representative.
B. Related Unformed Surfaces (General): At curbs, catch basins, piers, and horizontal offsets, and
similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a
texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces
uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection, and follow recommendations
in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
D. Curing Methods: Concrete shall be either water cured or cured using sodium silicate curing
compounds only. Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a
combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven
days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material
and waterproof tape.
3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity
of coating and repair damage during curing period.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample
materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to
requirements specified in this Article.
B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301.
1. Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each day’s pour of each
concrete mix.
3.8 REPAIRS
A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section.

SECTION 04220 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Concrete masonry units.

2. Mortar and grout.
3. Steel reinforcing bars.
4. Masonry joint reinforcement.
5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28
days.
1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area

compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method)
according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
2. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms
according to ASTM C 1314.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show
elevations of reinforced walls.
C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04220 - 1

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.
B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single
source from single manufacturer for each product required.
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.
D. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements
in the Contract Documents.
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with
dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms,
under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover
securely in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
three days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by
frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained
in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than
7 days after completing cleaning.
E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Regional Materials: Provide CMUs that have been manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of
Project site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed
faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
C. CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 2500psi .
2. Density Classification: Normal weight.
3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.
D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone.
2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent
passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to
produce required mortar color.
F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

G. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with

ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of
composition indicated.
H. Water: Potable.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60
(Grade 420).
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single
pair of side rods.
2.3 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that
comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 641/A 641M,
Class 1 coating.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B-2 coating.
3. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, [Type 304].
4. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 (Z180) zinc
coating.
5. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,
with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
6. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, [Type 304].
7. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
8. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound,

complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash
block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry
unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch (3.77-
mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars
indicated.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817.

b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner.

c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner.
d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.
2.5 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION
A. Loose-Granular Fill Insulation: Perlite complying with ASTM C 549, Type II (surface treated for
water repellency and limited moisture absorption) or Type IV (surface treated for water
repellency and to limit dust generation).
B. Molded-Polystyrene Insulation Units: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion
of polystyrene-resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C 578, Type I.
Provide specially shaped units designed for installing in cores of masonry units.
a. Concrete Block Insulating Systems; Korfil.

b. Shelter Enterprises Inc.; Omni Core.
2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-limemortar.
4. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to
provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S.

2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S
3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S.
D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1.
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual
locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut
units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12
mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6
m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6
mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3
mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in
3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch
(3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm).
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more
than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8
inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch (3 mm).
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less
than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with
less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
mortar before laying fresh masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of
metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.

3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.
C. Set cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and
similar holes.
1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear
water.
2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting.
3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.
D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint) unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION
A. Pour granular insulation into cavities to fill void spaces. Maintain inspection ports to show
presence of insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close the ports after filling has been
confirmed. Limit the fall of insulation to one story high, but not more than 20 feet (6 m).
B. Install molded-polystyrene insulation units into masonry unit cells before laying units.
3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8
inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a
minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and
parapet walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings
and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous
reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns,
offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.
Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-
plane wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:
1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint.
Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of
sealant.
2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint.
Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant.
4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is
complete for application of sealant.
3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as

indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,
tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of
reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during
construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections
and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to
perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements
shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."
1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-
prepared mortar.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades,
sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion
thereof.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for
compressive strength.
F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to
ASTM C 780.
G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test
mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.
H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
I. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 28 days.
3.11 PARGING
A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a
total thickness of 3/4 inch (19 mm). Dampen wall before applying first coat and scarify first coat
to ensure full bond to subsequent coat.
B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface
variation of 1/8 inch per foot (3 mm per 300 mm). Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at
bottom.
C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.
3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking
tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-
contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill
material as fill is placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension.
2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of
masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Noncomposite form deck.
1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fills.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer.
C. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.
D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for
testing indicated.
B. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to
AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of
steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content
is not less than 25 percent.
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
STEEL DECKING 05310 - 1

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation to
maintain insulation free of moisture.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. Steel Deck:
a. ASC Profiles, Inc.

b. Canam Steel Corp.;The Canam Manac Group.
c. Consolidated Systems, Inc.
d. DACS, Inc.
e. D-Mac Industries Inc.
f. Epic Metals Corporation.
g. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.
h. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.
i. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division.
j. Roof Deck, Inc.
k. United Steel Deck, Inc.
l. Valley Joist; Division of EBSCO Industries, Inc.
m. Verco Manufacturing Co.
n. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.
2.2 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK
A. Noncomposite Steel Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form-deck panels
to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in
SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following:
1. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230)
minimum.
2. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33
(230) minimum, with top and underside surface shop primed with manufacturer's
standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230),
G60 (Z180) zinc coating.

4. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS),
Grade 33 (230), G60 (Z180) zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with
manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.
5. Profile Depth: 9/16 inch.

6. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0295 inch.
7. Span Condition: Triple span or more.
8. Side Laps: Overlapped.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
requirements indicated.
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically

driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel

screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter.
D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000
psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck;
of profile indicated or required for application.
F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same
material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication
No. 30 for overhang and slab depth.
G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material,
finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck.
I. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material
and finish as deck, with 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide flanges and level recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch
(38-mm) minimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field.
J. Flat Sump Plate: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and
finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.
K. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
L. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in
SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations.
C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned
and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract
side-lap interlocks.
1. Align cellular deck panels over full length of cell runs and align cells at ends of abutting
panels.
E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting
through or adjacent to deck.
G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of deck, and support of other work.
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical
fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten floor-deck panels to supporting members by the method indicated in the drawing.
B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels
between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches (910
mm), and as follows:
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger, carbon-steel

screws.
2. Mechanically clinch or button punch.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped.
D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting
structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck,
according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and
sides of deck.
F. Install piercing hanger tabs at 14 inches (355 mm) apart in both directions, within 9 inches (228
mm) of walls at ends, and not more than 12 inches (305 mm) from walls at sides, unless
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of

corrected work with specified requirements.
3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of
deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Steel pipe and tube railings.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for anchoring railings.
2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for painting steel railings.
A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified

professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable

design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.

2. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate
tensile strength divided by 1.95.
3. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
(0.093 sq. m).
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 1

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.

2. Railing brackets.
3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: Indicating percentages by weight of
postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content.
Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or
design, including mechanical finishes on stainless steel.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails,
posts, and balusters.
2. Fittings and brackets.
F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
G. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
H. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products

furnished comply with requirements.
I. Welding certificates.
J. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
K. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:
a. Pisor Industries, Inc.

b. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.
c. Other approved manufacturers.
2.2 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 STEEL AND IRON
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel
products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is
not less than 25 percent.
B. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
D. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide the following:
1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or

ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel
fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.
3. Aluminum Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
4. Stainless-Steel Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and
class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of

sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1
(A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594
(ASTM F 836M).
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout

complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
C. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion

cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching,
and grouting compound.
1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations and where indicated provide formulation

that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or
waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas
on exposed surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
I. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with
concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system
of sleeve and socket fittings.
J. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is
manufacturer's standard splicing method.
K. Form changes in direction as follows:
1. As detailed.
L. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain
cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or
otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
M. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
N. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends
of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.
O. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-
resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
P. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
Q. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long
with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post,
with metal plate forming bottom closure.
R. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of
open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of
railings.
2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanized Railings:
1. Hot-dip galvanized exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
2. Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
3. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
4. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.

5. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
6. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and
other ferrous components.
C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of
grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
D. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,

fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or
masonry.
E. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
requirements indicated below:
1. Exterior Railings: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Railings Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."
3. Railings Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance
Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
4. Other Railings: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
F. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied
to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
1. Shop prime uncoated railings with primers specified in Division 9 painting Sections unless
zinc-rich primer is indicated.
2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.
G. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Division 9 Section "Exterior Painting."
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify
that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate
reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other
means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5
mm in 3 m).
C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored
to match finish of railings.
B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.
Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is
performed in the shop or in the field.
C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2
inches (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and
locate joint within 6 inches (150 mm) of post.
3.4 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been
inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic
grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than
OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill
annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed
to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Leave anchorage joint exposed with 1/8-inch (3-mm) buildup, sloped away from post.
D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by
conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1. For aluminum pipe railings, attach posts using fittings designed and engineered for this
purpose.
2. For stainless-steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting surfaces.
3. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
E. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.

3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS
A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to
railing ends.
B. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets
with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.
2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural
loads.
C. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger
or lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between
studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
4. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-treated wood
backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean aluminum and stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and
rinsing with clean water.
B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective
coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of
Substantial Completion.

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Framing with dimension lumber.

2. Framing with timber.
3. Wood blocking and nailers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5
inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.
C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) or greater in least dimension.
D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.

2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content
of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1

A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air
circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that
show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no

arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry
or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry
or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in
crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent.
B. Framing:

1. Southern pine; SPIB.
2.4 TIMBER FRAMING
A. Provide timber framing complying with the following requirements, according to grading rules of
grading agency indicated:
1. Species and Grade: Southern pine, No. 1 grade; SPIB.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 20 percent.
3. Additional Restriction: Free of heart centers.
2.5 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain
primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and
manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no
urea formaldehyde.

the following:
a. Boise Cascade Corporation.

b. Finnforest USA.
c. Georgia-Pacific.
d. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation.
e. Pacific Woodtech Corporation.
f. Roseburg Forest Products Co.
g. Weldwood of Canada Limited; Subsidiary of International Paper Corporation.
h. Weyerhaeuser Company.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide No. 2 Standard grade lumber with 15 percent
maximum moisture content and the following species:
1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative

treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,

Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).
2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
C. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated

on Drawings or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.

2. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
3. Harlen Metal Products, Inc.
4. KC Metals Products, Inc.
5. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
6. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.
7. USP Structural Connectors.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G60 (Z180) coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type [304] [316].
1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
F. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- (50-mm-) long seat and 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm)
wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction,"
C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips
not more than 16 inches (406 mm) on center.
G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
H. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
I. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
3. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof
Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's Uniform Building Code.
4. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in BOCA's BOCA National Building Code.
5. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule," in SBCCI's Standard Building Code.

6. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family
Dwellings.
7. Table 602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code.
J. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not
countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.
K. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with
fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install

continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
D. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not

less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact
thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.3 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal
(38-mm actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used
for non-load-bearing partitions and for load-bearing partitions where framing members bearing
on partition are located directly over studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction, unless
B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs may be
used for interior non-load-bearing partitions.
C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness
equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs.
1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4-
inch nominal (89-mm actual) depth for openings 48 inches (1200 mm) and less in width,
6-inch nominal (140-mm actual) depth for openings 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) in
width, 8-inch nominal (184-mm actual) depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (1800 to 3000
mm) in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal (235-mm actual) depth for openings 10
to 12 feet (3 to 3.6 m) in width.
2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 60 inches (1500 mm) and
less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth

indicated or, if not indicated, according to Table R502.5(1) or Table R502.5(2), as

applicable, in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet,
apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-
registered label.

SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Interior wood trim.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.

2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
5. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece.
2.2 INTERIOR WOOD TRIM
A. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber (S4S), either finger-jointed or solid
lumber, of one of the following species and grades:
1. Grade Finish or 2 Common eastern white pine; NELMA or NLGA.
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 1

2. Grade 1 Common (Colonial) Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; NLGA or
WWPA.
B. Moldings: Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7. Wood moldings made from kiln-dried
stock and graded according to WMMPA WM 4.
1. Moldings for Opaque Finish (Painted): P-grade eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole,
ponderosa, or sugar pine.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
C. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring,
nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
construction.
C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber
and plywood.
D. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized
standards.
E. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.
F. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid
splitting wood.
3.2 WOOD TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths
of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long except where necessary.
Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at
corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use
scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
1. Match color and grain pattern across joints.

2. Install trim after gypsum board joint-finishing operations are completed.

3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent
movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads and fill holes.
4. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish
carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum
offset for reveal installation.

SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Concealed building insulation.

2. Exposed building insulation.
3. Vapor retarders.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for insulation products.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Johns Manville Corporation.
c. Knauf Fiber Glass.
d. Owens Corning.
2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards.
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's

standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
B. Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective
membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less);
Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-
polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on one face; consisting of fibers manufactured from
glass.
1. Flanged Units: Provide blankets fabricated with facing incorporating 5 inch wide flanges
along edges for attachment to framing members.
C. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder

manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers.

b. Eckel Industries of Canada Limited; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners.
c. Gemco; Spindle Type.
2. Insulation-Retaining Washers:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150.

b. AGM Industries, Inc.; SC150.
c. Gemco; Dome-Cap.
d. Gemco; R-150.
e. Gemco; S-150.

3. Anchor Adhesives:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive.

b. Eckel Industries of Canada Limited; Stic-Klip Type S Adhesive.
c. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.
C. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of

holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer
in place; and complying with the following requirements:
1. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
2. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.105 inch in diameter, length
to suit depth of insulation indicated.
D. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to
substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing

projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application
indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any
time to ice and snow.
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls,

coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation
encapsulates piping.
E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are
otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or
sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in
completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
D. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more
than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit
between ends.
2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches support unfaced
blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of
metal studs.
E. For wood-framed construction, install mineral-fiber blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as
follows:
1. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling flanges to
sides of framing members.
2. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent
blanket to produce airtight installation after concealing finish material is in place.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse,
and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to
abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.

SECTION 07610 - SHEET METAL ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following custom-fabricated sheet metal roofing:

1. Standing-seam metal roofing.

1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for secondary support framing
supporting new plywood roof sheathing.
2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry and Miscellaneous Carpentry" for new plywood roof
sheathing and wood framing.
3. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for roof insulation.
4. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for fasciae, copings, flashings and
other sheet metal work not part of sheet metal roofing.
5. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sheet metal roofing sealants.
A. General: Provide complete sheet metal roofing system, including, but not limited to, custom-
fabricated metal roof pans, cleats, clips, anchors and fasteners, sheet metal flashing and
drainage components related to sheet metal roofing, fascia panels, trim, underlayment, and
accessories as indicated and as required for a weathertight installation.
A. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide custom-fabricated sheet metal roofing capable of resisting the
following design negative uplift pressure. Provide clips, fasteners, and clip spacing of type
indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 3 times the design
negative uplift pressure.
1. Design Negative Uplift Pressure: 40 psf.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal roofing that allows for thermal movements resulting
from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing
buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation
and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal roofing thermal movements. Base
engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 1

C. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal roofing that does not allow water infiltration to building
interior, with metal flashing and connections of sheet metal roofing lapped to allow moisture to
run over and off the material.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal roofing, including
plans, elevations, and keyed references to termination points. Distinguish between shop- and
field-assembled work. Include the following:
1. Details for forming sheet metal roofing, including seams and dimensions.
2. Details for joining and securing sheet metal roofing, including layout of fasteners, clips,
and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
4. Details of expansion joints, including showing direction of expansion and contraction.
5. Details of roof penetrations.
6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and
counterflashings.
7. Details of special conditions.
8. Details of connections to adjoining work.
9. Details of the following accessory items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12
inches (1:10):
a. Flashing and trim.

b. Roof curbs.
c. Snow Guards.
C. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and roof-
mounted items. Show the following:
1. Sheet metal roofing and attachments.

2. Purlins and rafters.
3. Roof-mounted items including roof supports, pipe supports and penetrations, lightning
protection and snow guards.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal roofing indicated with factory-applied
color finishes.
1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below:
1. Sheet Metal Roofing: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual pan width, including finished
seam. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.
2. Trim and Closures: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include fasteners and other exposed
accessories.
3. Accessories: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples for each type of accessory.
4. Snow Guards: Full-size Sample.

F. Roll-Forming Equipment Certificate: Issued by UL for manufacturer's portable roll-forming

equipment designed for producing sheet metal roofing. Show expiration date no earlier than
two months after scheduled end of sheet metal roofing.
G. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for sheet metal roofing portable roll-forming equipment. Include reports for
structural performance.
I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of sheet metal roofing.
B. Custom-Fabricated Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled
workers who custom-fabricate sheet metal roofing similar to that required for this Project and
whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Roll-Formed Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: An authorized representative of

roll-formed sheet metal roofing manufacturer for fabrication and installation of units required for
this Project.
D. Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
E. Copper Roofing Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to
dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical roof eave , including fascia, and soffit as shown on Drawings;
approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) square by full thickness, including
attachments, underlayment, and accessories.
2. Approval of mockups is for other material and construction qualities specifically approved
by Architect in writing.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by
Architect in writing.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
G. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof purlin and rafter construction, conduct
conference at Project site. Comply with requirements for preinstallation conferences in
related to roof purlin and rafter construction and sheet metal roofing including, but not limited to,
the following:
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's Representative, sheet metal roofing Installer,
manufacturer's representative for sheet metal roofing portable roll-forming equipment,
purlin and rafter Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal
roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof penetrations specifics.

2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal roofing installation, including
portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Examine existing roof sheathing and rafter conditions for receiving new overbuilding
roofing system.
4. Review structural loading limitations of existing rafters during overbuilding of new roofing
system.
5. Review flashings, special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, and condition of
other construction that will affect sheet metal roofing.
6. Review roof observation and repair procedures after sheet metal roofing installation.
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in

related to sheet metal roofing including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's Representative, sheet metal roofing Installer,
manufacturer's representative for sheet metal roofing portable roll-forming equipment,
roof sheathing Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal
roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal roofing installation, including
portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Examine new roof sheathing, and rafter conditions for installation of new sheet metal
roofing.
4. Review structural loading limitations of new roof sheathing and rafters during and after
roofing.
5. Review temporary protection requirements for sheet metal roofing during and after
installation.
6. Review roof observation and repair procedures after sheet metal roofing installation.
7. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish
copy of record to each participant.
A. Deliver sheet metal roofing pans, components, and other sheet metal roofing materials so as
not to be damaged or deformed. Package sheet metal roofing materials for protection during
transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect sheet metal roofing materials in a manner to prevent bending, warping,
twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated
covering. Store metal coils to ensure dryness. Do not store metal coils in contact with other
materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
1. Store aluminum and copper away from uncured concrete and masonry.
D. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal roofing from exposure to sunlight and high
humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal roofing installation.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sheet metal roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of
parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive
installation.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair finish or replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-
applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Installer's Warranty: Roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this
Section, signed by Roofing Installer, in which Roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace
components of custom-fabricated sheet metal roofing that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures.
b. Loose parts.
c. Wrinkling or buckling.
d. Failure to remain weathertight, including uncontrolled water leakage.
e. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering, including nonuniformity of color or finish.
f. Galvanic action between sheet metal roofing and dissimilar materials.
2. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.
the manufacturers specified.
A. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 625/A 625M; single-reduced, black-steel sheet,
coated on both sides with a zinc-tin alloy (50 percent zinc, 50 percent tin), with factory-applied
shop coat.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Follansbee Steel; Terne II.

b. Or approved equal.

2. Thickness: 0.014-inch (0.36-mm)] uncoated thickness, with 0.787-mil (0.020-mm)

coating thickness applied to each side.
3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat fluoropolymer complying

with performance requirements in AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating
to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) Follansbee Steel; KlassicKolors.

2) Or approved equal>.
b. Color: “Stainless” from KlassicKolors by Follansbee Steel or approved equal.
1) Coating Test: Confirm coating weight and composition by the triple-spot test
according to ASTM A 309.
2) In lieu of spot tests to determine coating weight, manufacturer may submit
nondestructive radiographic test results and certification showing that zinc-
tin alloy-coating weight of sheets furnished for Project complies with
requirements.
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts.
1. Available Products:
a. ALCO-NVC Inc.; ALCO Shield.

b. Atlas Roofing Corporation; StormMaster DG.
c. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.; Dri-Start "G."
d. CertainTeed Corporation; WinterGuard.
e. GAF Materials Corporation; Weather Watch.
f. Henry Company; Eaveguard.
g. Johns Manville International, Inc.; Roof Defender.
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 40 mils (1.0 mm) thick, consisting of slip-
resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt
adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C).
2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29
deg C).
B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, minimum 5 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.24 kg/sq. m), rosin sized.
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system
and as recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing.

B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners
designed to withstand design loads.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofing by factory-applied

coating.
2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer
head.
3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
C. Solder for Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Steel and Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, 100 percent tin.
D. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
E. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, of base polymer, type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to produce joints in sheet metal roofing that will remain weathertight and
as recommended by roll-formed sheet metal roofing manufacturer for installation indicated.
F. Expansion-Joint Sealant: For hooked-type expansion joints, which must be free to move,
provide nonsetting, nonhardening, nonmigrating, heavy-bodied polyisobutylene sealant.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Metal Roofing Accessories: Provide components required for a complete sheet metal
roofing assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings,
sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of sheet
metal roofing, unless otherwise indicated.
1. All ridge and hip joints shall be crimped.

2. Clips: Minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, stainless-steel panel clips designed to
withstand negative-load requirements.
3. Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from the following material:
a. Metallic-Coated Steel Roofing: 0.0250-inch- (0.65-mm-) thick, stainless-steel
sheet or manufacturer’s product.
4. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from
material recommended by manufacturer.
5. Closures: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or
closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure
strips; cut or premolded to match sheet metal roofing profile. Provide closure strips
where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179-inch- (0.45-mm-) thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel
sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing
and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations
include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae,
and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent sheet metal roofing.
C. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m), with matching
corner units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch (25
mm) above front edge. Furnish flat-stock gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion joints, and
expansion-joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters.
1. Fabricate from the following exposed metal:

a. Formed from Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M,

Type 304, dead-soft, fully annealed stainless-steel sheet, coated on both sides
with a zinc-tin alloy (50 percent zinc, 50 percent tin).
b. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "TCS II" by Follansbee
Steel.
c. Thickness and Weight: 0.018-inch- (0.5-mm-) thick sheet weighing approximately
0.77 lb/sq. ft. (3.76 kg/sq. m) including coating, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Gutter Profile: Half-round single bead according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual."
3. Corners: Factory mitered and soldered.
4. Gutter Supports: Straps with finish matching the gutters.
5. Gutter Accessories: Wire ball downspout strainer.
6. Gutters to be painted in field to match metal roof and downspout color.
D. Downspouts: Plain round complete with machine-crimped elbows, manufactured from the
following exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and
anchors.
1. Fabricate from the following exposed metal:

a. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 625/A 625M; single-reduced, black-
steel sheet, coated on both sides with a zinc-tin alloy (50 percent zinc, 50 percent
tin), with factory-applied shop coat.
b. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Terne II” by
Follansbee Steel or approved equal.
c. Thickness: 0.014-inch (0.36-mm)] uncoated thickness, with 0.787-mil (0.020-mm)
coating thickness applied to each side.
2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat fluoropolymer complying

with performance requirements in AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating
to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) Follansbee Steel; KlassicKolors.

2) Or approved equal>.
b. Color: “Stainless” from KlassicKolors by Follansbee Steel or approved equal.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown and
recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design,
dimensions (pan width and seam height), geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics
of installation indicated. Fabricate sheet metal roofing and accessories at the shop to greatest
extent possible.
1. Standing-Seam Roofing: Form standing-seam pans with finished seam height of 1 inch
(25 mm).

B. Fabricate sheet metal roofing to allow for expansion in running work sufficient to prevent
leakage, damage, and deterioration of the Work. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit
substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels
indicated, and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
1. Lay out sheet metal roofing so cross seams, when required, are made in direction of flow
with higher pans overlapping lower pans. Stagger cross seams.
2. Fold and cleat eaves and transverse seams in the shop.
3. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments,
integral flashings, and other components of metal roofing to profiles, patterns, and
drainage arrangements shown and as required for leakproof construction.
C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are indicated or required to produce
weathertight seams, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in
compliance with SMACNA standards.
D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic
action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt
underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturers of dissimilar metals or by fabricator.
E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply with recommendations
in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop
fabrication.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-
lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for

application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, sheet metal roofing supports, and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or
blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely
anchored, and that provision has been made for flashings, and penetrations through
sheet metal roofing.
B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating sheet metal roofing to verify
actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of sheet metal roofing before sheet
metal roofing installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Division 7
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment and building-paper slip sheet on roof sheathing
under sheet metal roofing. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage, where possible, to minimize
use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal roofing. Apply at locations indicated below, in
shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).
1. Apply from eave to ridge.

2. Apply on roof not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap edges of self-
adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches (75 mm), in shingle fashion to shed
water.
B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on

roof sheathing under sheet metal roofing. Apply primer if required by underlayment
manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for
installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply
at locations indicated below, in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6
inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less
than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
1. Roof perimeter for a distance up from eaves of 24 inches (600 mm) beyond interior wall
line.
2. Valleys, from lowest point to highest point, for a distance on each side of 18 inches (460
mm). Overlap ends of sheets not less than 6 inches (150 mm).
3. Rake edges for a distance of 18 inches (460 mm).
4. Hips and ridges for a distance on each side of 12 inches (300 mm).
5. Roof to wall intersections for a distance from wall of 18 inches (460 mm).

6. Around dormers, chimneys, skylights, and other penetrating elements for a distance from
element of 18 inches (460 mm).
C. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 7

Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
D. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing sheet metal roofing.
A. General: Install sheet metal roofing perpendicular to purlins or supports. Anchor sheet metal
roofing and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and
structural movement. Install fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators,
sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system and as
recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing.
1. Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch is not permitted.

2. Rigidly fasten eave end of sheet metal roofing and allow ridge end free movement due to
thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill roofing.
3. Field fabricate double locked crimped joints at all ridge and hip locations.
4. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at
perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
5. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
6. Locate roofing splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger roofing
splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
7. Lap metal flashing over sheet metal roofing to allow moisture to run over and off the
material.
B. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will not penetrate completely through substrate.
1. Steel Roofing: Use stainless-steel fasteners.

2. Stainless-Steel Roofing: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying
rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as
recommended by fabricator of sheet metal roofing or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum, stainless-steel and lead sheet metal roofing with
bituminous coating where roofing will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious
construction.
D. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to
minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight
installation.
E. Fascia: Align bottom of sheet metal roofing and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping
screws. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits,
along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings.

3.5 CUSTOM-FABRICATED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form
exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks, considering
temper and reflectivity of metal. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder,
welds, and sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side of exposed edges,
1. Install cleats to hold sheet metal panels in position. Attach each cleat with two fasteners
to prevent rotation.
2. Nail cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) on center. Bend tabs over nails.
B. Seal joints as shown and as required for leakproof construction. Provide low-slope transverse
seams using cleats where backup of moisture may occur.
1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less
than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When
ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and
21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting
proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type
joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
C. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges
of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except where pretinned surface
would show in finished Work.
1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel and aluminum sheet.

2. Pretinning is not required for lead-coated copper zinc-tin alloy-coated stainless steel and
lead.
3. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into
joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
D. Provide expansion cleats in roof panels that exceed 30 feet (9.1 m) in length.
E. Standing-Seam Roofing: Attach standing-seam metal pans to substrate with cleats, double-
nailed at 12 inches (305 mm) on center. Install pans reaching from eave to ridge before moving
to adjacent pans. Lock each pan to pan below with transverse seam. Before pans are locked,
apply continuous bead of sealant to top flange of lower pan. Crimp standing seams by folding
over twice so cleat and pan edges are completely engaged.
1. Loose-lock pans at eave edges to continuous cleats and flanges on back edges of
gutters.
2. Leave seams upright after crimping at ridges and hips.
3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim,
copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips,
and similar items.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to
form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in
waterproof and weather-resistant performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24
inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion
provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof,
form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep,
filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
3.7 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with
installation of roof-edge drainage system.
B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly
anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 18 inch apart. Attach ends with rivets and
solder to make watertight. Slope to downspouts.
1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet
(15.2 m) apart. Install expansion joint caps.
2. Install continuous leaf guards on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, for cleaning gutters.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers
with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch (25 mm) away from
walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) on center.
1. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
D. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and sheet metal roofing. Fasten and seal
to sheet metal roofing as recommended by manufacturer.
3.8 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal roofing within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch
in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch (3-mm)
offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as sheet metal roofing is
installed. On completion of sheet metal roofing installation, clean finished surfaces, including
removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a
clean condition during construction.
D. Replace panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
3.10 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY
A. WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has
performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project:
1. Owner:
2. Address:
3. Building Name/Type:
4. Address:
5. Area of Work:
6. Acceptance Date:
7. Warranty Period:
8. Expiration Date:
B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a
subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and
workmanship for designated Warranty Period,
C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein
set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be
made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and
defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.
D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:
1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the
building, and to building contents, caused by:
a. lightning;
b. peak gust wind speed exceeding 90 mph;
c. fire;
d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive
deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;
e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment
supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work;
f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and
g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance
personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by
Owner.
2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and
void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense
thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.
3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not
liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or
faults or defects of work.

4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing
Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations,
attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become
null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work
covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations,
Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said
work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said
alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a
limitation or termination of this Warranty.
5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but
was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded
basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall
become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects
work covered by this Warranty.
6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks,
defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to
inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.
7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and
shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully
available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not
operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work
according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract
was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.
E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this day of …… .
1. Authorized Signature:
2. Name:
3. Title:

SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim:
1. Manufactured through-wall flashing.

2. Formed wall flashing and trim.
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sheet metal flashing and trim
sealants.
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and
fastener disengagement.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist
rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base
engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
C. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to
building interior.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and elevations.
Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:
1. Identify material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1

2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and
dimensions.
3. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim,
including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work.
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.
A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal
flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent
bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated
covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials
that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining
construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for forming
and structural performance required, but not less than H14, finished as follows:
1. High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with

inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion
coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.

a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured

system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color
topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight;
complying with AAMA 2604.
1) Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range.
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal
flashing and trim installation.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or
factory-applied coating.
2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with
hex washer head.
3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
4. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal
gutter width.
C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain
watertight.
D. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,

recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field
measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal
flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes,
and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Furnish flat-
stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size
recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion
joints, expansion-joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same
metal as gutters.
1. Gutter Style: ogee.

2. Expansion Joints: Lap type.
3. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches: Fabricate from the following material:
a. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick.
B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with
metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.
1. Manufactured Hanger Style: strap or bracket.

2. Fabricate downspouts from the following material:
a. Aluminum: 0.024 inch thick.
2.6 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to
extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- high end dams.
Fabricate from the following material:
1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick.
2.7 FINISHES
B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding
rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
1. Coat side of uncoated aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating
where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a
course of polyethylene underlayment.
C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks.
D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat
seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant.
E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend
tabs over fasteners.
F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or
intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not
be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1
inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.
G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for
nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
1. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners.
H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction.
1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less
than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient

temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint

members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at
temperatures below 40 deg F.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
I. Aluminum Flashing: Rivet or weld joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.
3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof
perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with
elastomeric sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly
anchored gutter brackets or straps spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Provide end closures
and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.
1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter.

2. Loosely lock straps to front gutter bead and anchor to roof deck.
3. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous cleat.
4. Anchor back of gutter that extends onto roof deck with cleats spaced not more than 24
inches apart.
5. Anchor gutter with spikes and ferrules spaced not more than 24 inches apart.
6. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations not exceeding 50 feet apart. Install
expansion joint caps.
7. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable for
cleaning gutters.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to
hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at
approximately 60 inches on center in between.
1. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building.
D. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch below
gutter discharge.
E. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration

indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow.
3.4 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall
flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
B. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar
flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused
fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition
during construction.
D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces as indicated

below:
a. Perimeter joints between dissimilar materials and any penetration through

exterior walls, curbs, or footings.
b. Joints between different materials.
c. Other joints as indicated.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sealing joints related to
flashing and sheet metal for roofing.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to
maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of
joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to
establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no
staining or deterioration of joint substrates.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required.
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples,
consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product
exposed to view.
D. Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealant required. Install
joint sealant samples in 1/2-inch wide joints formed between two 6-inch long strips of
material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1

E. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with
specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
F. Qualification data complying with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" article.

Include list of completed projects with project names addresses, names of Architects and
Owners, plus other information specified.
G. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating
that materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation
of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and
substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.
H. Product test reports for each type of joint sealants indicated, evidencing compliance with
requirements specified.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant
applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from
a single manufacturer for each different product required.
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot
life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent

their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or
other causes.
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits
permitted by joint sealant manufacturer.
2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits
permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
3. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths
are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until
contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint filers, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following:
1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard

colors for products of type indicated.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing

elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated on
each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet at end of this Section, including those
requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, elastomeric sealants that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each
Elastomeric Sealant Data Sheet.
2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable

latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on
interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage
change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or
cohesively.
B. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 that accommodates
joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of
10 percent.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, latex joint sealants that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant:
a. "AC-20," Pecora Corp.

b. "Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.
c. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834," Tremco, Inc.
2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint filers; and are approved for
applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory
testing.

B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing,

nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape,
and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant
performance:
1. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas,

nonoutgassing in unruptured state.
C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with
ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at
temperatures down to -26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size
and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to
optimum sealant performance.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide
self-adhesive tape where applicable.
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion
of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant-
substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of

sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of
staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and
formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion
of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings
tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant
manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water,

surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint
substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of
developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining
from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free
compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other
nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint
sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations.
Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto
adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable
to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following
requirements:
1. Install joint filers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application
and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of
installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement
capability.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint filers.

b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint filers.
c. Remove absorbent joint filers that have become wet prior to sealant
application and replace with dry material.
2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used
between sealants and joint filers or back of joints.
D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly
contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each
joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time
sealant backings are installed.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to
eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless

a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
2. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess

depth and at locations indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that
they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such
protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated
joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable
from original work.
PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT
A. Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: ES-1.
B. Base Polymer: Urethane.
C. Type: single component.
D. Grade: NS (nonsag).
E. Class: 25.
F. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
G. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
1. Use O Joint Substrates: Aluminum coated with a high-performance coating.
H. Available Products: Dymonic as manufactured by Tremco, U-7130 by Protective

Treatments, Inc. or approved equal.

SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Solid core doors with paint grade faces.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of door, including details of core and edge construction, trim for
openings and louvers, and factory-finishing specifications.
C. Shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door,
details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements
for veneer matching and factory finishing and other pertinent data.
1. For factory-machined doors, indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts for

locksets and other cutouts adjacent to light and louver openings.
A. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard:
1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the

Architectural Woodwork Institute for grade of door, core, construction, finish, and
other requirements.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain doors from one source and by a single manufacturer.
A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and
deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's
instructions.
1. Comply with WIC Technical Bulletin 420-R for delivery, storage, and handling of
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1

doors.
B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers as designated on shop drawings, using
temporary, removable, or concealed markings.
A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete,
and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Door manufacturer's warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive
the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by
the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard

form signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace
defective doors that have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch
section or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch
in a 3-inch span, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards.
1. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after date of
a. Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

doors that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Solid Core Doors:
a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.

b. Ampco Products, Inc.
c. Buell Door Co.
d. Chappell Door Co.
e. Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc.
f. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division.
g. Fenestra Corporation.
h. Graham Manufacturing Corp.
i. Haley Brothers, Inc.
j. Ideal Wood Products, Inc.

k. IPIK Door Co., Inc.

l. Marlite.
m. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
n. Poncraft Door Co.
o. Ragland Manufacturing Co., Inc.
p. V-T Industries Inc.
q. Weyerhauser Co.
2.2 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS
A. Solid Core Doors for Stain and Opaque Finish: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Faces: White birch, rotary sliced.

2. Grade: Premium.
3. Construction: 7 plies.
4. Core: Glued-block core.
5. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before
veneering.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate flush wood doors to comply with following requirements:
1. In sizes indicated for job-site fitting.
2.4 SHOP PRIMING
A. Transparent Finish: Shop-seal faces and edges of doors for transparent

finish with stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of
finish as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime exposed portions of doors for paint
finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section
"Painting."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door:
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and
swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.
2. Reject doors with defects.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions

and referenced quality standard and as indicated.
C. Job-Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with

uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of
limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware.
Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1. Fitting Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Provide 1/8 inch at jambs and heads,
1/16 inch per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 1/8 inch from bottom of
door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or
scheduled, provide 1/4-inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.
3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to
extent permitted by labeling agency.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements:
1. Division 9 Section "Painting."
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes overhead coiling metal doors.
B. Types of overhead coiling doors include the following:
1. Coiling Counter Doors
C. Operation of overhead coiling doors include the following:
1. Manual operation.
D. Provide complete operating door assemblies including door curtains, guides, counterbalance
mechanism, hardware, operators, and installation accessories.
E. Field painting is specified in Division 9.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data, roughing-in diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and size of overhead
coiling door.
1. Provide operating instructions and maintenance information.
C. Shop drawings for special components and installations that are not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's data sheets.
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Furnish each overhead coiling door as a complete unit produced by
one manufacturer, including hardware, accessories, mounting and installation components.
1. Furnish overhead coiling door units by one manufacturer for entire Project.
B. Insert and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built
into masonry to install units. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions to
install anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 1

C. Wind Loading: Design and reinforce overhead coiling doors to withstand a 20-psf (950 Pa) (85-mph
(135 km/hr)) wind-loading pressure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products

that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Apton Rolling Doors, A Gichner Systems Group, Inc.

2. Atlas Roll-Lite Overhead Doors/Div. of MASCO.
3. Ceco/Windsor Door--Div. of the Ceco Corp.
4. The Cookson Co.
5. Cornell Iron Works Inc.
6. Dynamic Closures Corp.
7. Mahon Door Corp.
8. Overhead Door Corp.
9. Pacific Rolling Door Co.
10. Raynor Garage Door.
11. Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co.
12. Wayne-Dalton Corp.
13. J. G. Wilson Corp.
2.2 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to withstand
required wind loading, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide slats of material gage recommended by door manufacturer for size and type of
door required, and as follows:
1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Structural quality, cold-rolled galvanized steel sheets complying with
ASTM A 446, Grade A, with G90 (ASTM A 446M, Grade A, with Z275) zinc coating, complying with
ASTM A 525 (ASTM A 525M).
a. Furnish manufacturer's standard "flat-face" slats.
B. Endlocks: Malleable iron castings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with
galvanized rivets. Provide locks on alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance
against lateral movement.
C. Windlocks: Malleable iron castings secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets. Unless otherwise
recommended by door manufacturer, provide windlocks on doors exceeding 16 feet (4.8 m) wide.
Space windlocks approximately 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. on both edges of curtain.
D. Bottom Bar: Consisting of two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 1/8 inch (38 x 38 x 3 mm)
thick, either galvanized steel.
1. Provide a replaceable gasket of flexible vinyl or neoprene between angles as a weather seal and
cushion bumper for manually operated doors, unless shown as an overlapping joint.

E. Curtain Jamb Guides: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles, or channels and angles with
sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain loading. Build up units with minimum 3/16-inch (5-mm)
thick steel sections, galvanized after fabrication. Slot bolt holes for track adjustment.
F. Secure continuous wall angle to wall framing with a minimum of 3/8-inch (10-mm) bolts at not more
than 30 inches (750 mm) o.c., unless closer spacing recommended by door manufacturer. Extend
wall angles above door opening head to support coil brackets, unless otherwise indicated. Place
anchor bolts on exterior wall guides so they are concealed when door is in closed position. Provide
removable stops on guides to prevent over-travel of curtain and a continuous bar for holding
windlocks.
G. Weather Seals: Provide vinyl or neoprene weatherstripping for exterior exposed doors, except
where otherwise indicated. At door heads, use 1/8-inch (3-mm) thick continuous sheet secured to
inside of curtain coil hood. At door jambs, use 1/8-inch (3-mm) thick continuous strip secured to
exterior side of jamb guide.
2.3 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable steel helical torsion spring, mounted around
a steel shaft and in a spring barrel, and connected to door curtain with required barrel rings. Use
grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.
B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed structural-quality carbon steel, welded
or seamless pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support roll-up of curtain without
distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 inch per foot (2.5 mm per meter)
of span under full load.
C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size
springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel.
Provide cast steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft.
D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel in size required to hold fixed spring
ends and carry torsional load.
E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or cold-
rolled steel plate with bell mouth guide groove for curtain.
F. Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head and act as
weather seal. Contour to suit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and
bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and any portion of
between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as
required to prevent sag.
1. Fabricate steel hoods for doors of not less than 0.0276-inch (0.7-mm) thick hot-dip galvanized steel
sheet with G 90 (Z275) zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 525 (ASTM A 525M).
2.4 PRIME PAINTING
A. General: Shop-clean and -prime ferrous metal surfaces, exposed and unexposed, except tightly
joined and lubricated surfaces and galvanized metal, with door manufacturer's standard rust-
inhibitive primer. Use primer that is compatible with finish painting.

B. General: Shop-clean and -prime ferrous metal and galvanized surfaces, exposed and unexposed,
except tightly joined and lubricated surfaces, with door manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer.
Use primer that is compatible with finish painting.
2.5 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS
A. Manual Push-Up Operation: Design counterbalance mechanism so that required lift or pull for door
operation does not exceed 25 lb (110 N).
1. Provide galvanized steel lifting handle and slide bolt lock on inside bottom bar.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head
mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to final shop drawings,
manufacturer's instructions, and as specified.
B. After completing installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test, and adjust doors to
operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion.
C. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to door operation,
servicing, and preventive maintenance.

SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required
for swing doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as
the doors and door frames on which they are installed.
1. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for silencers integral with
hollow metal frames.
C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include:
1. Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by Owner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Specification sections.
B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door
hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other
information necessary to show compliance with requirements.
C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper
size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
D. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the
installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate
provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated
requirements.
A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges,
closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer.
B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with

warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1

performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that
indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant
(AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the
course of the Work, for consultation.
1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain
final instructions in writing.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or
Project site).
1.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Butts and Hinges:
a. Bommer Industries, Inc.

b. Cal-Royal Products, Inc.
c. Hager Hinge Co.
d. Lawrence Brothers, Inc.
e. McKinney Products Co.
f. H. Soss & Company.
g. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works.
2. Cylinders and Locks:
a. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp.
3. Overhead Closers:
a. Arrow Lock Manufacturing Co.

b. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp.
c. Dorma Door Controls International.
d. International Door Closers, Inc.
e. LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
f. Monarch Hardware & Mfg. Co., Div Newman Tonks, Inc.

g. Norton Door Controls, Div. Yale Security Inc.

h. Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc.
i. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
j. Yale Security Inc.
4. Door Stripping and Seals:
a. Hager Hinge Co.

b. National Guard Products, Inc.
c. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
e. Sealeze Corp.
f. Ultra Industries.
g. Zero International, Inc.
2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE
A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each
type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section.
Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following:
1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one

manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of
establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or,
where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in
Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other
manufacturers that complies with requirements.
2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's
name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in
conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect.
1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using
manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of
lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for
finish designations indicated.
C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally

prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared
for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.
D. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws
except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to
match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other
work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.

E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed
except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed
fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is
exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately
to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the
work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.
2.4 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS
A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood
doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.
B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements:
1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes.
C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
1. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins.

2. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where
hospital tip (HT) indicated.
D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door
leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of
additional height.
2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Existing System: Grandmasterkey the locks to the Owner's existing system, with a new
masterkey for the Project.
B. Equip locks with manufacturer's standard 6-pin tumbler cylinders.
C. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
D. Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated,
provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a
group of related locks.
1. Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder
manufacturer's key symbol, and notation, "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
E. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
F. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system,
and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system.
1. Deliver keys to Owner.

2.6 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.7 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's
recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to
weather, and anticipated frequency of use.
B. Provide grey resilient parts for exposed bumpers.
2.8 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS
A. General: Provide continuous smoke, seals on interior doors where indicated or

scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners.
B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is
easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
C. Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper-type resilient insert and metal
retainer strips, surface applied unless shown as mortised or semimortised, and of following
metal, finish, and resilient bumper material:
1. Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish, 0.062-inch minimum thickness of

main walls and flanges.
2. Solid neoprene conforming to MIL R 6855, Class II, Grade 40.
a. Flexible, hollow bulb or loop insert.
D. Weatherstripping at Door Bottoms: Provide threshold consisting of contact-type resilient

insert and metal housing of design and size shown and of following metal, finish, and
resilient seal strip:
1. Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish, 0.062-inch minimum thickness of

main walls and flanges.
2. Solid neoprene wiper or sweep seal complying with MIL R 6855, Class II, Grade 40.
2.9 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock
sets (or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets).
B. Provide finishes that match building standards.
C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,

hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less
than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze, and
aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish
designations to indicate "no lacquer."
E. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the
industry-recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as

specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as
otherwise directed by Architect.
1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute.
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into
surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage,
and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the
Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been
completed on the substrates involved.
C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
E. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.
3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper
operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely
and smoothly or as intended for the application made.
1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or
occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to
acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware
items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper
function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to
compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.

SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Interior gypsum wallboard.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions
of terms related to gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other
referenced standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly components

certifying that their products comply with specified requirements.
A. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and
other panel products from a single manufacturer.
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either
the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a
manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 1

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other
causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or
otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.
A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for

applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain

not less than 40 deg F. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain
not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. Do
not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources.
C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials.
Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a. Domtar Gypsum.
b. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
c. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
d. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to

minimize end-to-end butt joints.
1. Thickness: Provide gypsum board in thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise

indicated, in either 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch thicknesses to comply with ASTM C 840 for
application system and support spacing indicated.
2. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches.
3. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 1200 mm.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows:

1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces.
3. Edges: Tapered.
4. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Abuse-Resistant Type: Manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface

indentation, through-penetration (impact resistance), and abrasion than standard, regular-
type and Type X gypsum board.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints complying
with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:
1. Material: Formed metal, plastic, or metal combined with paper, with metal
complying with the following requirement:
a. Sheet steel coated with zinc by hot-dip or electrolytic processes, or with

aluminum or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047:
a. Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

b. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive
joint compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the
recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment
materials for each application indicated.
B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use pressure-sensitive or staple-attached open-weave glass-fiber reinforcing tape

with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum
board and joint treatment materials for application indicated.
C. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products

complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.
1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product.

2. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners
and face flanges of trim accessories.
3. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats.
4. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.
2.5 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following
requirements:
1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter

joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies per ASTM E 90.
2. Product has flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of less than 25 per

ASTM E 84.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening,

nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing
interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant:
a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant, Pecora Corp.

b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant, United States Gypsum Co.
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. BA-98, Pecora Corp.

b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant, Tremco, Inc.
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with
referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating

gypsum panels.
C. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot grouting
hollow metal door frames.
D. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum
panels to steel framing.
E. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications:
1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.03 inch thick.
2. Fastening gypsum board to wood members.
3. Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board.
F. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to wood
members.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow
metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing with Installer present for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to
comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and
avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of
adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install wall/partition board panels to minimize the number of abutting end joints or avoid
them entirely. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate
courses of board.
D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp
panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16
inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
E. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints.
Position adjoining panels so that tapered edges abut tapered edges, and field-cut edges
abut field-cut edges and ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints at
corners of framed openings where possible.
F. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
G. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and
doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately
insert gypsum panels into frames.
I. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments,

except floors, as detailed. Provide 1/4-to-1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim
edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints
between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
J. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and
finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS

A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the

greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing).

Use maximum-length panels to minimize end joints.
B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows:
1. Fasten with screws.
C. For curved partitions install gypsum panels as follows:
1. Select gypsum panel lengths and cut them as required to produce one unbroken
panel covering each curved surface plus 12-inch- long straight sections at ends of
curves and tangent to them.
2. Wet gypsum panels on surfaces that will become compressed when panels are
installed over a curve and where the radius of the curve prevents using dry panels.
Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations relative to curve
radiuses, wetting methods, stacking panels after wetting, and other preparations
that precede installing wetted gypsum panels.
3. Apply gypsum panels horizontally with wrapped edges perpendicular to studs. On
convex sides of partitions, begin installation at one end of curved surface and fasten
gypsum panels to studs as they are wrapped around the curve. On concave side,
start fastening panels to stud at center of curve and work outwards to panel ends.
Fasten panels to framing with screws spaced 12 inches o.c.
4. For double-layer construction, apply gypsum board base layer horizontally and
fasten to studs with screws spaced 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face
layers over joints in base layer and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches
o.c.
5. Allow wetted gypsum panels to dry before applying joint treatment.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners
used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory
manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners.
B. Install corner beads at external corners.
C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or
semiexposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound
except where other types are indicated.
1. Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and
back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.
2. Install L-bead where edge trims can only be installed after gypsum panels are
installed.
3. Install U-bead where indicated.
4. Install aluminum edge trim and other accessories where indicated.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner
bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects, and
elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of
gypsum board finish indicated.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint
compound.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints except those with trim accessories having
concealed face flanges not requiring taping to prevent cracks from developing in joint
treatment at flange edges.
D. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA-
214.
1. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a
higher level of finish is required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies and sound-rated
assemblies.
2. Level 5 for gypsum board surfaces where indicated.
E. For level 5 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply four separate
coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and
sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual
defects and ready for decoration. Use the following joint compound combination:
1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or taping

compound.
2. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound.
3. Finish (Third and Fourth) Coats: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping
compound.
4. Apply a thin uniform skim coat of joint compound over entire surface as the fourth
and final coat. Produce surfaces free of tool marks and ridges ready for decoration
of type indicated.
F. Where level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compound specified for
embedding coat.
A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, that
ensures gypsum board assemblies remain without damage or deterioration at time of

SECTION 09725 – DECORATIVE QUARTZ EPOXY FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Work of this Section as shown or specified shall be in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to
complete epoxy flooring incorporating color coated quartz aggregate and integral cove
base as selected on drawings and/or specified herein.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Concrete - Section 03300 – Concrete and concrete placement shall be in compliance with
ACI 302, ACI 224, ACI 503 and other applicable standards.
1. Poured In Place Concrete Special Note: Concrete should be either water cured
or cured using sodium silicate curing compounds only. Other types of curing
compounds are generally not acceptable. Concrete should be cured for a minimum of
28 days, while concrete containing fly ash should be cured for a minimum of 56 days.
See concrete section 03300 for additional requirements.
B. Floor drains - Division 15 – Concrete must be adequately sloped to drain prior to

placement of the Decor-Flor Troweled system.
1. Floor Drain Special Note: Floor drains, clean-outs etc. should be of the floor-flange
type as manufactured for use with composition floors by most major drain
manufacturers.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data application instructions and general
recommendations for decorative colored quartz troweled epoxy flooring specified herein.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled
content, submit documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer
and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
b. Include LEED Product Information Form for LEED Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2.
2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For field applied, interior, paints coatings and
primers, include printed statement of VOC content indicating compliance with Credit
requirements.
DECORATIVE QUARTZ EPOXY FLOORING 09725 - 1

a. Include LEED Product Information Form for LEED Credit EQ 4.2.

3. Provide additional documentation for products as required to achieve each Credit(s).
D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts showing
range of standard colors available.
E. Submit 2-1/2" x 4" samples in colored quartz aggregate combination as selected.
F. Material certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that the decorative colored quartz
troweled epoxy flooring submitted complies with requirements specified herein.
G. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's written instructions for recommended

maintenance practices.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer or applicator who has

specialized in installing resinous flooring types similar to that required for this Project and
who is acceptable to manufacturer of primary materials.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain epoxy component of flooring materials, including

primers, resins, hardening agents, and finish or sealing coats, from a single manufacturer.
Obtain color coated quartz aggregate from primary manufacturer of that product.
1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers with seals unbroken and bearing
manufacturer's labels containing brand name and directions for storage and mixing with
other components.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's directions to prevent deterioration from

moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental effects.
A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with epoxy resin composition flooring manufacturer's

directions for maintenance of ambient and substrate temperature, moisture, humidity,
ventilation, and other conditions required to execute and protect work.
B. Lighting: Permanent lighting will be in place and working before installing decorative
quartz epoxy flooring.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Decorative colored quartz troweled epoxy flooring shall be Dex-O-Tex Decor-Flor as

manufactured by Crossfield Products Corp., in Rancho Dominguez, California and
Roselle Park, New Jersey or approved equal.
2.02 PROPERTIES

A. Colors: As indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's standard color combinations.
B. Physical Properties: Provide flooring system that meets or exceeds the listed minimum
physical property requirements when tested according to the referenced standard test
method in parentheses.
o o
TYPICAL PHYSICAL PROPERTIES at 75 F (24 C)
Compressive Strength ASTM C579 .................... 10,500 psi

2
(Resin, Hardener & Aggregate) .......................... (738 kg/cm )
Compressive Strength ASTM D695 .................... 12,900 psi

2
(Resin & Hardener) .............................................. (907 kg/cm )
Tensile Strength ASTM C307 .............................. 1,800 psi

2
(Resin, Hardener & Aggregate) .......................... (127 kg/cm )
Tensile Strength ASTM D638 .............................. 5,000 psi

2
(Resin & Hardener) .............................................. (352 kg/cm )
Flexural Strength ASTM C580 ............................. 4,000 psi

2
(281 kg/cm )
Surface Hardness ASTM D2240 Shore D ........... 80-85
Indentation Characteristics
(Steadily Applied Load) MIL-PRF-3134, ............. 0.005”
Para. 4.7.4.2.1, 2000 lbs on (0.127 mm)
1” steel ram imposed for 30 minutes over
a concrete substrate, indented
Indentation Characteristics MIL-PRF-3134, Para. 4.7.3

(Impact Load) .................................................... 0.011”
(2 lb . . . 908 kg.) Indent from steel ball (0.28 mm)
dropped twice from 8 ft. height
Adhesion ASTM D4541 ....................................... > 400 psi

2
(100% failure in concrete) (28.1 kg/cm )
Water Absorption MIL-PRF-3134 ........................ < 1.0%
Abrasion Resistance ASTM D4060

(CS17, 1000gr load, 1000 cycles) ...................... 0.04 gr
Antimicrobial Resistance ASTM G21 .................. Passes
Flammability ASTM D635 .................................... Self-Extinguishing

Bonded to Concrete

2.03 SUPPLEMENTAL MATERIALS
A. Waterproofing or Fluid Proofing Membrane: Type recommended or produced by

manufacturer of epoxy resin composition flooring system for type of service and floor
condition indicated.
B. Anti-Microbial Additive: Incorporate antimicrobial chemical additive to control growth of

most algae, bacteria, fungi, mildew and mold.
C. Moisture Mitigation System: Concrete, especially slab on grade should be tested in

accordance with ASTM F1869. If pounds exceed flooring limit remedial action must be
taken.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine the areas and conditions where decorative quartz epoxy flooring is to be
installed and notify the Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected by the Contractor in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Substrate: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures according to flooring

manufacturer's instructions for particular substrate conditions involved, and as specified.
Provide clean, dry, and neutral substrate for flooring application.
B. Concrete Surfaces: Shot-blast, grind or power scarify as required to obtain optimum bond
of flooring to concrete. Profile should match published International Concrete Repair
Institute (ICRI) Guideline No. 03731 Guide for Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface
Preparation for Sealers, Coatings and Polymer Overlays. Remove sufficient material to
provide a sound surface, free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, and any bond-inhibiting
curing compounds or form release agents. Remove grease, oil, and other penetrating
contaminants. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete to acceptable condition. Leave
surface free of dust, dirt, laitance, and efflorescence.
C. Materials: Mix epoxy resin/hardener components when required, and prepare materials
according
to flooring system manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 APPLICATION - VAPOR PRIMER 100
A. General: Apply each component of synthetic resin composition moisture barrier system
according to manufacturer's directions to produce a uniform monolithic surface of
recommended thickness.
B. Vapor Barrier : Apply VaporControl Primer 100 penetrating primer solution by wetting the
substrate with water to be surface saturated dry (SSD) immediately spray or roll
VaporControl Primer 100 Primer onto the surface at a rate of 115 square feet per gallon

(15 mils). Do not allow to puddle. Backroll with spiked roller to release any entrapped air.
Allow to cure a minimum of 12 hours but before 24 hours proceed with next application.
C. Optional Second Coat Vapor Barrier: (Note to Specifier: When MVER is over 15 lbs.
Apply two coats of VaporControl Primer 100). Apply VaporControl Primer 100 onto the
surface at a rate of approximately 115 square feet per gallon. Backroll to a uniform film
thickness of 15 mils with a loop roller cover. Then backroll with spiked roller to release
any entrapped air. Allow to cure a minimum of 12 hours and before 32 hours. (This is the
final application when applying polymeric flooring. When installing VCT, Sheet vinyl,
Rubber, and Carpet, proceeds with step D below).
D. Topping Mortar: While VaporControl Primer 100 is still tacky, squeegee apply topping
mortar to a smooth even finish. Allow to cure 12 hours before proceeding. Sand to
remove any surface imperfections or roughness as required. If VaporControl Primer 100
has fully cured the surface must be lightly abraded and primed with VL Primer prior to
application of the topping mortar.
3.04 APPLICATION - DE-COR FLOOR TROWELED
A. General: Apply each component of decorative colored quartz troweled epoxy flooring
system according to manufacturer's directions to produce a uniform monolithic flooring
surface of thickness indicated.
B. Troweled Colored Quartz Troweled Flooring System: Mix resin, hardener and blended
colored quartz aggregate per the manufacturer’s instruction and place a sufficient amount
of material to obtain the specified thickness.
D. Groutcoat: Grout the Troweled Colored Quartz Epoxy Flooring System to fill the indices
(voids) in the system, which may require one or more groutcoats depending on surface
porosity.
E. Finish or Sealing Coats: After groutcoat(s) has cured sufficiently, apply finishcoats of type
recommended by flooring manufacturer to produce finish matching approved submittal
sample and in number of coats and spreading rates recommended by manufacturer.
F. Finished floor shall be 3/16"-1/4" thick, uniform in color and free of excessive trowel
marks.
G. Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces at locations specified at a height of 4
inches unless otherwise indicated. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions and details
including taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and top-coating of cove base.
3.05 CURING, PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Cure decorative quartz epoxy flooring materials according to manufacturer's directions,

taking care to prevent contamination during application stages and before completing
curing process. Close application area for a minimum of 24 hours.

DEX-O-TEX PRODUCT LINE 3000 E. Harcourt Street 140 Valley Road

Crossfield Products Corp. Rancho Dominguez, CA 90221 Roselle Park, NJ 07204
www.dexotex.com Tel: (310) 886-9100 Tel: (908) 245-2800
Fax: (310) 886-9119 Fax: (908) 245-2583

SECTION 09910 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed exterior items and
surfaces.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop-
priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where a surface
or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or
surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If
color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available.
1. Painting includes field-painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color
coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical
and electrical equipment.
2. All exposed mechanical metal ducts to be painted matte black color. See mechanical
drawings for more information.
C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating
parts, and labels.
1. Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished components:
a. Acoustic materials.
b. Architectural woodwork and casework.
c. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
d. Light fixtures.
e. Switchgear.
f. Distribution cabinets.
2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following
generally inaccessible areas:
a. Foundation spaces.
b. Furred areas.
c. Utility tunnels.
d. Pipe spaces.
e. Duct shafts.
f. Areas below access floor system.
3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include:
a. Anodized aluminum.
PAINTING 09910 - 1
b. Stainless steel.
c. Chromium plate.
d. Copper.
e. Bronze.
f. Brass.
4. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment, such as the
following:
a. Valve and damper operators.

b. Linkages.
c. Sensing devices.
d. Motor and fan shafts.
5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code-required
labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop-priming structural steel.

2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop-priming ferrous metal.
3. Division 9 Section "Wall Coverings" for substrate sealer under wall coverings.
4. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and
16, respectively.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each paint system specified, including block fillers and primers.
1. Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and instructions for
handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for use.
2. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application.
Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) if applicable.
C. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts.
1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.
D. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with
texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.
1. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including primers. Use
representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen,
color, and texture are achieved.
2. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample
as to location and application.
3. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture
only:
PAINTING 09910 - 2
a. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4 x 8-inch samples of natural and stained
wood finish on actual wood surfaces.
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system
applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a
construction record of successful in-service performance.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Contractor is required to coordinate with the Owner’s Lead Paint remediation contractor. Contractor
shall notify the Owner, Owner’s representative and Owner’s lead paint remediation contractor prior to
work needing to occur, coordinate work activities and immediately proceed with painting operations
after lead paint remediation work is complete and substrate is ready to receive paint.
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.

2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from
fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 50 deg F and 90 deg F.
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air temperatures are between 45 deg F and 95 deg F.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at
temperatures less than 5 F deg above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
PAINTING 09910 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products

that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe).

2. Fuller O'Brien (Fuller).
3. The Glidden Company (Glidden).
4. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore).
5. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG).
6. Pratt and Lambert (P & L).
7. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W).
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that
are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of the various
coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification
will not be acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or

materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's
material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of
standard colors.
2.3 MASONRY BLOCK FILLER
A. Filler Coat Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated, latex-type

concrete masonry block fillers that are compatible with the finish materials indicated.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, block fillers that may be incorporated
in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. High-Performance Latex Block Filler:
a. Devoe: 52901 Bloxfil Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Block Filler.

b. Fuller: 280-00 Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler.
c. Glidden: 5317 Ultra-Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler.
d. Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler #173.
e. PPG: 6-7 Latex Masonry Block Filler.
f. P & L: Pro-Hide Plus Block Filler.
PAINTING 09910 - 4
g. S-W: Heavy-Duty Block Filler B42W46.
2.4 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated primers that are compatible
with the substrate and finish coats indicated.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, prime coat materials that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Concrete and Masonry Primers: Interior, flat, latex-based paint.
a. Devoe: 51701 Wonder-Prime Interior All Purpose Latex Primer Seale &Vapor Barrier.
b. Fuller: 202-XX Interior - Exterior Acrylic Latex Wall Paint.
c. Glidden: 5300 Ultra-Hide Flat Wall Paint.
d. Moore: Moore's Latex Quick-Dry Prime Seal #201.
e. PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint.
f. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish.
g. S-W: ProMar 200 Latex Flat B30W200.
h. S-W: Wall and Wood Primer B49W2.
2. Ferrous Metal Primers: Synthetic, quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primers.
a. Devoe: 13101 Mirrolac Cover Up Rust Penetrating Primer.

b. Fuller: 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer.
c. Glidden: 5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast-Dry Metal Primer.
d. Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163.
e. PPG: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer.
f. P & L: Effecto Rust-Inhibiting Primer.
g. S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1.
3. Ferrous Metal Primers: Alkyd-type primers.
a. Devoe: 41820 Bar-Ox Alkyd Shop/Field Primer Grey.

b. Fuller: 621-05 Blox-Rust Latex Metal Primer.
c. Glidden: 5205 Glid-Guard Tank and Structural Primer.
d. Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163.
e. PPG: 6-612 Speedhide Inhibitive White Primer.
f. P & L: Effecto Primer Red or White.
g. S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1.
2.5 UNDERCOAT MATERIALS
A. Undercoat Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated undercoat

materials that are compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, undercoat materials that may be
1. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel.
a. Devoe: 51701 Wonder-Prime Interior All Purpose Latex Primer Sealer & Vapor Barrier.
b. Fuller: 220-06 Interior Alkyd Wall Primer Sealer.
PAINTING 09910 - 5
c. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi-Gloss Enamel.

d. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
e. PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater.
f. P & L: E6 Enamel Undercoater.
g. S-W: ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200.
2.6 EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL
A. Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated finish-coat materials that
are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, finish coat materials that may be
1. Exterior Acrylic Emulsion: Quick-drying, flat, acrylic paint.
a. Devoe: 15XX Wonder-Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint.

b. Fuller: 262-XX 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat Finish.
c. Glidden: 3525 Spred Glide-On.
d. Moore: Moore's Flat Exterior Latex Masonry & House Paint #105.
e. PPG: 72 Line Sun-Proof Acrylic Latex House Paint.
f. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat House Paint.
g. S-W: A-100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish A-6 Series.
2. Exterior, Polyvinyl Acetate Emulsion: Quick-drying, flat, polyvinyl acetate (PVA) paint.
a. Devoe: 20XX Wonder Guard Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat Masonry Paint.
b. Fuller: 263-XX Flat Latex House Paint.
c. Glidden: 3525 Spred Glide-On.
d. Moore: Moore's Flat Exterior Latex Masonry & House Paint #105.
e. PPG: 37 Line Cementhide Latex Masonry Paint.
f. P & L: Pro-Hide Plus Interior/Exterior Vinyl-Acrylic Flat Paint Z3400 Series.
g. S-W: Weather Perfect Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish B-36 Series.
2.7 INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL
A. Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated finish-coat materials that
are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, finish coat materials that may be
1. Interior, Flat, Latex-Based Paint: Ready-mixed, latex-based paint for a flat finish.
a. Devoe: 36XX Wonder-Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint.

b. Fuller: 602XX Liquid Velvet Latex Wall
c. Glidden: 3400 Spred Satin Latex Wall Paint.
d. Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215.
e. PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint.
f. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish.
g. S-W: Classic 99 Wall and Trim Paint A27W10.
2. Interior, Flat, Odorless, Alkyd Paint: Ready-mixed, interior, flat, low-odor, alkyd enamel.
PAINTING 09910 - 6
a. Devoe: 21XX Velour Alkyd Flat Wall Paint.

b. Fuller: 101XX Liquid Velvet Alkyd Flat Wall Paint.
c. Glidden: 5700 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Flat Wall Enamel.
d. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Sani-Flat #204.
e. PPG: 6-50 Series Speedhide Alkyd Flat Wall Paint.
f. P & L: Lyt-All Flowing Flat.
g. S-W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Flat Wall Paint B32W101.
3. Interior, Semigloss, Odorless Alkyd Enamel: Semigloss, low-odor, alkyd enamel.
a. Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel.

b. Fuller: 110XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel.
c. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel.
d. Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235.
e. PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel.
f. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
g. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series.
4. Exterior, Gloss, Alkyd Enamel:
a. Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd-Urethane Gloss Enamel.

b. Fuller: 312XX EPA Compliant Heavy Duty Enamel.
c. Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel.
d. Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133.
e. PPG: 54 Line Quick-Dry Enamel.
f. P & L: Effecto Enamel.
g. S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD-FINISHING MATERIALS
A. Wood-Finishing Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated, wood-

finishing materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, wood-finishing materials that may be
1. Varnish-Type Surface Sealer:
a. Devoe: 1502 Wonder Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex House Paint Primer.
b. Glidden: 3651 Spred House Paint Prime Coat.
c. PPG: 77-1 Rez Sealer-Primer.
d. P & L: Varmor Penetrating Sealer.
e. S-W: Chek Gard Primer B42W10.
2. Oil-Type Interior Wood Stain: Slow-penetrating, oil-type wood stain.
a. Devoe: 96XX Wonder Woodstain Alkyd Stain.

b. Fuller: 640-XX Pen-Chrome Interior Oil Base Wood Stain.
c. Glidden: 1600 Woodmaster Oil Stain.
d. Moore: 241 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Penetrating Stain.
e. PPG: 77-302 Rez Medium Tint Base.
f. P & L: S-Series Tonetic Wood Stain.
g. S-W: Oil Stain A-48 Series.
PAINTING 09910 - 7
3. Cut Shellac: Quick-drying, rosin-free, clear, general-purpose shellac varnish.
a. Devoe: 4900 Wonder Woodsealer Quick-Dry Sealer.

b. Fuller: No recommendation.
c. Glidden: 5035 Ultra-Hide Sanding Sealer.
d. Moore: 413 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick-Dry Sanding Sealer.
e. PPG: 77-30 Quick Drying Sanding Sealer.
f. P & L: No recommendation.
g. S-W: ProMar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3.
4. Paste Wood Filler: Solvent-based, air-drying, paste-type wood filler.
a. Devoe: 4800 Wonder Woodstain Interior Paste Wood Filler.

b. Fuller: 680-00 Pen Chrome Paste Wood Filler.
c. Glidden: Glidden Paste Wood Filler.
d. Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler #238.
e. PPG: (none required)
f. P & L: No recommendation.
g. S-W: Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler.
5. Oil Rubbing Varnish: Clear, oil-type, rubbing varnish for use on interior stained or natural-
finished woodwork:
a. Devoe: 4600 Wonder Wood Satin Alkyd Satin Varnish.

b. Fuller: 653-01 EPA Compliant Clear Polyurethane Satin Finish.
c. Glidden: 82 Woodmaster Satin Sheen Urethane Varnish.
d. Moore: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404.
e. PPG: 77-7 Rez Satin Varnish.
f. P & L: Clear Finish Gloss.
g. S-W: Oil Base Varnish, Gloss A66V91.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint
application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied.
1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility
of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish
materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates
primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
PAINTING 09910 - 8
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures,
and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection
prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to completely paint the
items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area,
have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that
could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule
cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet,
newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's
instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in
writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat material with substrates
primed by others.
2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and
mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk,
dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen, as required, to remove glaze. If
hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of
surface preparation.
a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer.

b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate
tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn,
correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture
content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.
c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or
other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize
with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and
dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac
or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes
and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth
when dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges,
ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters,
cases, and paneling.
c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on backside.
e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery.
4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop-
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent
or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures
Painting Council (SSPC).
PAINTING 09910 - 9
a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system manufacturer and
according to requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP 10.
b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat
before priming.
c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.
Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and
touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.
5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so that

the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
D. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's
directions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary,
strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best
suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to
formation of a durable paint film.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
3. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the
application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as
recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required
to produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's directions.
4. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of
paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to
ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners,
receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
5. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and
provide desired protection.
6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat,
nonspecular black paint.
8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
9. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces.
10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
PAINTING 09910 - 10
11. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted.
C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until
paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb
pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift
or lose adhesion.
D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to the manufacturer's directions. Use of spray equipment is restricted to unoccupied
areas.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required. Use of spray equipment is restricted to
unoccupied areas.
E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the
manufacturer.
F. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed
in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.
G. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.

2. Heat exchangers.
3. Tanks.
4. Ductwork.
5. Insulation.
6. Supports.
7. Motors and mechanical equipment.
8. Accessory items.
H. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Conduit and fittings.

2. Switchgear.
I. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage
with pores filled.
J. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime-
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed
areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to
insufficient sealing.
K. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform
PAINTING 09910 - 11
finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs,
sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
L. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even
luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel,
nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1. Provide satin finish for final coats.
M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or
repaint work not complying with specified requirements.
A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the
Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint
material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified,
sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor.
2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required
by the Owner:
a. Quantitative materials analysis.

b. Abrasion resistance.
c. Apparent reflectivity.
d. Flexibility.
e. Washability.
f. Absorption.
g. Accelerated weathering.
h. Dry opacity.
i. Accelerated yellowness.
j. Recoating.
k. Skinning.
l. Color retention.
m. Alkali and mildew resistance.
3. If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, the
Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing,
repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from previously
painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from the site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
3.6 PROTECTION
PAINTING 09910 - 12
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct
damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings
provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.
3.7 PAINT SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated.
B. Concrete and Masonry (other than concrete masonry units):
1. Lusterless (Flat), Odorless, Latex Finish: Two coats.
a. Primer: Interior, flat, latex-based paint.
1) Devoe: 36XX Wonder-Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint.

2) Fuller: 202-XX Interior-Exterior Acrylic Latex Wall Paint.
3) Glidden: 5300 Ultra-Hide Flat Wall Paint.
4) Moore: Moore's Latex Quick-Dry Prime Seal #201.
5) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint.
6) P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish.
7) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Latex Flat B30W200.
b. Second Coat: Interior, flat, odorless, alkyd paint.
1) Devoe: 21XX Velour Alkyd Flat Wall Paint.

2) Fuller: 101XX Liquid Velvet Alkyd Flat Wall Paint.
3) Glidden: 5700 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Flat Wall Enamel.
4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Sani-Flat #204.
5) PPG: 6-50 Series Speedhide Alkyd Flat Wall Paint.
6) P & L: Lyt-All Flowing Flat.
7) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Alkyd Flat Wall Paint B32W101.
2. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Three coats with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils.
a. Primer: Interior, flat, latex-based paint.

2) Fuller: 202-XX Interior-Exterior Acrylic Latex Wall Paint.
3) Glidden: 5300 Ultra-Hide Flat Wall Paint.
7) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Latex Flat B30W200.
b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.
1) Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.

2) Fuller: 220-06 Interior Alkyd Wall Primer Sealer.
3) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi-Gloss Enamel.
PAINTING 09910 - 13
4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.

5) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater.
6) P & L: E6 Enamel Undercoater.
7) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200.
c. Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel.
1) Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel.

2) Fuller: 110XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel.
3) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel.
4) Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235.
5) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel.
6) P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
7) S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series.
C. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Lusterless (Flat) Emulsion Finish: Two finish coats over filled surface.
a. Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler.
1) Devoe: 52901 Bloxfil Acrylic Latex Block Filler.

2) Fuller: 280-00 Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler.
3) Glidden: 5317 Ultra-Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler.
4) Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler #173.
5) PPG: 6-7 Latex Masonry Block Filler.
6) P & L: Pro-Hide Plus Block Filler.
7) S-W: Heavy-Duty Block Filler B42W46.
b. First and Second Coats: Interior, flat, latex-based paint.

2) Fuller: 602XX Liquid Velvet Latex Wall Paint.
3) Glidden: 3400 Spred Satin Latex Wall Paint.
4) Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215.
7) S-W: Classic 99 Wall and Trim Paint A27W10.
2. Semigloss, Alkyd, Enamel Finish: Two coats over filled surface with total dry film thickness
not less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat.
a. Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler.
1) Devoe: 52901 Bloxfil Acrylic Latex Block Filler.

2) Fuller: 280-00 Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler.
3) Glidden: 5317 Ultra-Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler.
4) Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler #173.
5) PPG: 6-7 Latex Masonry Block Filler.
6) P & L: Pro-Hide Plus Block Filler.
7) S-W: Heavy-Duty Block Filler B42W46.

PAINTING 09910 - 14
2) Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.

6) P & L: Interior Trim Primer.

D. Gypsum Drywall Systems:
1. Lusterless (Flat) Emulsion Finish: Two coats.
a. Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer.
1) Devoe: 50801 Wonder-Tones Latex Primer and Sealer.

2) Fuller: Pro-Tech Interior Latex Wall Primer and Sealer.
3) Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer.
5) PPG: 6-2 Quick-Dry Latex Primer Sealer.
6) P & L: Latex Wall Primer Z30001.
b. Finish Coat: Interior, flat, latex-based paint.

2) Fuller: 602XX Liquid Velvet Latex Wall Paint.
3) Glidden: 3400 Spred Satin Latex Wall Paint.
4) Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215.
7) S-W: Classic 99 Wall and Trim Paint A27W10.
2. Odorless Semigloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: Three coats with total dry film thickness not less
than 2.5 mils.
a. Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer.
1) Devoe: 50801 Wonder-Tones Latex Primer and Sealer.

2) Fuller: Pro-Tech Interior Latex Wall Primer and Sealer.
3) Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer.
5) PPG: 6-2 Quick-Dry Latex Primer Sealer.
6) P & L: Latex Wall Primer Z30001.
PAINTING 09910 - 15
b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel.

E. Woodwork and Hardboard:
1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Three coats.
a. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.

3) Glidden: 310 Glidden Wood Undercoater.
7) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200.
b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel.

2. Full-Gloss Enamel Finish: Three coats.
a. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.

3) Glidden: 310 Glidden Wood Undercoater.
b. First and Second Coats: Gloss alkyd enamel.
1) Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel.

2) Fuller: 312XX EPA Compliant Heavy Duty Enamel.
3) Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel.
4) Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133.
5) PPG: 54 Line Quick-Dry Enamel.
6) P & L: Effecto Enamel.
7) S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series.
PAINTING 09910 - 16
F. Stained Woodwork:
1. Stained-Varnish Rubbed Finish: Three finish coats over stain plus filler on open-grain wood.
Wipe filler before applying first varnish coat.
a. Stain Coat: Oil-type interior wood stain.
1) Devoe: 96XX Wonder Woodstain Alkyd Stain.

2) Fuller: 640-XX Pen-Chrome Interior Oil Base Wood Stain.
3) Glidden: 1600 Woodmaster Oil Stain.
4) Moore: 241 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Penetrating Stain.
5) PPG: 77-302 Rez Medium Tint Base.
6) P & L: S-Series Tonetic Wood Stain.
7) S-W: Oil Stain A-48 Series.
b. First Coat: Cut shellac.
1) Devoe: 4900 Wonder Woodsealer Quick-Dry Sealer.

2) Glidden: 5035 Ultra-Hide Sanding Sealer.
3) Moore: 413 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick-Dry Sanding Sealer.
4) PPG: 77-30 Quick Drying Sanding Sealer.
5) S-W: Pro-Mar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3.
c. Filler Coat: Paste wood filler.
1) Devoe: 4800 Wonder Woodstain Interior Paste Wood Filler.

2) Fuller: 680-00 Pen Chrome Paste Wood Filler.
3) Glidden: Glidden Paste Wood Filler.
4) Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler #238.
5) PPG: (none required)
6) S-W: Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler.
d. Second and Third Coats: Oil rubbing varnish.
1) Devoe: 4600 Wonder Wood Satin Alkyd Satin Varnish.

2) Fuller: 653-01 EPA Compliant Clear Polyurethane Satin Finish.
3) Glidden: 82 Woodmaster Satin Sheen Urethane Varnish.
4) Moore: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404.
5) PPG: 77-7 Rez Satin Varnish.
6) P & L: Clear Finish Gloss.
7) S-W: Oil Base Varnish, Gloss A66V91.
G. Ferrous Metal: (Interior)
1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than
2.5 mils.
a. Primer: Synthetic, quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer.
1) Devoe: 14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red.

2) Fuller: 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer.
3) Glidden: 5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast-Dry Metal Primer.
4) Moore: Ironclad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163.
5) PPG: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer.
PAINTING 09910 - 17
6) P & L: Effecto Rust-Inhibiting Primer.

7) S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1.


2. Full-Gloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than
2.5 mils.
a. Primer: Synthetic, quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer.
1) Devoe: 14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red.

2) Fuller: 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer.
3) Glidden: 5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast-Dry Metal Primer.
4) Moore: Ironclad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163.
5) PPG: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer.
6) P & L: Effecto Rust-Inhibiting Primer.
7) S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1.

3) Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Alkyd Enamel.
c. Finish Coat: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel.
1) Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel.

2) Fuller: 312XX EPA Compliant Heavy Duty Enamel.
3) Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel.
4) Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133.
5) PPG: 54 Line Quick-Dry Enamel.
6) P & L: Effecto Enamel.
7) S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series.
PAINTING 09910 - 18
H. Ferrous Metal: (Exterior when not specified as galvanized.)
Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on
shop-primed items. Most manufacturers recommend two finish coats over a suitable primer over
exterior ferrous metal subject to normal use and moderate environments; however, in some
situations, additional coats may be necessary to obtain good coverage. Retain paint system below
for a low-luster (eggshell) acrylic finish over exterior ferrous metal
subject to normal use and moderate environments.
1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer.

b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
PAINTING 09910 - 19
SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet compartments and screens as follows:
1. Type: Steel, color-coated finish.

2. Compartment Style: Floor anchored.
1. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet paper holders, grab bars, and similar
accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified. Include details
of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of anchors,
hardware, and fastenings.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of actual units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of compartment or
screen indicated.
A. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating units without field measurements. Coordinate
supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions correspond to
established dimensions.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 1

2. All American Metal Corp.

3. Ampco Products, Inc.
4. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
5. Capitol Partitions,Inc.
6. Commercial and Architectural Products, Inc.; Marlite.
7. Compression Polymers Group; Comtec Industries.
8. Crane Plumbing; Sanymetal.
9. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
10. Global Steel Products Corp.
11. Hadrian, Inc.
12. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation.
13. Lambaton/Universal.
14. MASCO; Flush-Metal Partition Corp.
15. Metpar Corp.
16. Mills Company (The).
17. Partition Systems, Inc.; Columbia Partitions.
18. Santana Products, Inc.
19. Tex-Lam Manufacturing, Inc.
20. Turan Partition Corporation.
21. Weis/Robart Partitions, Inc.
22. Young Sales Corp.; DesignRite.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness.
Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing
of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable.
B. Steel Sheets for Color-Coated Finish: Provide mill-phosphatized steel sheet that is leveled to
stretcher-leveled flatness complying with the requirements of standards indicated below:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized or Galvannealed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M), in

manufacturer's standard coating designation and of the following minimum thicknesses:
a. Pilasters (Unbraced): 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
b. Panels and Screens: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).
c. Doors: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm).
d. Tapping Reinforcement: 0.079 inch (2.0 mm).
C. Core Material for Metal-Faced Units: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of

resin-impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch (25 mm)
minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum for pilasters.
1. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from
manufacturers full range of colors and patterns.
D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, not less than
0.0312 inch (0.8 mm) thick and 3 inches (75 mm) high, finished to match hardware.
E. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard ear or U-brackets for attaching panels and screens to
walls and pilasters of the following material:
1. Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear-anodized aluminum.

F. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels and
screens to walls and pilasters of the following material:
1. Material: Clear-anodized aluminum.
G. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and
accessories of the following material:
1. Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear-anodized aluminum.
H. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or

chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide
sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or
other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment
system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment-mounted hardware,
accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
1. Provide internal reinforcement in metal units for compartment-mounted hardware,

accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
B. Metal-Faced Toilet Compartments and Screens: Pressure laminate seamless face sheets to core
material and provide continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edges. Seal
corners by welding or clips. Grind exposed welds smooth.
C. Floor Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant anchoring

assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters
for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
D. Floor-Anchored Screens: Provide pilasters and panels of same construction and finish as toilet
compartments. Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies
complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural
connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
E. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in-swinging doors for
standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-
inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open at
any angle up to 90 degrees.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit with combination
rubber-faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access. Provide units that
comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments
indicated to be handicapped accessible.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to
prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging doors or
entrance screen doors.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction at out-swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at
compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.

2.4 ZINC- OR ZINC-ALLOY-COATED STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations relative to applying finishes.
B. Color-Coated Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with coating
manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film
thickness.
1.Color: One color in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight,
plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) between pilasters and
panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls. Secure units in position with
manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
1. Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top
and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile
joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Floor-Anchored Compartments: Set pilaster units with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches
(50 mm) into structural floor, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions.
Level, plumb, and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of
pilasters when doors are in closed position.
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written

instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30
degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and swing doors
in entrance screens to return to fully closed position.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens are
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Fixed metal wall louvers.
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed in perimeter joints between
louver frames and adjoining construction.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Louver Terminology: Refer to Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) 501 for
definitions of terms for metal louvers not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced
standards.
A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install exterior metal wall louvers to
withstand the effects of loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement without
evidencing permanent deformation of louver components including blades, frames, and
supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; or permanent
damage to fasteners and anchors.
1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf per sq. ft. (960 Pa),
acting inwards or outwards.
2. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from the following maximum
change (range) in ambient temperature. Base design calculations on actual surface
temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
a. Temperature Change (Range): 100 deg F (56 deg C).
B. Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, and Air-Leakage Ratings: Provide louvers complying

with performance requirements indicated as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock
units of height and width indicated. Test units according to AMCA 500.
1. Perform testing on unpainted, cleaned, degreased units.

2. Perform water-penetration testing on louvers without screens.
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 1

3. Equivalent Air-Performance Ratings: Louvers having less free area than that
specified or having a lower free area velocity at the static pressure loss specified
may be considered for the Work provided their total air performance is equivalent to
that specified. The burden of proof of equivalency is on the Contractor. For louvers
to be considered equivalent, the product of their free area, for the size specified,
and their free area velocity at the static pressure loss specified must be at least
equal to the product of the specified free area and velocity. Also, their free area
velocity at the static pressure loss specified must not result in water penetration of
more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. (3.1 g/sq. m) of free area, and they must meet all
other requirements.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop drawings of louver units and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
details showing profiles, angles, and spacing of louver blades; unit dimensions related to
wall openings and construction; free areas for each size indicated; profiles of frames at
jambs, heads, and sills; and anchorage details and locations.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include
structural analysis data sealed and signed by the qualified professional engineer
who was responsible for their preparation.
D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range
of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for verification of each type of metal finish required, prepared on samples of same
thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color
and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
F. Product test reports evidencing compliance of units with performance requirements

indicated.
G. Product certificates signed by louver manufacturers certifying that their products comply with
the specified requirements and are licensed to bear the AMCA seal based on tests made
according to AMCA 500 and complying with the AMCA Certified Ratings Program.
H. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain louvers and vents from one source and by a single
manufacturer where alike in one or more respects regarding type, design, and factory-
applied color finish.
B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of D1.2 "Structural Welding Code--

Aluminum," and D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for
welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
C. Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer legally authorized to practice in the

jurisdiction where the Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of
the kind indicated that have resulted in the installation of louvers similar to this Project in
material, design, and extent and that have a record of successful in-service performance.
D. SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"

recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
E. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and related components for motor-operated
adjustable louvers that are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA
standards.
A. Field Measurements: Check actual louver openings by accurate field measurements before
fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee
opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating louvers without field
measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions
correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Stationary Drainable

Blade Louver Model ELF 375D as manufactured by Ruskin Mfg. or approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.

B. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series stainless steel,
unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with joined
materials.
1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

2. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for type of loading and installation
indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior
installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 except

containing no asbestos fibers.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Fabricate louvers and vents to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, materials, joinery, and performance.
B. Assemble louvers in shop to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.
D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances
made for fabrication and installation tolerances of louvers, adjoining construction, and
perimeter sealant joints.
E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated but not more than recommended
by manufacturer, or 72 inches (1830 mm) o.c., whichever is less. At horizontal joints
between louver units, provide horizontal mullions except where continuous vertical
assemblies are indicated.
G. Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers where indicated or
required for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to interior.
H. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades as follows, unless otherwise
indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members
necessary:
1. With fillet welds, concealed from view; or mechanical fasteners; or a combination of

these methods; as standard with louver manufacturer.
2.4 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM WALL LOUVERS
A. Horizontal, Drainable, Fixed-Blade Louvers: Extruded-aluminum frames and louver blades,

designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill by means of gutters in front edges of
blades and channels in jambs and mullions, complying with the following requirements:
1. Louver Depth: 4 inches (100 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

2. Frame Thickness: .100 inch.
3. Blade Thickness: 0.081 inch (2.06 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
4. Blade Angle: 37 1/2 degrees, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Performance Requirements: As follows, determined by testing units 48 inches
(1220 mm) wide by 48 inches (1220 mm) high per AMCA 500:
a. Free Area: Not less than 7.50 sq. ft. (0.697 sq. m).
b. Static Pressure Loss: Not more than 0.14 inch wg (35 Pa) at an airflow of

900 fpm (4.57 m/s) free area intake velocity.

c. Water Penetration: Not more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. (3.1 g/sq. m) of free
area at an airflow of 900 fpm (4.57 m/s) free area velocity when tested for
15 minutes.
6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2.5 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide each exterior louver with louver screens complying with the following
requirements:
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced 6 inches (150
mm) maximum from each corner and at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. between.
C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate screen frames with mitered corners to louver sizes
indicated and to comply with the following requirements:
1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver frames to which
screens are attached.
a. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips.
2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached.
3. Type: Rewireable frames with a driven spline or insert for securing screen mesh.
D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: Fit aluminum louver screen frames with screening
covering louver openings and complying with the following requirements:
1. Bird Screening: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) square mesh formed with 0.047-inch- (1.19-
mm-) diameter stainless-steel wire.
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
B. Finish louvers after assembly.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum

Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as

fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,
integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.7 mil (0.018 mm) or thicker
complying with AAMA 606.1 or AAMA 608.1.

1. Color: Anodized, to match color of existing metal trim.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation
of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate
delivery of such items to Project site.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louver units plumb, level, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws
where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding operations required for
fitting and jointing. Restore finishes so there is no evidence of corrective work. Return
items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required alterations, and
refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
F. Protect galvanized- and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by

applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with
concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.
G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation, as louver installation
progresses, where required to make louver joints weathertight. Comply with Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during installation of louver.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect louvers and vents from damage of any kind during construction period including use
of temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by louver manufacturer.
Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction period, so that no
evidence remains of correction work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as judged by
Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
1. Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches
color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
C. Test operation of adjustable wall louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning

units that comply with requirements.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by
temporary covering to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil
accumulate until final cleaning.
B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not
harmful to finishes. Rinse surfaces thoroughly and dry.

SECTION 10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Portable fire extinguishers.
2. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping sealants at

fire-rated cabinets.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection cabinets.
1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
B. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source
from a single manufacturer.
B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.
1.5 WARRANTY
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 1

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.

b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:

2.2 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Amerex Corporation.
2. Ansul Incorporated.
3. Badger Fire Protection.
4. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
5. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
6. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation.
7. JL Industries, Inc.
8. Kidde Fyrnetics.
9. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
10. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico.
11. Moon American.
12. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
13. Watrous; Div. of American Specialties, Inc.
B. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each mounting bracket
indicated.
1. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.

2. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B
C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 5-lb nominal

capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall
or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated
or baked-enamel finish.
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red
letter decals applied to mounting surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if
not indicated, at heights indicated below:
1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.
B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection specialties
are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

SECTION 10801 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet accessory items as scheduled.
B. Toilet compartments and related accessories are specified in Division 10.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1

Specifications Sections.
B. Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including construction details relative
to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, mounting method, specified options, and finishes.
C. Schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for each
toilet accessory item to be provided for project.
D. Setting drawings where cutouts are required in other work, including templates, substrate
preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchorage
devices.
E. Maintenance instructions including replaceable parts and service recommendations.
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard inserts and anchoring
devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery with other
work to avoid delay.
A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work
to avoid interference with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning,
and servicing of toilet accessory items.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by mirror manufacturer, agreeing to replace

any mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1

C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other
warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

toilet accessories as listed within the Accessory Schedule include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment,Inc.

2. Bradley Corportation.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 0.034 inch (0.9 mm)
minimum thickness.
B. Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, ASTM B 19; rods, shapes, forgings, and flat
products with finished edges, ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M); Castings, ASTM B 30.
C. Sheet Steel: Cold-rolled, commercial quality ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M), 0.04 inch (1.0
mm) minimum. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527 G60 (ASTM A 527M Z180).
E. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, ASTM B 456,
Type SC 2.
F. Baked Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss white, baked acrylic enamel coating.
G. Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0 mm thick, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality
q2, and with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating.
H. Stainless Steel Mirror Surfaces: Not less than 0.04 inch (1.0 mm) AISI Type 302/304
stainless steel sheet, stretcher-leveled with No. 8 polished mirror finish. Bond to 1/4 inch (6
mm) minimum hardboard backing.
I. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
J. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, or of
galvanized steel where concealed.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Only a maximum 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter, unobtrusive stamped
manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath
accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or back surface, provide
additional identification by either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate,

indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
B. General: No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessory
units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface, provide
identification of each accessory item either by a printed, waterproof label or a stamped
nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
C. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate

units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with
continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
D. Framed Mirror Units, General: Fabricate frames for glass mirror units to accommodate
wood, felt, plastic, or other glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and
support system that will permit rigid, tamperproof glass installation and prevent moisture
accumulation, as follows:
1. Provide galvanized-steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.9 mm) and full
mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an
acceptable filler material.
E. Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system for mounting mirror units that will permit rigid,
tamperproof, and theft proof installation, as follows:
1. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking

mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
2. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking
devices requiring a special tool to remove.
F. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access
for servicing, resupply, etc. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners

appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and
level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle
bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, according to
manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved.
C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1100 N), complying with
ASTM F 446.
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly.
Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations
after removing temporary labels and protective coatings.

SECTION 12356 – SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Solid-surfacing-material countertops.

1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for faucets, etc., mounted in countertops.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Solid-surfacing material.
B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other
work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and backsplash profiles, cutouts
for plumbing fixtures, and methods of joining countertops.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material
exposed to view.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following materials; in sets showing the full range of color,
texture, and pattern variations expected:
1. Solid-surfacing material for countertops, 6 inches square.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of countertops certifying that products furnished

comply with requirements.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet-
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements for Countertops: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements

after supporting structure is installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12356 - 1

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of
countertop.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Solid-Surfacing Material for Countertops:
a. Safas Corporation.
b. Avonite, Inc.
c. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.
d. Swan Corporation (The).
B. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Granicoat” by Safas Corporation or

approved equal.
2.2 COLORS, TEXTURES, AND PATTERNS
A. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for
these characteristics.
2.3 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.
B. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
material and performance requirements of ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or Type 6, without a precoated
finish.
2.4 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top.

2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.
B. Construction: 3/4-inch- thick, solid-surfacing-material countertops and backsplashes with front

edge of countertops built up with same material.
C. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written instructions for
adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
1. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten solid-surfacing-material countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into
underside of countertop. Align adjacent surfaces, and form seams to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress
joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
A. Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to

restore damaged or soiled areas.

SECTION 13915 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following fire-suppression piping inside the building:
1. Wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for piping outside the building.

2. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for alarm devices not specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
B. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Underground service piping below the building.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and
that is connected to water supply. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are
opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose
connections are included if indicated.
A. Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig.
B. Fire-suppression sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses
through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.
2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: According to NFPA 13.
3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: According to NFPA 13.
4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing and NFPA 13.
5. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915 - 1

C. Seismic Performance: Fire-suppression piping shall be capable of withstanding the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads
for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1. Piping materials, including dielectric fittings and sprinkler specialty fittings.

2. Pipe hangers and supports, including seismic restraints.
3. Valves, including listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, and specialty
valves and trim.
4. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting,
finish, and other pertinent data.
5. Hose connections, including size, type, and finish.
6. Alarm devices, including electrical data.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Fire flow data/Fire-hydrant flow test report.
D. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have
been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations, if applicable.
E. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Include "Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test
Certificate for Underground Piping."
F. Welding certificates.
G. Field quality-control test reports.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For standpipe and sprinkler specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-suppression

systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field

test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX.
C. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation,

and testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

2. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."
3. NFPA 230, "Fire Protection of Storage."
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting, steel cabinet with hinged cover, with space
for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers
required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and
wrench for each type of sprinkler on Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Threaded-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or

ASTM A 795, hot-dip galvanized where indicated and with factory- or field-formed threaded
ends.
1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1.

2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3.
3. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4.
4. Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106,
Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe hot-dip galvanized where indicated. Include ends
matching joining method.
5. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865 hot-dip galvanized-steel pipe where indicated.
B. Grooved-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795,
hot-dip galvanized where indicated and with factory- or field-formed, square-cut- or roll-grooved
ends.
1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:
a. Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD

matching steel-pipe OD.
b. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, rigid pattern, unless
otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron
housing with keys matching steel-pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated rubber
gasket listed for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.
2.2 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Assembly shall be copper alloy, ferrous, and insulating materials with ends matching piping
system.
B. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated assembly, designed for 250-psig minimum working

pressure at 180 deg F. Include insulating material that isolates dissimilar materials and ends
with inside threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
C. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 175-psig minimum

working-pressure rating as required for piping system.
D. Dielectric Flange Insulation Kits: Components for field assembly shall include CR or phenolic
gasket, PE or phenolic bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining and
threaded ends and 300-psig working-pressure rating at 225 deg F.
F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with
combination of plain, threaded, or grooved ends and 300-psig working-pressure rating at 225
deg F.
2.3 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum working-
pressure rating, and made of materials compatible with piping. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall
have 250-psig minimum working-pressure rating if fittings are components of high-pressure
piping system.
B. Outlet Specialty Fittings:
1. Mechanical-T and -Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with gaskets, bolts and
nuts, and threaded, locking-lug, or grooved outlets.
2. Snap-On and Strapless Outlet Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing or casting with
gasket and threaded outlet.
C. Sprinkler Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: Cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded or locking-lug
inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.
D. Sprinkler Branch-Line Test Fittings: Brass body with threaded inlet, capped drain outlet, and
threaded outlet for sprinkler.
E. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fitting: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with threaded inlet and drain
outlet and sight glass.
F. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, adjustable with threaded inlet and outlet, and seals.
2.4 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. Valves shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Valves
shall have 250-psig minimum pressure rating if valves are components of high-pressure piping
system.
B. Gate Valves with Wall Indicator Posts:

1. Gate Valves: UL 262, cast-iron body, bronze mounted, with solid disc, nonrising stem,
operating nut, and flanged ends.
2. Indicator Posts: UL 789, horizontal-wall type, cast-iron body, with hand wheel, extension
rod, locking device, and cast-iron barrel.
C. Ball Valves: Comply with UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc.
1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.

2. NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron body with
grooved ends.
3. NPS 3: Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
D. Butterfly Valves: UL 1091.
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.

2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with flanged
or grooved ends.
E. Check Valves NPS 2 and Larger: UL 312, swing type, cast-iron body with flanged or grooved
ends.
F. Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type.
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.

2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron body with flanged ends.
G. Indicating Valves: UL 1091, with integral indicating device and ends matching connecting
piping.
1. Indicator: Electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switch.

2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball or butterfly valve with bronze body and threaded ends.
3. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Butterfly valve with cast- or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with
flanged or grooved ends.
2.5 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Sprinkler System Control Valves: UL listed or FMG approved, cast- or ductile-iron body with
flanged or grooved ends, and 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Control valves shall
have 250-psig minimum pressure rating if valves are components of high-pressure piping
system.
1. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, designed for horizontal or vertical installation, with bronze
grooved seat with O-ring seals, single-hinge pin, and latch design. Include trim sets for
bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, retarding chamber, and
fill-line attachment with strainer.
a. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain
piping.
b. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.
B. Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, brass or bronze, NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2-1/2, 400-psig
minimum rating. Include female NPS inlet and outlet, adjustable setting feature, and straight or
90-degree-angle pattern design as indicated.

C. Automatic Drain Valves: UL 1726, NPS 3/4, ball-check device with threaded ends.
D. Double-Check, Detector-Assembly Backflow Preventers:

following:
a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.
d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div.
2. Standards: ASSE 1048 and UL listed or FMG approved.

3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
5. Body: Cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved.
6. End Connections: Flanged.
7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow.
8. Accessories:
a. Valves: UL 262, FMG-approved, OS&Y gate type with flanged ends on inlet and
outlet.
2.6 SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating.
Sprinklers shall have 250-psig minimum pressure rating if sprinklers are components of high-
pressure piping system.
B. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:
1. UL 199, for nonresidential applications.

2. UL 1626, for residential applications.
3. UL 1767, for early-suppression, fast-response applications.
C. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice for "Ordinary" temperature
classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
1. Provide high temperature-rated sprinklers for generator rooms.
D. Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows:
1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate.

2. Extended-coverage sprinklers.
3. Flush ceiling sprinklers, including escutcheon.
4. Pendent sprinklers.
5. Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon.
6. Upright sprinklers.
E. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated, bronze, and painted.
F. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.

G. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat or chrome-plated steel, 2 piece,
with 1-inch vertical adjustment.
H. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
2.7 HOSE CONNECTIONS
A. Description: UL 668, brass or bronze, 300-psig minimum pressure rating, hose valve for
connecting fire hose. Include angle or gate pattern design; female NPS inlet and male hose
outlet; and lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2 as indicated, and
hose valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads.
1. Valve Operation: Nonadjustable type, unless pressure-regulating type is indicated.

2. Finish: Rough metal or chrome-plated.
2.8 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B. Electrically Operated Alarm: UL 464, with 8-inch- minimum-diameter, vibrating-type, metal

alarm bell with red-enamel factory finish and suitable for outdoor use.
C. Water-Flow Indicator: UL 346, electrical-supervision, paddle-operated-type, water-flow detector

with 250-psig pressure rating and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include two
single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V
ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent
false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
D. Pressure Switch: UL 753, electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard feature.

Include single-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and design that operates on rising
pressure and signals water flow.
E. Valve Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with normally
closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
F. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with

normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled indicator-post valve is in other
than fully open position.
2.9 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Description: UL 393, 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch- diameter, dial pressure gage with range of 0 to
250 psig minimum.
1. Water System Piping: Include caption "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" on dial face.

2. Air System Piping: Include retard feature and caption "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" on dial
face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Obtain fire flow data for the existing building in a manner approved by the authority having
jurisdiction (AHJ).
B. If required by the AHJ, perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use
results for system design calculations required in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
C. Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.2 EARTHWORK
3.3 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of piping
connections before installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thicknesses, fire- and smoke-rated construction,
framing for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and stations
are to be installed.
3.4 PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
B. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and
pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground
applications, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Standard-Pressure, Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System, 175-psig Maximum Working Pressure:
1. Sprinkler-Piping Fitting Option: Specialty sprinkler fittings, NPS 3 and smaller, including
mechanical-T and -cross fittings, may be used downstream from sprinkler zone valves.
2. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Threaded-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe;
cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
3. NPS 2: Threaded-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or
malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
4. NPS 2: Grooved-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; grooved-end
fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.
5. NPS 2: Grooved-end, black or galvanized, Schedule 30 steel pipe; grooved-end fittings;
grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.

6. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Threaded-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe;
cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
7. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Grooved-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe;
grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.
8. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Grooved-end, black or galvanized, Schedule 30 steel pipe;
9. NPS 4 to NPS 6: Threaded-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or
malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
10. NPS 4 to NPS 6: Grooved-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe;
11. NPS 4 to NPS 6: Grooved-end, black or galvanized, Schedule 30 steel pipe; grooved-
end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications where
required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
a. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Threaded Joints: Comply with NFPA 13 for pipe thickness and threads. Do not thread pipe
smaller than NPS 8 (DN 200) with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 unless approved by
authorities having jurisdiction and threads are checked by a ring gage and comply with
ASME B1.20.1.
C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts.
1. Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end fittings and
rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Dissimilar-Metal Piping Joints: Construct joints using dielectric fittings compatible with both
piping materials.
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions, couplings, or nipples.

2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.
3. NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange insulation kits.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from
approved working plans.
C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions
in pipe sizes.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. Unions are not required on
flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and
larger connections.
F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,
sized and located according to NFPA 13.
G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
H. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes
when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
I. Install drain valves on standpipes.
J. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves.
Drain to floor drain or outside building.
K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
L. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
1. Install standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14.

2. Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.
M. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake

damage.
N. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of
each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft
metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to
permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
O. Fill wet-standpipe system piping with water.
P. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler system piping with water.
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and trim,
controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water
supply except from fire department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating
portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Specialty Valves:
1. Alarm Check Valves: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including
bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection.
3.10 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate sprinkler types to be used. Where specific types are not indicated, use the
following sprinkler types:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.

2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent, recessed, flush, and concealed sprinklers, as
indicated.
3. Sprinkler Finishes:
a. Upright and Pendent Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to

view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where
exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
b. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.
c. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.
d. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.
3.11 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling

panels and tiles.
3.12 HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum passage restriction.
C. Install NPS 2-1/2 hose connections with quick-disconnect NPS 2-1/2 by NPS 1-1/2 reducer
adapter and flow-restricting device, unless otherwise indicated.
3.13 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and
accessories.
D. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 16.
E. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
F. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

G. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
H. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.14 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 and in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
4. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
5. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
6. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
C. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.
3.17 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.

SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Mechanical sleeve seals.
5. Sleeves.
6. Escutcheons.
7. Grout.
8. Mechanical demolition.
9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
10. Painting and finishing.
11. Supports and anchorages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 1

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Transition fittings.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Escutcheons.
B. Welding certificates.
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place

concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access
that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in
Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless

thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.

2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.

2. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.
3. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's
Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-
cement-joint end.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent

dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.
D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include
brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
E. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173
with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal
band on each end.
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure
at 180 deg F.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig

minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-
face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic

lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates
to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.6 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
2.7 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated

finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed or exposed-rivet hinge, set screw or spring
clips, and chrome-plated finish.
G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.8 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general
demolition requirements and procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated
to be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or

plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork
material.
5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
operational.
7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,

remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity
and quality.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated
finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips and chrome-
plated finish.
d. Bare Piping at Wall, Ceiling, and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-
piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with
concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.
f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw
or spring clips.
g. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate
type.
2. Existing Piping: Use the following:
a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.

b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring
clips.
c. Bare Piping at Wall, Ceiling, and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-
casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
d. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with
concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.
e. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw
or spring clips.
f. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate
type.
M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and
roof slabs.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.

b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board
partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
P. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between
pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.

2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
Q. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 materials.
S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.
3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-
free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9.
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 5 for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.8 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.

SECTION 15055 - MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory- and field-installed motors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Factory-Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a

component of equipment.
B. Field-Installed Motor: A motor installed at Project site and not factory installed as an integral
component of motorized equipment.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for Field-Installed Motors: For each type and size of motor, provide nameplate
data and ratings; shipping, installed, and operating weights; enclosure type and mounting
arrangements; size, type, and location of winding terminations; conduit entry and ground lug
locations; and information on coatings or finishes.
B. Shop Drawings for Field-Installed Motors: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details,
including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the following:
1. Each installed unit's type and details.

2. Nameplate legends.
3. Diagrams of power, signal, and control wiring. Provide schematic wiring diagram for
each type of motor and for each control scheme.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances,
and required area above and around field-installed motors. Show motor layout, mechanical
power transfer link, driven load, and relationship between electrical components and adjacent
structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on
each support. Indicate field measurements.
D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
E. Source quality-control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For field-installed motors to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
MOTORS 15055 - 1
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in
29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational

Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain field-installed motors through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Product Options for Field-Installed Motors: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional
requirements of motors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements."
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
intended use.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices and features that comply
with the following:
1. Compatible with the following:
a. Magnetic controllers.
b. Multispeed controllers.
c. Reduced-voltage controllers.
2. Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for use
throughout speed range without overheating.
3. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.
4. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
B. Coordinate motor support with requirements for driven load; access for maintenance and motor
replacement; installation of accessories, belts, belt guards; and adjustment of sliding rails for
belt tensioning.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Motor requirements apply to factory- and field-installed motors except as follows:
1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for motor are specified in another

Section.
MOTORS 15055 - 2
2. Motorized-equipment manufacturer requires ratings, performance, or characteristics,

other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Motors 3/4 HP and Larger: Three phase.
B. Motors Smaller Than 3/4 HP: Single phase.
C. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
D. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which
motor is connected.
E. Service Factor: 1.15 for open dripproof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.
F. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above
sea level.
G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected
loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating
sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
H. Enclosure: Open dripproof.
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Premium, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed.
D. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
I. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5 hp.
1. Finish: Gray enamel.
MOTORS 15055 - 3
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for
controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control
method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller output.
2. Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation.
3. Insulation: Class H.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
C. Rugged-Duty Motors: Totally enclosed, with 1.25 minimum service factor, greased bearings,
integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings insulated with non-hygroscopic
material.
1. Finish: Chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant primer.
D. Source Quality Control for Field-Installed Motors: Perform the following tests on each motor
according to NEMA MG 1:
1. Measure winding resistance.

2. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.
4. Perform high-potential test.
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor
application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.
C. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
D. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor
shaft; sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.
E. Source Quality Control for Field-Installed Motors: Perform the following tests on each motor
according to NEMA MG 1:
1. Measure winding resistance.

2. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.
MOTORS 15055 - 4
4. Perform high-potential test.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive field-installed motors for compliance with requirements, installation
tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before
motor installation.
3.2 FIELD-INSTALLED MOTOR INSTALLATION
A. Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and sized
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and align with load
transfer link.
B. Install motors on concrete bases complying with Division 3.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR FIELD-INSTALLED MOTORS
A. Prepare for acceptance tests.
1. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys, and belts. Tension belts according to
2. Verify bearing lubrication.
3. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and speed at
motor design load.
4. Test interlocks and control and safety features for proper operation.
5. Verify that current and voltage for each phase comply with nameplate rating and
NEMA MG 1 tolerances.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Perform electrical tests and visual and mechanical inspections including optional tests
and inspections stated in NETA ATS on factory- and field-installed motors. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
MOTORS 15055 - 5
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and
other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean motors, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
MOTORS 15055 - 6
SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and
equipment:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
1. Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for pipe hangers for fire-protection piping.
2. Division 15 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.
C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval
from authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 1

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.

2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and
installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.

2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
C. Welding certificates.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
4. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
C. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
D. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels

and other components.
B. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
C. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal

shield.
B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.
C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.
D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient
air temperature.
2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated or stainless steel, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel

shapes.
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, and at changes in

direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and
install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building
services piping) are not exceeded.
M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:
1. Equipment nameplates.
2. Equipment markers.
3. Equipment signs.
4. Access panel and door markers.
5. Pipe markers.
6. Duct markers.
7. Stencils.
8. Valve tags.
9. Valve schedules.
10. Warning tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
C. Valve numbering scheme.
D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies)
to include in maintenance manuals.
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices
for piping.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 - 1

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent

adhesive.
1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.

2. Data:
a. Name and plan number.

b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,
and speed.
3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for
equipment.
B. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch- thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviated
terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for attachment.
1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service,
and showing direction of flow.
1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each
application length.
3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers
extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type
pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.
5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or
as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
B. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor
barrier.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive

back.
D. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive,
permanent-type, self-adhesive back.

1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch
minimum.
2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2
inches minimum.
2.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of
airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type, permanent
adhesive.
2.4 STENCILS
A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height
of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door
markers, equipment markers, equipment signs, and similar operational instructions.
1. Stencil Material: Metal or fiberboard.

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel black, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may
be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless
2.5 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-
inch numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Engineer. Provide 5/32-inch hole for
fastener.
1. Material: 0.032-inch- thick brass.

2. Material: 3/32-inch- thick laminated plastic with 2 black surfaces and white inner layer.
3. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
2.6 VALVE SCHEDULES
A. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or
space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification.
Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry

walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws.
2. Frame: Finished hardwood or extruded aluminum.
3. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness
glass.
2.7 WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card

stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT
OPERATE.
4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than
single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's
option.
3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical
equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers may be omitted if
both are indicated.
1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the
size of principal lettering.
2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.
3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general
categories of equipment:
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units
such as gas outlets.
b. Fire department hose valves and hose stations.
c. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
d. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units.
e. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
f. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and
similar equipment.
g. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
h. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
i. Tanks and pressure vessels.
j. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.
B. Stenciled Equipment Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of laminated-
plastic equipment markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for
proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.
C. Stenciled Equipment Sign Option: Stenciled signs may be provided instead of laminated-plastic
equipment signs, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper
identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.
D. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.

3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow
indication arrows showing direction of flow.
1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Self-adhesive pipe markers.
Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4 inch wide, lapped at least 1-1/2
inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.
2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers. Use
size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.
3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe markers.
Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 3
inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.
B. Stenciled Pipe Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of manufactured
pipe markers, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe markers with painted, color-coded
bands or rectangles complying with ASME A13.1 on each piping system.
1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
C. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior
nonconcealed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.
3.4 DUCT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:
1. Green: For cold-air supply ducts.

2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.
3. Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.
4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.
5. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the
size of principal lettering.
B. Stenciled Duct Marker Option: Stenciled markers, showing service and direction of flow, may
be provided instead of laminated-plastic duct markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger
than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of
required identification.

C. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals
of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets;
convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar
roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.

b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.
c. Condenser Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.
d. Chilled Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.
e. Fire Protection: 1-1/2 inches, round.
f. Gas: 1-1/2 inches, round.
g. Steam: 1-1/2 inches, round.
2. Valve-Tag Color: Comply with ASME A13.1.

3. Letter Color: Comply with ASME A13.1.
3.6 VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION
A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.
3.7 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by
other work.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.

SECTION 15081 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation; insulating
cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for

penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
3. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Removable insulation sections at access panels.

2. Application of field-applied jackets.
3. Applications at linkages for control devices.
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those

specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and
DUCT INSULATION 15081 - 1

sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

rating of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin on
segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
d. Schuller International, Inc.
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from
kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
aluminum foil.

2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..
1. Tape Width: 4 inches.
B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.

2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.
4. Brass: 0.010 inch thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.
C. Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch,

soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
D. Weld-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge
welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
1. Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the attached surface.
E. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface

temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of
100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of
ducts and fittings.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each duct system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation
continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor
retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.

2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation

to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.
1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-
retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair
punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with
outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.

O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.

2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously

through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least
2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
Q. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.
R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support at
top of floor.
1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation
ends with vapor-retarder mastic.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square

foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline
of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips
to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.

5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.

6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2
inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive
tape having same facing as insulation.
7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment
for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface
with 6-inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating
sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated
to receive vapor retarder.
3.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-
applied jackets.
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of jacket manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer’s recommended adheseive.
4. Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch wide joint strips at end
joints.
3.6 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in
Division 9 Section "Painting."
3.7 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this
Section.
C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:
1. Interior concealed supply.

2. Interior concealed return.
3. Interior concealed outside-air ductwork and plenums (exposed with be lined, refer to
Division 15 Section “Metal Ducts”)

D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Fibrous-glass ducts.
2. Metal ducts with duct liner.
3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
4. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Vibration-control devices.
7. Testing agency labels and stamps.
8. Nameplates and data plates.
9. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.
3.8 INTERIOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Interior.
1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.

2. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches.
3. Number of Layers: One.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field-
applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for

penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums.
3. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection
saddles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of
insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
6. Application of field-applied jackets.
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 1

A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those

specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and
sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing
and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have
satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
d. Schuller International, Inc.

2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the
following:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied, all-
purpose, vapor-retarder jacket.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and grades:
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber insulation,
for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced
glass-fiber insulation.
b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor

applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
5. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196.
7. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
B. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used
in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
aluminum foil.
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or
field cutting and forming.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.
3. PVC Jacket Color: Color-code piping jackets based on materials contained within the
piping system.
D. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-mil- thick,
high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.
1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply
covers for lavatories for the disabled.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
E. Aluminum Jacket: Factory cut and rolled to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209, 3003
alloy, H-14 temper.
2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..
1. Tape Width: 4 inches.
B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.

2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.
4. Brass: 0.010 inch thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.
C. Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch,

soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of
piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each piping system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.

E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-
retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying
insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.
1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on
anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends.
Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and
shield.
M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper
insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.

2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip and spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with
vapor-retarder mastic.

P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.

2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top
of roof flashing.
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate insulation
flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.
R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors.
S. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.
1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where floor
supports penetrate vapor retarder.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-
retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to
form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6
inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal
tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping
seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections
of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe
insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insulation
jackets at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments
and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket insulation
to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve
operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to
stainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting
covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and
vapor-retarder mastic.
5. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas
jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
3.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-
applied jackets.
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of jacket manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at
end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
D. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant
recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with bands compatible with metal
jacket 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.
3.6 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in
Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of the
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.

3.7 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
2. Vibration-control devices.
3. Fire-suppression piping.
4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.
A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation
materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Architect.
B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance

with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these
Specifications.
C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to
these Specifications.
3.9 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders, and
field-applied jackets.
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,
thickness, and jacket requirements.
3.10 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Domestic hot and recirculated hot water, domestic cold water, non-potable water,
water source heat pump condenser water piping, and HVAC condensate.
1. Operating Temperature: 32 to 140 deg F.

2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber.
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Pipes 1-1/2-inch and smaller: 1”.

b. Pipes 2 to 5-inch: 1-1/2”.
c. Pipes 6-inch and larger: 2”.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.


6. Finish: Painted if exposed.
B. Service Piping in the Crawl Space: Domestic cold water, fire protection water, and condenser
water.

3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Pipes 1-1/2-inch and smaller: 1-1/2”.

b. Pipes 2 to 5-inch: 2”.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.

6. Finish: Painted if exposed.
C. Service: Exposed sanitary drains and domestic water supplies and stops for fixtures for the
disabled.

3. Insulation Thickness: 1”.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: PVC P-trap and supply covers.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: No.
6. Finish: None.

SECTION 15110 - VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general-duty valves.
1. Division 13 fire-suppression piping and fire pump Sections for fire-protection valves.
2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts.
3. Division 15 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves:
1. CWP: Cold working pressure.

2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
4. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
5. SWP: Steam working pressure.
6. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve
design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions;
and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated
capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.1 for power piping valves and ASME B31.9 for building
services piping valves.
1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water, sanitary waste, and storm drainage piping
valves unless referenced.
B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and
design criteria.
VALVES 15110 - 1
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVES, GENERAL
A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Valve Actuators:
1. Gear Drive: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger.

2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
3. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.
4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10
plug valves, for each size square plug head.
G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and
ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.
I. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
VALVES 15110 - 2
1. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate, and globe
valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.
J. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
K. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
2.2 COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES
A. Copper-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.
B. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with regular-port, chrome-plated
bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.
C. Three-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with regular-port, chrome-plated
bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.
2.3 FERROUS-ALLOY BALL VALVES
A. Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-72, with flanged ends.
B. Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves: Class 150, full or regular port.
2.4 FERROUS-ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-67, Type I, for tight shutoff, with disc and
lining suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanged, 175-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Flanged-end type with one- or
two-piece stem.
C. Grooved-End, 175-psig CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Ductile-iron or steel body
with grooved or shouldered ends.
2.5 TRIPLE DUTY VALVES
A. Triple Duty Valves: Straight pattern valve designed to perform the functions of a non-slam
check valve, throttling valve, shutoff valve, and calibration balancing valve.
1. Construction: Heavy duty cast ductile iron construction with standard 125 psig ANSI
flanged connections and rated for 175 psig maximum working pressure.
2. Features: Bronze seat, replaceable bronze disc with EPDM seat insert, stainless steel
stem, and chatter preventing spring and calibrated nameplate.
3. Valve design shall permit repacking under full system pressure.
4. Valve shall be equipped with brass readout valve (with integral check valve) for taking
differential pressure readings across the orifice for accurate system balance.
2.6 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.
VALVES 15110 - 3
B. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and union-ring bonnet.
C. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and union-ring
bonnet.
D. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and renewable seat.
Include union-ring bonnet.
2.7 CAST-IRON GLOBE VALVES
A. Cast-Iron Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-85.
B. Type I, Class 125, Cast-Iron Globe Valves: Gray-iron body with bronze seats.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated,
use the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Service: Ball, butterfly, or globe valves.
3. Pump Discharge: Triple duty or spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
VALVES 15110 - 4
C. Chilled-Water, Condenser-Water, Heating Water, and Domestic Water Piping: Use the
following types of valves:
1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two or three-piece, 600-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
2. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy.
3. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged, 175-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy,
with EPDM liner.
4. Triple Duty Valves: Flanged, 175-psig CWP rating, cast ductile iron.
5. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, bronze.
6. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze-mounted cast iron.
D. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends, except provide
valves with threaded ends for condenser water and heating hot water services.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded ends.
3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded ends.
6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
construction.
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
VALVES 15110 - 5
SECTION 15122 - METERS AND GAGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following meters and gages for mechanical systems:
1. Thermometers.
2. Gages.
3. Test plugs.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Schedule for thermometers and gages indicating manufacturer's number,
scale range, and location for each.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of thermometer and gage, signed by product manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Case: Die-cast aluminum or chrome-plated brass, 7 inches long.
B. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens.
C. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings.
D. Window: Glass or plastic.
E. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device.
METERS AND GAGES 15122 - 1

F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit
installation.
G. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5
percent of range.
2.2 PLASTIC-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Case: Plastic, 7 inches long.
B. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens.

markings.
locking device.
F. Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
G. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5
percent of range.
2.3 DUCT-TYPE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Case: Metal or plastic, 7 inches long.
B. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic filled, with magnifying lens.

markings.
locking device.
F. Stem: Metal, for installation in mounting bracket and of length to suit installation.
G. Mounting Bracket: Flanged fitting for attachment to duct and made to hold thermometer stem.
H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5
percent of range.
2.4 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: Direct-mounting, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers complying with

ASME B40.3.
B. Case: Liquid-filled type, stainless steel with 5-inch diameter.

C. Element: Bimetal coil.
D. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
E. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
F. Window: Glass or plastic.
G. Ring: Stainless steel.
H. Connector: Adjustable angle type.
I. Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
J. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5
percent of range.
2.5 THERMOWELLS
A. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.
B. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,
diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.
2.6 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: Indicating-dial type complying with

ASME B40.100.
1. Case: Liquid-filled type, metal or plastic, 4-1/2-inch diameter.

2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is
indicated.
4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.
7. Window: Glass or plastic.
8. Ring: Metal or plastic.
9. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.
10. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
B. Pressure-Gage Fittings:
1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type.

2. Syphons: NPS 1/4 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.
3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous-metal
disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
2.7 TEST PLUGS

A. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed
and threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping.
B. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.
C. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves.
1. Insert material for air, water, oil, or gas service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be CR.
2. Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F shall be EPDM.
2.8 FLOW INDICATORS
A. Description: Instrument for installation in piping systems for visual verification of flow.
B. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body; with sight glass and plastic pelton-wheel
indicator, and threaded or flanged ends.
C. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.
D. Temperature Rating: 200 deg F.
E. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.
F. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS
A. Install liquid-in-glass thermometers in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.

2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in water source heat pump units.
3. Outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts.
B. Install liquid-filled-case-type, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers at suction and discharge of

each pump.
C. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:
1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 180 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.

2. Domestic Cold Water: 30 to 130 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
3. Condenser Water: 0 to 160 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
4. Air Ducts: 30 to 240 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS
A. Install dry-case-type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
B. Install liquid-filled-case-type pressure gages at chilled- and condenser-water inlets and outlets
of chillers.

C. Install liquid-filled-case-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.
3.3 INSTALLATIONS
A. Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of diameter of pipe and in vertical position in
piping tees where thermometers are indicated.
C. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct thermometers are
indicated. Attach to duct with screws.
D. Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most
readable position.
E. Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except
steam).
F. Install test plugs in tees in piping.
G. Install flow indicators, in accessible positions for easy viewing, in piping systems.
H. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.
I. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance for meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
C. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building.
B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water-service piping outside the building from
source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.
2. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, and fittings.
3. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with
125 psig, unless otherwise indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Water Samples: Specified in Part 3 "Cleaning" Article.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through
9," for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 1

A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting
the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be
joined.
A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-

copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300
flanges if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-
socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-

copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300
flanges if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-
socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
2.3 VALVES
A. Bronze and cast-iron, general-duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
B. Balancing and drain valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.2 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
copper tubing.

D. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size
range:
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered
joints.
2. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and
soldered joints.
3. NPS 2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and
soldered joints.
5. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L with grooved ends; copper grooved-
end fittings; grooved-end-tube couplings; and grooved joints.
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-iron
butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-iron
butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3. Hot-Water-Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.
4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures
that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use
butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,
and where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
D. Install calibrated balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side
of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use
ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
Balancing valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
B. Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

D. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make
installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
E. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Pressure gages are specified in
Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages," and drain valves and strainers are specified in
Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
F. Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves. Water-pressure regulators

are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
G. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.
H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool
designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop,
and braze branch tube into collar.
A. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls, if indicated.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.
7. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.
F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and
connect to the following:
1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Test domestic water piping as follows:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to

provide flow of hot water in each branch.
b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or as described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building and
to locations indicated.
1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for soil, waste, and vent piping systems
specialties.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and rubber piping materials:

2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Shop Drawings: For sovent drainage system, include plans, elevations, sections, and details.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 1

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping;
"NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and
"NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with
elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion-
resistant metal band on each end.
C. Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type
coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
2.2 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPING
A. Hub-and-Spigot Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
B. Hubless Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
1. Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and

ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
a. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304,

stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.
1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch- wide shield with 4 bands.

2) NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch- wide shield with 6 bands.
b. Heavy-Duty, FM-Approved Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel

housing; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.
1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch- wide housing with 2 bands.

2) NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch- wide housing with 2 bands.
c. Heavy-Duty, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48, 2-piece, cast-iron housing;

stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and sleeve.
d. Compact, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310 with ASTM A 167, Type 301, or
ASTM A 666, Type 301, stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands;
and sleeve.
1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 2-1/8-inch- wide shield with 2 bands.

2) NPS 5 and NPS 6: 3-inch- wide shield with 4 bands.

3) NPS 8 and NPS 10: 4-inch- wide shield with 4 bands.
4) NPS 12 and NPS 15: 5-1/2-inch- wide shield with 6 bands.
2.3 PVC PIPING
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, solid-wall drain, waste, and vent.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste,
and vent patterns.
B. Cellular-Core, Schedule 40, PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
C. Cellular-Core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Series PS 100.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns and to fit Series PS 100 sewer and drain pipe.
D. PVC Special Fittings: ASTM F 409, drainage-pattern tube and tubular fittings with ends as
required for application.
2.4 PE ENCASEMENT
A. PE Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, PE film, 0.008-
inch minimum thickness, tube or sheet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may
be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each
size range:
1. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Use NPS 1-1/2 hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the
following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.

b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FM approved.

2. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
3. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:

D. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each
size range:
1. NPS 1-1/2: Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:

2. NPS 1-1/2: PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
3. NPS 1-1/2: Cellular-core, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
4. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
5. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:

6. NPS 2 to NPS 4: PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
7. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Cellular-core, Schedule 40, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-
cemented joints.
8. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Use NPS 3 and NPS 4 cellular-core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC
pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
9. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
10. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:

11. NPS 5 and NPS 6: PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
12. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Cellular-core, Schedule 40, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and
solvent-cemented joints.
13. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Use NPS 6 cellular-core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC pipe; PVC
socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
installation.
B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
C. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.
D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.

E. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make
installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
for wall penetration systems.
F. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Encase underground piping with PE film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
G. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be
used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,
double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with
common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
H. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades
and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.
Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants,
cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint
as completed.
I. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
J. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if
slab is without membrane waterproofing.
K. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.
L. Install underground ABS and PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
M. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
construction.
B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.
C. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.
Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
4. NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod.
6. NPS 15: 60 inches with 1-inch rod.
7. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to
60 inches.
F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.
G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing
Specialties."
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must
be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction
or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and
vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water
to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before
inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for
leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled
with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack
openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping
system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of
water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, special-duty valves, and hydronic specialties for condenser water
systems (ground source heat pump piping inside the building), condensate drain piping, and
glycol solution.
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods for sealing pipe
penetrations through exterior walls.
2. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for general piping
materials and installation requirements.
3. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe supports, product descriptions, and
installation requirements. Hanger and support spacing is specified in this Section.
4. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check
valves.
5. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, flow meters, and pressure
gages.
6. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying hydronic
piping.
7. Division 15 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic
piping.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve indicated. Include flow and pressure drop
curves based on manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings, calibrated balancing valves, and
automatic flow-control valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies,
alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the building structure.
Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the
following:
1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
HYDRONIC PIPING 15181 - 1

E. Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME
label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components with
other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system
components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
E. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor
assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting
materials.
A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.
B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.
C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.
D. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
E. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
F. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony.

G. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver).
2.3 VALVES
A. Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
B. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve.
C. Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, ball type, 125-psig working
pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, and having threaded ends. Valves shall
have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with
integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.
D. Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron or steel body, ball type, 125-psig
working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, and having flanged or grooved
connections. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential
pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.
E. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with low inlet pressure
check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and noncorrosive valve seat
and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be
factory set at operating pressure and have capability for field adjustment.
F. Safety Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with brass and rubber, wetted,
internal working parts; shall suit system pressure and heat capacity and shall comply with the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV.
2.4 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 225
deg F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with NPS 1/8
discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection.
B. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and
nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 240 deg F operating temperature; with
NPS 1/4 discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection.
C. Expansion Tanks: Welded carbon steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F
maximum operating temperature. Separate air charge from system water to maintain design
expansion capacity by a flexible diaphragm or bladder securely sealed into tank. Include drain
fitting and taps for pressure gage and air-charging fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel legs
or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Factory fabricate and test tank with taps
and supports installed and labeled according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section VIII, Division 1.
D. Diverting Fittings: 125-psig working pressure; 250 deg F maximum operating temperature;
cast-iron body with threaded ends, or wrought copper with soldered ends. Indicate flow
direction on fitting.
E. Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged
ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller, bolted cover,
perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.

F. Basket Strainers: 125-psig working pressure; high-tensile cast-iron body (ASTM A 126,
Class B), flanged-end connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom
drain connection.
G. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing

protective jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating
temperature. Connectors shall have flanged- or threaded-end connections to match equipment
connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.
H. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber-reinforced rubber body with steel flanges drilled
to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating temperatures up to 250 deg F and
pressures up to 150 psig.
I. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 150-psig minimum working pressure, steel pipe fitting
consisting of telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit rods, flanged
ends, and chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe telescoping section.
2.5 Glycol Solution
A. Propylene Glycol: Provide Dow Chemical Dowfrost or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Condenser Water, NPS 4 and Smaller: Aboveground, use Type L drawn-temper copper tubing
with soldered joints. Belowground or within slabs, use Type K annealed-temper copper tubing
with brazed joints.
B. Condensate Drain Lines:
1. Interior: Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints.
A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types:
1. Shutoff Duty: Gate, ball, and butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Globe, ball, and butterfly valves.
B. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to
each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch line.
Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to
each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install calibrated balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or cooling element
and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.
D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
installation requirements.
B. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing
of valves.
C. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple
with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
D. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
E. Slope condensate drain piping at a uniform grade of 1 percent (1/8” per foot) downward in
direction of flow.
F. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe,
with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, install the takeoff
coming out the top of the main pipe.
H. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve,
in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown
connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers
smaller than NPS 2.
I. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports." Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing of supports.
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or
longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from
scratching pipe.
C. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

D. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint construction
requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded, welded, and flanged
joints in steel piping; and solvent-welded joints for PVC piping.
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required
for system air venting.
B. Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system piping,
at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.
C. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and outlet of each pump, drycooler, and AC unit.
D. Install dip-tube fittings in boiler outlet. Install piping to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward
slope toward tank. Connect boiler-outlet piping.
E. Install expansion tanks above air separator. Install gage glass and cocks on end of tank. Install
tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper
water level in tank.
1. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank,
piping connections, and fittings, plus weight of a full tank of water. Do not overload
building components and structural members.
3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control valves
are installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in
flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
B. Provide 20% glycol solution.
C. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due
to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be
used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air.
Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of
water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel,
pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure
at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield
strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, "Building Services
Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Test and inspect condensate drain piping for leaks. Repair any leaks found.
7. Prepare written report of testing.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has
been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.

2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
3. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating
freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
4. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
5. Lubricate motors and bearings.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens.
After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable
fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.
3.11 FLUID ANALYSIS
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to verify the type and quantity of glycol concentration.

SECTION 15185 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating
characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of
product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates
for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of hydronic
pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
intended use.
D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
HYDRONIC PUMPS 15185 - 1

A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces
and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe
openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
B. Store pumps in dry location.
C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.
D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:

2.2 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.

2. Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries.
3. Grundfos Pumps Corporation.
4. Little Giant Pump Co.; Subsidiary of Tecumseh Products Co.
5. PACO Pumps.
6. Peerless Pump; a Member of the Sterling Fluid Systems Group.
7. Taco, Inc.
B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, in-

line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor
shafts mounted horizontally or vertically. Rate pump for 175-psig minimum working pressure
and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F.
C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage
tappings at inlet and outlet, and threaded companion-flange connections.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft,
and secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified performance.
3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.
4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel
spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor
and seal.
5. Packing Seal: Stuffing box, with a minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided
yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing
gland.
6. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings or oil lubricated; bronze-journal or
thrust type.
D. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated; and
rigidly mounted to pump casing. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
E. Capacities and Characteristics: Refer to schedule on drawings.
2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Triple-Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump-
discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.
Brass gage ports with integral check valve, and orifice for flow measurement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
pump installation.
3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Comply with HI 1.4.
B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and
weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
D. Suspend vertically mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps independent of piping. Install pumps with
motor and pump shafts vertical. Use continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with
vertical-limit stop of sufficient size to support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are

specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Hanger and
support materials are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
E. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open
drain.
3.3 ALIGNMENT
A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundation, grout has been
set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and piping connections have been made.
B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in HI 1.1-
1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation."
D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill
baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in
place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.
D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
E. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps.
F. Install Y-type strainer and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.
G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between
pump casing and valves.
H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure-gage tapping, or
install single gage with multiple input selector valve.
I. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
J. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
K. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.

3. Clean strainers on suction piping.
4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is
free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
6. Start motor.
7. Open discharge valve slowly.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures."

SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and related components.
1. Division 15 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers."

2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers and specialty fixtures
not in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with
disabilities.
B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in
this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts,
drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included
where indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances,
appurtenances, equipment, and supports and indicate materials and finishes, dimensions,
construction details, and flow-control rates for each type of fixture indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category
through one source from a single manufacturer.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 1

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that
category.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
intended use.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-
336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy
Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for
fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing
fixtures:
1. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.

2. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
3. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory
and sink faucets:
1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M.
2. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.
3. Faucet Hose: ASTM D 3901.
4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M.
5. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
7. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
8. NSF Materials: NSF 61.
9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
11. Supply and Drain Fittings: ASME A112.18.1M.
I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for shower
faucets:
1. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets:

ASSE 1016.
2. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M.
3. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices: ASTM F 445.
5. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
7. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
8. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.

J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1M.
3. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
4. Plastic Tubular Fittings and Piping: ASTM F 409.
5. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
6. Tubular Brass Drainage Fittings and Piping: ASME A112.18.1M.
K. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.

2. Floor Drains: ASME A112.21.1M.
3. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
5. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.
7. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
8. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be
installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
2. Faucet, Flow-Control Fittings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
3. Supply, Flow-Control Fittings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
4. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed.
5. Provide hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, with separate
compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above.
6. Twelve additional cartridges for waterless urinals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS
A. Lavatory Faucet: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies
and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
1. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Body Material: Copper or brass underbody with brass cover plate.

3. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
4. Type: Sensor controlled mixing.
5. Centers: 4 inches.
6. Handle(s): N/A.
7. Spout: Rigid.
8. Spout Outlet: Spray, 0.5 gpm.
9. Operation: Sensor (AC powered).
10. Drain: Grid.
11. Tempering Device: Thermostatic.
2.2 SINK FAUCETS
A. Service Basin Faucet: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with
supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
1. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Body Material: Cast brass.
3. Finish: Rough brass.
4. Type: Faucet with stops in shanks, vacuum breaker, hose-thread outlet, and pail hook.
5. Mixing Valve: Two-lever handle.
6. Centers: 8 inches.
7. Handles: Wrist blade, 4 inches.
8. Spout: Rigid, cast service sink.
9. Spout Outlet: Hose thread.
10. Drain: Grid.
11. Tempering Device: Not required.
2.3 FLUSHOMETERS
A. Flushometer: Cast-brass body with corrosion-resistant internal components, non-hold-open

feature, control stop with check valve, vacuum breaker, and copper or brass tubing, and
polished chrome-plated finish on exposed parts.
1. Internal Design: Diaphragm or piston operation.

2. Style: Exposed.
3. Inlet Size: NPS 1.
4. Trip Mechanism: Oscillating, lever-handle actuator.
2.4 TOILET SEATS
A. Toilet Seat: Solid plastic.
1. Configuration: Open front without cover.

2. Size: Elongated.
3. Class: Standard commercial.
4. Color: White.
2.5 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Guard: Manufactured, plastic enclosure for covering for hot- and cold-
water supplies and trap and drain piping and complying with ADA requirements.
2.6 FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Water-Closet Support: Water-closet combination carrier designed for accessible and standard
mounting height. Include single or double, vertical or horizontal, hub-and-spigot or hubless
waste fitting as required for piping arrangement; faceplates; couplings with gaskets; feet; and
fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate,
and feet for installation in wide pipe space.
B. Urinal Support: Type II, urinal carrier with hanger and bearing plates. Include steel uprights
with feet.
1. Accessible Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
C. Lavatory Support: Type III, lavatory carrier with hanger plate and tie rod. Include steel uprights
with feet.
1. Accessible Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
D. Sink Support: Type III, sink carrier with hanger plate and exposed arms. Include steel uprights
with feet.
2.7 WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets: Accessible, floor-mounting, floor-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for

flushometer valve operation.
1. Manufacturers:
a. American Standard, Inc.

b. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products
c. Kohler Co.
d. Sloan Valve Co.
2. Supply: NPS 1 chrome-plated brass or copper with stop.

3. Style: Flushometer valve.
a. Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design. Include bolt caps matching fixture.
b. Height: Standard and accessible.
c. Design Consumption: 1.28 gal./flush.
d. Color: White.
4. Flushometer: Top spud.

5. Toilet Seat: Elongated open front, white.
2.8 URINALS

following:

a. Falcon Waterfree Technologies.

b. Waterless Co.
c. Sloan Valve Co.
2. Description Accessible, wall-mounting, back-outlet dry, vitreous-china fixture designed for

liquid-trap-seal operation.
a. Type: Without water supply.

b. Trap-Seal Method: Proprietary cartridge or trap system.
c. Color: White.
d. Outlet Size: NPS 2. Include transition coupling, if required.
e. Trap-Sealing Liquid: Proprietary.
f. Fixture Support: Urinal chair carrier.
2.9 SERVICE BASINS
A. Service Basins: Flush-to-wall, floor-mounting precast terrazzo basin with rim guard.
1. Products:
a. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products

b. Precast Terrazzo Enterprises, Inc.
2. Shape: Square.
3. Size: 24 by 24 inches.
4. Height: 10 inches.
5. Color: White with black accents.
6. Faucet: Sink.
7. Drain: Grid with NPS 3 outlet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for water soil and for waste piping systems and supports to verify actual
locations and sizes of piping connections and that locations and types of supports match those
indicated, before plumbing fixture installation. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data if roughing-
in data are not indicated.
B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
3.2 FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A. Assemble fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written
instructions.
B. For wall-hanging fixtures, install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate.
1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-hanging fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building

substrate.
E. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
F. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions and roughing-in
drawings.
G. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valve if stops are not specified with fixture. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.
H. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.
I. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide
side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities
to reach.
J. Install toilet seats on water closets.
K. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are
not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
L. Install traps on fixture outlets.
1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
M. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for escutcheons.
N. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Connect fixtures with water supplies,
stops, risers, traps, and waste piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. Connect to
plumbing piping.
C. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.
B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.
C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
fittings, and controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.
C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods
and materials. Do the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers
and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

SECTION 15415 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Pressure water coolers.

2. Fixture supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible Drinking Fountain and Water Cooler: Fixture that can be approached and used by
people with disabilities.
B. Drinking Fountain: Fixture with nozzle for delivering stream of water for drinking.
C. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of fixture.
D. Fixture: Drinking fountain or water cooler, unless one is specifically indicated.
E. Water Cooler: Electrically powered fixture for generating and delivering cooled drinking water.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each type of fixture indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
intended use.
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 15415 - 1

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-
336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; about fixtures for people with disabilities.
C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for
fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
D. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, "Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-
Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers"
for type and style classifications.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be installed to
comply with original design and referenced standards.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Filter Cartridges: One for each type of fixture installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS
A. Water Coolers: Accessible, ARI 1010, Type PB, pressure with bubbler, Style W, wall-hanging
fixture.
1. Products:
a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.

b. Halsey Taylor
c. Haws Corporation
d. Oasis Corp.
2. Cabinet: Bilevel with two attached cabinets, enameled steel with stainless-steel top.
3. Bubbler: One, with automatic stream regulator, located on each cabinet deck.
4. Control: Push button.
5. Supply: NPS 3/8 with ball, gate, or globe valve and filter.
6. Drains: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 minimum horizontal waste and trap complying with
ASME A112.18.1M.
7. Cooling System: Electric, with hermetically sealed compressor, cooling coil, air-cooled
condensing unit, corrosion-resistant tubing, refrigerant, corrosion-resistant-metal storage
tank, and adjustable thermostat.
a. Capacity: 8 gph of 50 deg F cooled water from 80 deg F inlet water and 90 deg F
ambient air temperature.
b. Electrical Characteristics: 1/5 hp; 120-V ac; single phase; 60 Hz.

8. Support: Type II, water-cooler carrier. Refer to "Fixture Supports" Article.
2.2 FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Off-Floor, Plumbing Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M, water-cooler carriers. Include

vertical, steel uprights with feet and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs matching
fixture to be supported.
1. Type II: Bilevel, hanger-type carrier with three vertical uprights.

2. Supports for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights instead of
steel pipe uprights.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping and types of
supports match those indicated.
B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Use carrier off-floor supports for wall-hanging fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view. Plain
copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-hanging fixtures, unless
B. Install fixtures level and plumb.
C. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations where they can be
easily reached for operation. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.
D. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage
system.
E. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern
escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Refer to Division 15 Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for escutcheons.

F. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant,
silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.
C. Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.
D. Ground equipment.

A. Water-Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements
are made.
C. Report test results in writing.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.
B. Adjust water-cooler temperature settings.
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,
and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following plumbing specialties:
1. Balancing valves.
2. Strainers.
3. Drain valves.
4. Miscellaneous piping specialties.
5. Sleeve penetration systems.
6. Flashing materials.
7. Cleanouts.
8. Floor drains.
1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters, thermometers, and pressure
gages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:

3. PUR: Polyurethane plastic.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig.

2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 1

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate
materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components;
and piping and wiring connections for the following:
1. Balancing valves and strainers.

2. Water hammer arresters, air vents, and trap seal primer valves and systems.
3. Drain valves, hose bibbs, and hydrants.
4. Backwater valves, cleanouts, floor drains, open receptors, and roof drains.
5. Air-admittance valves, vent caps, vent terminals, and roof flashing assemblies.
6. Sleeve penetration systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field test reports.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of plumbing
specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
B. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
intended use.
D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping materials
and installation.
E. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
domestic water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water
piping and "NSF-dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.
2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sections 1
through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BALANCING VALVES
A. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Adjustable, with two readout ports and memory setting indicator.
Include manufacturer's standard hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying
case.
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with brass ball, adjustment knob, calibrated nameplate,
and threaded or solder-joint ends.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron, Y-pattern body with bronze disc and flanged or
grooved ends.

2.2 DRAIN VALVES
A. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, NPS 3/4 ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum CWP.
Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable
seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads and cap.
B. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 200-psig minimum CWP or
MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body, with NPS 1/8 side drain outlet and
cap.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, metal-bellows type with pressurized
metal cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A
through F.
B. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with replaceable seat disc complying with ASME A112.18.1M for
compression-type faucets. Include NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet, of design
suitable for pressure of at least 125 psig; integral nonremovable, drainable hose-connection
vacuum breaker; and garden-hose threads complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet.
1. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.

2. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze.
3. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
4. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
5. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle.
6. Operation for Finished Rooms: Wheel handle.
7. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
8. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.
C. Air Vents: Float type for automatic air venting.
1. Bolted Construction: Bronze body with replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal float and
stainless-steel mechanism and seat; threaded NPS 3/8 minimum inlet; 125-psig minimum
pressure rating at 140 deg F; and threaded vent outlet.
2. Welded Construction: Stainless-steel body with corrosion-resistant metal float, stainless-
steel mechanism and seat, threaded NPS 3/8 minimum inlet, 150-psig minimum pressure
rating, and threaded vent outlet.
D. Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron,
soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser
fitting, joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.
E. Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap
seal primer valve connection.
F. Fixed Air-Gap Fittings: Manufactured cast-iron or bronze drainage fitting with semiopen top with
threads or device to secure drainage inlet piping in top and bottom spigot or threaded outlet
larger than top inlet. Include design complying with ASME A112.1.2 that will provide fixed air
gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.

G. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for
terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
H. Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented
hood and set-screws to secure to vent pipe.
I. Vent Terminals: Commercially manufactured, shop- or field-fabricated, frost-proof assembly

constructed of galvanized steel, copper, or lead-coated copper. Size to provide 1-inch enclosed
air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with counterflashing.
J. Expansion Joints: ASME A112.21.2M, assembly with cast-iron body with bronze sleeve,
packing gland, and packing; of size and end types corresponding to connected piping.
2.4 SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS
A. Description: UL 1479, through-penetration firestop assembly consisting of sleeve and stack

fitting with firestopping plug.
1. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing
flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
2. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye-branch stack fitting with
neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness in branch.
Include PVC protective cap for plug.
a. Special Coating: Include corrosion-resistant interior coating on fittings for plastic

chemical waste and vent stacks.
2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights
and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 4-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.
3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft..

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft..
C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-
inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill-
phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum
thickness.
E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
2.6 CLEANOUTS
A. Cleanouts: Comply with ASME A112.36.2M.
1. Application: Floor and wall cleanouts for installation in exposed and concealed piping.
2. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron.
3. Outlet Connection: Threaded.
4. Closure: Brass plug with tapered threads.
5. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.
6. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy in concealed spaces
and stainless steel in exposed spaces.
7. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
8. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
2.7 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Floor Drains: Comply with ASME A112.21.1M.
1. Application: Floor drain.

2. Body Material: Gray iron.
3. Seepage Flange: Required.
4. Outlet: Bottom or side.
5. Sediment Bucket
6. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
7. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
8. Top Shape: Round or square.
9. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.
10. Inlet Fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap seal
primer valve connection.
11. Trap Material: Cast iron.
12. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
13. Trap Features: Trap seal primer valve drain connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
C. Install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping below
floors.
D. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished
wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.
E. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors
with waterproof membrane.
F. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance
between vent pipe and roof substrate.
H. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set
with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-
inch total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-
inch total depression.
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
I. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if

supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated.
J. Fasten recessed-type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.
K. Install reinforcement for wall-mounting and recessed-type plumbing specialties.
L. Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or
globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations. Refer
to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe valves.
M. Install air vents at piping high points.
N. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.

O. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 15 Sections.
E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

F. Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 16 Sections.
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.
Solder joints of lead sheets 4-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and
skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around
sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing
into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain specialties.

SECTION 15745 - WATER-SOURCE HEAT PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of water-source heat pumps:
1. Horizontal and vertical units.
1. Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operation" for control sequences.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities for each model; shipping, installed, and operating
weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each type of product specified.
B. Shop Drawings: From manufacturer, detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and
location and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of water-source heat pumps certifying that the
products furnished comply with requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For water-source heat pumps to include in the maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain water-source heat pumps through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water-
source heat pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers'
systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."
WATER-SOURCE HEAT PUMPS 15745 - 1

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment specified in this Section that is
listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the NFPA 70, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
D. Test and rate water-source heat pumps according to ARI 320, "Water-Source Heat Pumps."
Provide ARI certification.
E. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
F. Comply with the minimum COP/efficiency levels according to ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient
Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Buildings."
G. Comply with NFPA 70.
H. Comply with safety requirements of UL 484, "Room Air Conditioners," for assembly of free-
delivery water-source heat pumps.
I. Comply with safety requirements of UL 559, "Heat Pumps," for duct-system connections.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of water-source heat pumps and suspension components
with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of
other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall
be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair
or replace components of water-source heat pumps that fail in materials or workmanship within
the specified warranty period.
C. Warranty Period:
1. General: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Compressor(s): Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

1. One set of matched fan belts for each belt-driven fan.

2. One set of filters for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide water-source heat pumps by

one of the following:
1. Carrier Corp.
2. McQuay International.
3. Trane Co. (The).
4. Water Furnace
5. Florida Heat Pump
2.2 HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL WATER-SOURCE HEAT PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, packaged water-source heat pumps consisting of

cabinet; sealed refrigerant circuit including compressor, refrigerant to water heat exchanger,
refrigerant to air heat exchanger, and reversing valve; evaporator fans; refrigeration and
temperature controls; filters; dampers; and isolation valves to allow servicing of components in
refrigeration circuit.
B. Cabinet: Manufacturer's standard galvanized-steel casing with the following features:
1. Access panels for inspection and access to internal parts.

2. Cabinet Insulation: Glass fiber insulation, 1/2 inch thick, 1.5-lb/cu. ft. density.
3. Knockouts for electrical and piping connections.
4. Condensate drain connection.
5. Construct cabinet with compartments, so compressor, reversing valve, and water coil are
out of air stream.
C. Evaporator Fans: Direct-driven, centrifugal fan with permanently lubricated motor.
D. Refrigerant-to-Water Heat Exchanger: Coaxial heat exchanger with inner copper water tube
and outer steel refrigerant tube.
E. Refrigerant-to-Air Heat Exchanger: Copper-tube coil with aluminum fins.
F. Reversing Valve: Manufacturer's standard control valve designed to be fail-safe in heating

position.
G. Compressor(s): Hermetic compressor(s) installed on vibration isolators and enclosed in

acoustically treated enclosure with built-in safeties as follows:
1. High-temperature cutouts.
2. Low-temperature cutouts.
3. Compressor motor overload protection.
4. Capability to reset compressor lockout circuit at either remote thermostat or circuit
breaker.

H. Refrigerant Piping Materials: Drawn-temper, Type ACR copper tube with wrought-copper
fittings and brazed joints. Insulate refrigerant piping with 3/8-inch- thick, flexible elastomeric
insulation.
1. Insulation Fire-Performance Rating: 25 flame-spread and 50 smoke-developed rating

according to ASTM E 84.
I. Unit Controls: Microprocessor controls with BACnet communication module.
J. Filters: Glass-fiber throwaway type, 1/2 inch thick, located in return-air stream.
K. Hangers: Isolate horizontal suspended units with vibration isolation hangers.
L. Factory-installed lubrication lines and external fittings extended for servicing fan bearings.
M. Hose Kit: 36 inches long by 1-inch- diameter hose with automatic self-balancing valve and
strainer.
N. Options and Accessories: Refer to the schedule on the drawings.
2.3 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units
before shipping.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test and rate heat exchangers for 400-psig refrigerant working pressure, minimum.
2.5 MOTORS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section “Motors.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,
other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of water-source heat
pumps. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine piping and electric rough installations for water-source heat pumps to verify actual
locations of piping connections before installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install water-source heat pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's
recommended clearances.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping Connections: Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows:
1. Connect supply and return piping to heat pump with unions and shutoff valves.
2. Connect heat-pump drain pan to nearest indirect waste connection, or as indicated.
B. Duct Connections: Connect supply and return ducts to heat pumps with flexible duct
connections. Provide transitions to match unit duct-connection size.
C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Replace filters used during construction.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to

supervise the field assembly of components and installation of water-source heat pumps,
including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

2. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup

services.
B. Operate fan motors and verify proper rotation and connections.
C. Operate controls and verify proper response to control inputs.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as

specified below:

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup

and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
2. Review data in the maintenance manuals.
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.

SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution
systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts include the
following:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall, round, and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.
3. Double-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.
4. Duct liner.
5. Drain pans.
1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-

mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NUSIG: National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and -
distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of
duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for
layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design
results without increasing system total pressure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Drawn to scale. Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts.
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,

components, and attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes.
3. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts.
4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
5. Fittings.
METAL DUCTS 15815 - 1

6. Reinforcement and spacing.

7. Seam and joint construction.
8. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
10. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels.
11. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration
isolation, and seismic restraints.
B. Coordination Drawings: Plans drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and
coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.

2. Ceiling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide access to
dampers and other operating devices.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-
-Steel," for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint
and seam welding.
B. NFPA Compliance:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
C. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations," Ch. 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having
G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces that will be
painted.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 DRAIN PANS
A. Emergency drain pans below HVAC units:
1. Galvanized steel: 20 gage minimum.

2. Size: Drain pan shall be 6” larger in width and length on each side of the unit.
3. Height: 4-inches.
4. Joints: Sealed watertight.
B. Emergency drain pans below piping:
1. Galvanized steel: 20 gage minimum.

2. Size: Drain pan shall be 4” wider on each side of the piping.
3. Height: Drain pan shall be 2” higher then the largest pipe.
4. Joints: Sealed watertight.
2.3 DUCT LINER
A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.
1. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent

erosion of glass fibers.
a. Thickness: 1 inch.
b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-
developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.
e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner
when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in
duct.
1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- tensile, dead-load test

perpendicular to duct wall.
2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without
projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream.
3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard
classification of duct liner system.
2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or
mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.
B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.
C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and
modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight
seal.
D. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when
cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.

E. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized

butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
F. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
G. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel

fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or

galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted
with zinc-chromate primer.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod
applications, and joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity

class required for pressure class.
2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using

manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint
reinforcement.
C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--

Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.

1. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class.

2. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger
and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts
are lined.
2.7 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct
liner is prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.
E. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless
duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12
inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches
longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have
either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at
the following locations:
1. Fan discharges.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than 2500
fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.
2.8 SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION

1. Lindab Inc.
2. McGill AirFlow LLC.
3. SEMCO Incorporated.
4. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
B. Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a
circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.
C. Round, Longitudinal- and Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

D. Flat-Oval, Longitudinal- and Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Fabricate ducts larger
than 72 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.
E. Duct Joints:
1. Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before

and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.
2. Ducts 21 to 72 Inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two
internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket.
3. Ducts Larger Than 72 Inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per SMACNA
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2.
4. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM
rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer's
tolerances.
5. Flat-Oval Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of two flanges and one
synthetic rubber gasket.
F. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for
longitudinal-seam straight ducts.
G. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess
material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.
H. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die-
formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow
construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg:
a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.

b. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.
d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.
3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg:
a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.

b. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.
d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.
4. Flat-Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness as

longitudinal-seam flat-oval duct.
5. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material-
handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit
using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.
6. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and
90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate

nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored

construction.
7. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for
30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
8. Round Elbows Larger Than 14 Inches in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate
gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.
9. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All Pressures 0.040 inch
thick with 2-piece welded construction.
10. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
11. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal-seam flat-oval duct specified
above.
12. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches in Diameter and Pressures through 10-Inch
wg: 0.022 inch.
2.9 DOUBLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS

1. Lindab Inc.
2. McGill AirFlow LLC.
3. SEMCO Incorporated.
4. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the
round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension) of the inner duct.
C. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on static-pressure class unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round
Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-
support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."
a. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.
2. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and
Fittings," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved,
duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."
a. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded

longitudinal seams.
b. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt-
welded longitudinal seams.
3. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals,"

and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing
requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
D. Inner Duct: Minimum 0.028-inch perforated galvanized sheet steel having 3/32-inch- diameter
perforations, with overall open area of 23 percent.
E. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or
NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean
temperature.
2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without
compressing insulation.
3. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating.
4. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1.
F. Interstitial Insulation: Flexible elastomeric duct liner complying with ASTM C 534, Type II for
sheet materials, and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean
temperature.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS
A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the

following:
1. Supply Ducts: 3-inch wg.

2. Supply Ducts (before Air Terminal Units): 4-inch wg.
3. Supply Ducts (after Air Terminal Units): 2-inch wg.
4. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg.
5. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg.
B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel.
C. The following ductwork shall be double-wall round:
1. Exposed return air ductwork.
D. The following ductwork shall have liner:
1. Exposed outside air ductwork.
3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal
and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings.

C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure
couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3
screws in each coupling.
F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions
unless specifically indicated.
J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts,
and similar finished work.
K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward
to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or
duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on
4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and
smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials
and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop
Systems."
O. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to equipment,
seismic force required by applicable building codes. Refer to SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint
Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." and NUSIG.
P. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow
SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."
Q. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream of registers
and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized-steel
primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting
Sections.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use
two-part tape sealing system.
C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When
welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds,
and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,
hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.
3.4 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.
1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints.
B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
3.5 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.
B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.
C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure
(proof-test) load.
D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
E. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches thick.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct
Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for branch,
outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.7 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have
duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.
Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
B. Paint exposed ductwork. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in
Division 9 painting Sections.
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports:
1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage

testing and for compliance with test requirements.
2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section
being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum
system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating
pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round
and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower
than and equal to 2-inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Class 6
for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg.
4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum
allowable.
3.9 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS
A. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform
cleaning before air balancing.
B. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.
1. Create other openings to comply with duct standards.

2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
3. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process.
C. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed from HVAC
systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into
building.
D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply
and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive
assemblies.
3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air
wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers,
filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.
5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical
equipment rooms.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants
from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect
vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under
negative pressure.
3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without
damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner
to get wet.
5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.
Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and
straighten fins.
F. Cleanliness Verification:
1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.

2. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts.

SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Turning vanes.
4. Duct-mounting access doors.
6. Flexible ducts.
7. Duct accessory hardware.
1. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for duct-mounting fire and smoke detectors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Turning vanes.
4. Duct-mounting access doors.
6. Flexible ducts.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Special fittings.
2. Manual-volume damper installations.
3. Motorized-control damper installations.
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-
mounting items. Show ceiling-mounting access panels and access doors required for access to
duct accessories.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 1

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having
G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces that will be
painted.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with center-pivoted blades of

maximum 6-inch width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree
stop, steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential
static pressure.
B. Frame: 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.
C. Blades: 0.052-inch- thick galvanized sheet steel.
D. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
E. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
F. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
G. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
2.3 VOLUME DAMPERS
A. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen
damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed
position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct
consistent with pressure class.
1. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with
axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

B. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as

indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or
vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch
thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching
to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.
3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
4. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze.
5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
2.4 MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS
1. Refer to Division 15 Section “HVAC Instrumentation and Controls.”
2.5 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible"
for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- wide, single-vane, curved blades of

galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches
o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces
and fibrous-glass fill.
2.6 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS
A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with
insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where
indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
1. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
2. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:
a. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks.

b. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c. Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside
and inside handles.
d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches and Larger: One additional hinge.
C. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with
insulation fill and 1-inch thickness. Include cam latches.
1. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with spin-in notched frame.
D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.

E. Insulation: 1-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives

complying with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to
two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick
aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.
C. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
D. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,
synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd..

2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.
2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.
B. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with
a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size.
2.9 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to
suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories
in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts,
and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated.
D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths
from branch takeoff.
F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and
terminal units as follows:
1. On both sides of duct coils.

2. Downstream from volume dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.
3. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum
50-foot spacing.
4. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.
H. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.
I. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter.

2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter.
3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches in diameter.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches in diameter.
5. Body Access: 24 inches in diameter.
J. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
K. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and
motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.
L. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch
lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
M. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with flexible duct clamps or liquid adhesive plus tape.

N. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing."

SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. In-line centrifugal fans.
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
intended use.
POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - 1

B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. In-Line Centrifugal Fans:
a. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.

b. Barry Blower Div./Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.
c. Carnes Company HVAC.
d. Cook, Loren Company.
e. Greenheck Fan Corp.
f. Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.
2.2 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Description: In-line, direct-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide
vanes, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, mounting brackets,
and accessories.
B. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and
support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
C. Direct-Driven Units: Motor encased in housing outside of airstream, factory wired to disconnect
switch located on outside of fan housing.
D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.

E. Accessories:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less
than 50 percent.
2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
3. Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1-inch mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame. Provide guard
for inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork.
2.3 MOTORS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B. Support units using restrained spring isolators having a static deflection of 1-inch.
C. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers.
D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical

Identification."
F. Install variable-speed controllers at corresponding fan (not on wall at normal switch height).
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section
"Duct Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment.

D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

A. Equipment Startup Checks:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and
adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators.
B. Starting Procedures:
1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm.

2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and
retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
E. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
F. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.
G. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
H. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements
are made.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust variable-speed controller for balancing.
C. Lubricate bearings.
3.5 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet.
B. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain power ventilators.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals.
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.

SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control
dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:

2.2 GRILLES AND REGISTERS
A. Adjustable Bar Register:
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Carnes.
b. Krueger.
c. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 - 1

d. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.

e. Titus.
f. Tuttle & Bailey.
2. Material: Steel.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.
4. Face Blade Arrangement: Adjustable vertical spaced.
5. Rear Blade Arrangement: Adjustable horizontal spaced.
6. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.
7. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed-blade assembly if specified on drawings.
B. Fixed Face Grille:
a. Carnes.
b. Krueger.
e. Titus.
f. Tuttle & Bailey.
2. Material: Steel.
4. Face Blade Arrangement: 45 degree fixed blade.
5. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.
6. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed-blade assembly if specified on drawings.
2.3 CEILING DIFFUSER OUTLETS
A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers:
a. Carnes.
b. Krueger.
e. Price Industries.
f. Titus.
g. Tuttle & Bailey.
2. Material: Steel.
4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches.
5. Face Style: Four cone.
6. Pattern: Fixed.
B. Perforated Diffuser:
a. Carnes.
b. Krueger.


e. Titus.
f. Tuttle & Bailey.
2. Material: Steel backpan and pattern controllers, with steel face.

4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches.
5. Duct Inlet: Round.
6. Face Style: Flush.
7. Pattern Controller: Adjustable curved blades at inlet.
8. Mounting: T-bar.
9. Dampers: Opposed blade if specified on drawings.
A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final
locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,
locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with
installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.

SECTION 15900 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control
components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.
1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for measuring equipment that relates to this
Section.
2. Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operation" for requirements that relate to this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct digital control.
B. I/O: Input/output.
C. LonWorks: A control network technology platform for designing and implementing interoperable
control devices and networks.
D. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.
E. PC: Personal computer.
F. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.
G. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Comply with the following performance requirements:
1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data
within 10 seconds.
2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data
within 8 seconds.
3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command
of a binary object and device reaction.
4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or
workstation within six seconds.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 1

5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds.

6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds,
but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.
7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan
and update process values and outputs at least once per second.
8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured
variables within tolerances as follows:
a. Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.

b. Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.
c. Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale.
d. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.
e. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.
f. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F.
g. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F.
h. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F.
i. Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 5 percent.
j. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale.
k. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.
l. Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale.
m. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01-inch wg.
n. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1-inch wg.
o. Carbon Monoxide: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.
p. Carbon Dioxide: Plus or minus 50 ppm.
q. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.
1.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Refer to Division 15 section “Sequence of Operations.”
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate
dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for
materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.
1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer,

and model number. Include technical data for interface equipment, control units,
transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and
operator interface equipment.
2. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device,
manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence
of operation including schematic diagram.
connection.
1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number.

2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control
devices.
4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.

5. Written description of sequence of operation.

6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics.
7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics.
8. DDC System Hardware:
a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers.

b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware.
c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk
data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit
locations.
9. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data
(connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.
10. Controlled Systems:
a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and
control elements graphically shown, with wiring.
b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including
bases and special construction.
c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.
d. Points list.
C. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system
component complies with ASHRAE 135.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device.
2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and
devices.
3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function.
4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration
tolerances.
5. Calibration records and list of set points.
A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who

is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.
intended use.
C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.

A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to
be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment
manufacturer.
B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans
and room details before installation.
B. Coordinate equipment with Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" to achieve compatibility with
equipment that interfaces with that system.
C. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:

2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Tridium/Vykon
B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software programmed to control mechanical
systems. The system serves data with dynamic color graphics for each mechanical system and
control device to a standard web browser via an Ethernet LAN or remotely over the internet.
2.3 DDC EQUIPMENT
A. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-
access memory, and backup power source.
1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from
other control units and devices.
2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions
include the following:

a. Global communications.
b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.
c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing.
e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and
controlled environment.
3. Standard Application Programs:
a. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy
switchover.
b. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing and
messaging; weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; and run-time totalization.
c. Remote communications.
d. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric).
B. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect
points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.
1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power.

2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second.
3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or
resistance signals.
4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally open
or normally closed operation.
5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current
(4 to 20 mA).
C. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit
connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current
and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:
1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.

2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50
percent load changes.
3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent
overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.
2.4 ELECTRONIC SENSORS
A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as
required.
B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:
1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point.

2. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
3. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by
temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft..
4. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible; use where prone to temperature
stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft..
5. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion
length of 2-1/2 inches.
6. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.

2.5 STATUS SENSORS
A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable
range of 0- to 5-inch wg.
B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable
pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump.
C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core
transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated
motor current.
D. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered
transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy.
E. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match
current and system output requirements.
F. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to
10-V dc, feedback signal.
G. Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating,

stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in
NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
2.6 GAS DETECTION EQUIPMENT
A. Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state infrared sensors;
suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 deg F and calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with
continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output;, for wall mounting.
2.7 ACTUATORS
A. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at
rated torque.
a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential
pressure.
3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:
a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.

b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.
c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper.
d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.
e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500
fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5.
f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000
fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0.

4. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.

5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
6. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual
gear release on nonspring-return actuators.
7. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.
8. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback
signal.
9. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.
10. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.
2.8 DAMPERS
A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch- minimum thick,

galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch- minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct
mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized steel with
maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches.
1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with
oil-impregnated sintered bronze blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated
steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust
bearings at each end of every blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene.
4. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable
rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less
than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper
is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.
2.9 CONTROL CABLE
A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring are specified in Division 16 Section "Voice
and Data Communication Cabling."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of programs
to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.
C. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:
1. Entrances.
2. Public areas.

3. Where indicated.
D. Install automatic dampers according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
E. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor
temperatures.
F. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Identification."
G. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15 Section
"Hydronic Piping."
H. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 15 Sections specifying air ducts.
I. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 16 Section "Voice and Data
Communication Cabling."
3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."
B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping
are exposed.
2. Install exposed cable in raceway.
3. Install concealed cable in raceway.
4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where
several cables follow a common path.
5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against
abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control
system, except local individual room control cables.
7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of
piping and equipment.
C. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in
field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating
operation with compatible signal generator.

4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control
set points are as required.
5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence
of operation. Adjust PID actions.
6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.
7. Test software and hardware interlocks.
C. DDC Verification:
1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks.
2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.
3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth,
and other applicable considerations.
4. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet
side is identified and that meters are installed correctly.
5. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.
6. Check DDC system as follows:
a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if
applicable.
b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and
approved tagging system.
c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.
d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.
D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Calibrating and Adjusting:
1. Calibrate instruments.
2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog
instrument.
3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and
instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument
being calibrated.
4. Control System Inputs and Outputs:
a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.

b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output.
c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire.
d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.
e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a
precision-resistant source.
5. Flow:
a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3-point
calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span.
b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact.
6. Temperature:

a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span

using a precision-resistance source.
b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.
7. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the
manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open
and closed.
8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's
recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed.
9. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system.
10. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of
instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.
B. Adjust initial temperature set points.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to
three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Demonstration and Training."

SECTION 15940 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each system automatically controlled, containing the
following information:
1. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, coils, dampers, valves, and control
devices.
2. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control.
3. Indicate each control panel required, with internal and external piping and wiring clearly
indicated. Provide detail of panel face, including controls, instruments, and labeling. Include
verbal description of sequence of operation.
B. Maintenance Data: Include copy of shop drawings in each maintenance manual.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.
B. VAV: Variable air volume.
1.5 MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
A. Water Source Heat Pumps
1. The on-board controls for the water source heat pumps shall provide the following
control, but not be limited to, the following:
a. The units shall automatically cycle on/off the refrigeration system, reversing valve,
and evaporator fan, as required, to maintain the desired space temperature as
selected at the temperature sensor.
b. A duct smoke detector (if the unit is equipped) shall automatically shut down the
unit if smoke is detected. The smoke detector shall be compatible with and be
connected to the fire alarm control panel.
c. The control shall provide operational sequencing, short cycle protection, random
start, emergency shutdown, high- and low-pressure switch monitoring, general
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 15940 - 1

lockout, low water coil temperature limit, fault retry, and condensate overflow
protection.
d. A BACnet communication module shall be provided for interface to the building
automation system.
B. DDC System shall obtain the points listed on sheet M7 from each water source heat pump
through the BACnet connection. In addition to managing the BACnet points, the DDC system
shall provide the following:
1. Water Source Heat Pumps
a. Scheduling for each water source heat pump.

b. Freeze Protection: Each unit shall shut down and generate an alarm upon
receiving a freezestat status.
c. Minimum Outside Air Ventilation – Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Control: When in the
occupied mode the outside air damper shall open to the minimum position and the
return air damper shall open proportionally. The controller shall measure the zone
CO2 levels and open the outside air damper up to the maximum outside air setting
as indicated on the schedule on sheet M1 and proportionally close the return air
dampers on rising CO2 concentrations, overriding normal damper
operation as CO2 concentrations rise above the adjustable setpoint.
2. Hydronic Pumps (P-1 and P-2)
a. The two loop water pumps shall operate in a lead/standby fashion. The lead pump
shall run first. On failure of the lead pump, the standby pump shall run and the
lead pump shall turn off.
b. The designated lead pump shall rotate upon one of the following conditions (user
selectable):
1) manually through a software switch

2) if pump runtime (adj.) is exceeded
3) User defined schedule for rotation
4) At each new start, the lead pump and standby pump shall swap.
c. The lead pump shall start any time that a compressor in HP-1, HP-2, or HP-4
starts. The pump shall have a minimum runtime of 15 minutes (adj).
3. Hydronic Pumps (P-3 and P-4)
a. The two loop water pumps shall operate in a lead/standby fashion. The lead pump
shall run first. On failure of the lead pump, the standby pump shall run and the
lead pump shall turn off.
b. The designated lead pump shall rotate upon one of the following conditions (user
selectable):
1) manually through a software switch

2) if pump runtime (adj.) is exceeded
3) User defined schedule for rotation
4) At each new start, the lead pump and standby pump shall swap.
c. The lead pump shall start any time that a compressor in HP-3, HP-5, HP-6, or HP-
7 starts. The pump shall have a minimum runtime of 15 minutes (adj).

C. Exhaust Fan EF-2 shall be controlled by a motion sensor in each restroom with an adjustable
timer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
1. Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.

b. Variable-air-volume systems.
2. Hydronic Piping Systems:
a. Constant-flow systems.
3. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings.

4. Existing systems TAB.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce
fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and
terminals, according to indicated quantities.
C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and
ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors,
and other pollutants.
D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high
air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn
from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
E. NC: Noise criteria.
F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable

results.
G. RC: Room criteria.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 1

H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
I. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a
closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
J. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.
K. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
L. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of
a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was
performance tested.
M. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
N. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the
distribution system.
O. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.
P. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting TAB procedures.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Within 15 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4 copies of
evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified
in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on
approved forms certified by TAB firm.
C. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms.
D. Warranties specified in this Section.
A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by AABC, NEBB, or TABB.
B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the
following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor’s forms approved by the Engineer.
D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5,

"Instrumentation."

E. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently
if required by instrument manufacturer.
1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the
name of party performing instrument calibration.
A. Owner Occupancy: Owner may or may not occupy the site and existing building during entire
TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist TAB activities.
B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on TAB contractor’s forms

stating that TAB contractor will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if
TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following
provisions:
1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation
limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of

Contract.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record

Documents."
D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance
data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired
or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate
system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under
conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the
factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201,
"Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design,"
Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and
fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
L. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe
penetrations and other holes are sealed.
M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
N. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing
fluid flows.
O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
P. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.

3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed
and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and
variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing
and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and
cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at indicated values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.
S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and
Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those
removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.
C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-
control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with

calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend

corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated
speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical
connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-
motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling,
full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum
required brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and
calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written

instructions and calculating factors.
D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances
of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the
dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end
of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct
variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check expansion tank liquid level.
3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow.

5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal
valves are kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-displacement
pumps:
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for
differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow
and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the
pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve
until indicated water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop

relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
percent greater than indicated flow.
E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated
flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.
G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing.
3.8 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.

2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper
operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers,
and nameplate data.
3.9 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic
temperature-control system.
B. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.10 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.
F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions
and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input
changes.
G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates
on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.11 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: 0 to plus 3 percent.
2. Air Inlets: 0 to plus 3 percent.
3. Air Outlets: Minus 3 percent to plus 3 percent.
4. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 3 percent.
5. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 3 percent.
3.12 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems
found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and
each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.13 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in

three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings
and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final
report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of TAB firm.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.
2. Motor Data:
a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.
f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
i. Outside airflow in cfm.
j. Return airflow in cfm.
k. Outside-air damper position.
l. Return-air damper position.
m. Vortex damper position.
G. Hydronic-Coil Test Reports:
1. Coil Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft.
h. Tube size in NPS.
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
a. Air flow rate in cfm.

b. Average face velocity in fpm.
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.
d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
h. Water flow rate in gpm.
i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
j. Entering-water temperature in deg F.
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
2. Motor Data:
a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
g. Number of belts, make, and size.
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.
I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data:
a. System and air-handling unit number.

b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.
e. Duct size in inches.
f. Duct area in sq. ft..
g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.
h. Indicated velocity in fpm.
i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.
j. Actual average velocity in fpm.
k. Barometric pressure in psig.
J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
1. Unit Data:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.

b. Location and zone.
c. Test apparatus used.
d. Area served.
e. Air-terminal-device make.
f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
g. Air-terminal-device type and model number.
h. Air-terminal-device size.
i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft..

a. Airflow rate in cfm.

b. Air velocity in fpm.
c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
e. Final airflow rate in cfm.
f. Final velocity in fpm.
g. Space temperature in deg F.
K. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-alone
refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing units, include
the following:
1. Unit Data:
b. Location.
c. Unit make and model number.
d. Compressor make.
e. Compressor model and serial numbers.
f. Refrigerant weight in lb.
g. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F.
a. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg.

b. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg.
c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F.
d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F.
e. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg F.
f. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg F.
g. Condenser-water temperature differential in deg F.
h. Condenser entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig.
i. Condenser leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig.
j. Condenser-water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
k. Control settings.
l. Unloader set points.
m. Low-pressure-cutout set point in psig.
n. High-pressure-cutout set point in psig.
o. Suction pressure in psig.
p. Suction temperature in deg F.
q. Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig.
r. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F.
s. Oil pressure in psig.
t. Oil temperature in deg F.
u. Voltage at each connection.
v. Amperage for each phase.
w. Kilowatt input.
x. Crankcase heater kilowatt.
y. Number of fans.
z. Condenser fan rpm.
aa. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm.
bb. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
cc. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection.
dd. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.

L. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and
include the following:
1. Unit Data:
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and size.
e. Model and serial numbers.
f. Water flow rate in gpm.
g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.
i. Pump rpm.
j. Impeller diameter in inches.
k. Motor make and frame size.
l. Motor horsepower and rpm.
m. Voltage at each connection.
n. Amperage for each phase.
o. Full-load amperage and service factor.
p. Seal type.
a. Static head in feet of head or psig.

b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.
c. Actual impeller size in inches.
d. Full-open flow rate in gpm.
e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.
f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.
g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.
h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.
i. Final water flow rate in gpm.
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
M. Indoor-Air Quality Measurement Reports for Each HVAC System:
1. HVAC system designation.

2. Date and time of test.
3. Outdoor temperature, relative humidity, wind speed, and wind direction at start of test.
4. Room number or similar description for each location.
5. Measurements at each location.
6. Observed deficiencies.
N. Instrument Calibration Reports:
1. Report Data:
a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.

3.14 INSPECTIONS AND APPROVAL
A. Inspection:
1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and
balance readings documented in the Final Report.
2. Randomly check the following for each system:
a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.

b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.
c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the
reading to the set point.
d. Measure sound levels at two locations.
e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations.
f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.
B. Approval of TAB Report:
1. After inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing and
balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, submit the report
for approval by the Engineer.
2. The Engineer shall review the report as a shop drawing.
3. If the measurements exceed the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
4. TAB firm shall recheck the “FAILED” measurements and make adjustments. Revise the
final report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final
report.

SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.
2. Common electrical installation requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce
headroom are indicated.
2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other
installations.
3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of
obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete,
masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished
surfaces or otherwise concealed.
D. Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so equipment and
systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful
interoperability.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 1


PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit
for wall-mounting items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange
and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with
these requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components

of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to
facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
E. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly.
A. Inspect installed sleeve and sleeve-seal installations and associated firestopping for damage
and faulty work.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 2

SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Identification for raceway and metal-clad cable.
2. Equipment identification labels.
3. Miscellaneous identification products.
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation
and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145.
Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock
washers.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 1

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to switches
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-)
high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where 2 lines of text are required,
use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label 4 inches (100
mm) high].
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards,
1) Provide framed, typed circuit breaker schedules with explicit descriptions
and identification of items controlled by each individual circuit breaker.
b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
c. Disconnect and Motor rated switches.
d. Fire alarm central panel and remote annunciator.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to
the location and substrate.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 2

SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

following:
1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
2. General Cable Corporation.
3. Senator Wire & Cable Company.
4. Southwire Company.
B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN
D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground
wire.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 1

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.
5. Tyco Electronics Corp.
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING

METHODS
A. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in

raceway.
B. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members,
and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

B. Splices are not permitted in feeder or branch runs less than 250 feet in length UON.
C. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
D. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
C. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Alflex Inc.
3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
5. Electri-Flex Co.
6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
7. Maverick Tube Corporation.
8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
9. Wheatland Tube Company.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 1

C. EMT: ANSI C80.3.
D. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:
NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and
environment in which installed.
1. Fittings for EMT: Steel, compression type.
G. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and
compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and
enhance their conductivity.
2.2 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

following:
1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
2. EGS/Appleton Electric.
3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
4. Hoffman.
5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.
6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
7. RACO; a Hubbell Company.
8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.
10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
2.3 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit
2. Concealed Conduit (less than 24” in length): LFMC
3. Other Concealed Conduit: EMT with compression fittings

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Comply with the following for indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit, less than 6’-0” above finished floor: Rigid steel conduit
2. Exposed Conduit, higher than 6’-0” above finished floor: EMT with compression fittings.
3. Concealed Conduit: EMT or metal-clad cable (see section 16120, Conductors and
Cables).
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
5. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, in damp or
wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch (16-mm) trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. EMT: Use compression fittings, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2
except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-
water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run.
E. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, where possible.
F. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
G. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings

to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
H. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot
of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C)
of temperature change.

I. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for
equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and
motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
J. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall.
3.3 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
B. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
C. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
D. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and
raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed.
E. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve
and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
F. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials.
G. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical

sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.

SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.

2. Snap switches Solid-state fan speed controls.
3. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.
4. Communications outlets.
5. Cord and plug sets.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Field quality-control test reports.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing
label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one
source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and
associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
intended use.
WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following

manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).

2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration

5-20R, and UL 498.
a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).
b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).
c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).
2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1,

NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when
device is tripped.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

a. Cooper; GF20.
b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.
2.4 CORD AND PLUG SETS
A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of
equipment being connected.
1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with
green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of
30 percent.

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for
connection.
2.5 SNAP SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way).
b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224
(four way).
c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four
way).
d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),
20AC4 (four way).
C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:

a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V.
b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V.
c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V.
d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.
2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."
D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

a. Cooper; 2221L.
b. Hubbell; HBL1221L.
c. Leviton; 1221-2L.
d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.
2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
2.6 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS
A. Telephone Outlet:
a. Cooper; 3560-6.
b. Leviton; 40649.
2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP;
TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.

2.7 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- (1-mm-) thick, satin-finished stainless steel
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and
labeled for use in "wet locations."
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-
resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
noted.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish
materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided
by riding against outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show
signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)
in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the
manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device
mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles to match existing, and on horizontally
mounted receptacles to the right.
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical
and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,
multigang wall plates.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served on inside of face
plate with durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
A. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

SECTION 16410 - CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include
dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features,
performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1. Current and voltage ratings.
2. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
3. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric
service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 1

3. Comply with NFPA 70E.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

following to be installed in the existing panelboard:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting
capacity to comply with available fault currents.
C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
D. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
2. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive circuit breaker for compliance with installation
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install circuit breakers in existing panelboard as indicated on the drawings.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

1. Provide type written panelboard schedules indicating the newly install circuit.
A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:

2. Replace malfunctioning circuit breakers and retest to demonstrate compliance.

SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device,
transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions
and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5. features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective
devices and auxiliary components.
6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper;
include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
C. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
PANELBOARDS 16442 - 1
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device that allows adjustments.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and

accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
A. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.
A. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner in writing no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission
received 48 hours prior to scheduled interruption.
3. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-
bolt inserts into bases.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match
box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
3. Finishes:
a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating
with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat
and thermosetting topcoat.
b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.
4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent
protective cover.
B. Incoming Mains Location: Top.
C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductors; bonded to box.
D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type.
4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at
opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary
appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit

current available at terminals.
2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

following manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include:
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C. Mains: Lugs only.
D. Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

following manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include:
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip
setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
materials.
c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or
have been subjected to water saturation.
C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards over 60” in height on concrete bases, 4-inch (100-
mm) nominal thickness.
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.
2. For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base
and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards.
5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
D. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
I. Comply with NECA 1.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs complying with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with

requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section “Electrical Identification."
C. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section
"Electrical Identification."
A. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
2. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
3. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Tests and Inspections:

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
C. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a report that identifies panelboards included and
that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken
and observations after remedial action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated/
C. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's

written instructions.
SECTION 16491 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material,
dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include
the following for each fuse type indicated:
1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, and ratings.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source
from single manufacturer.
C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size
and with system short-circuit current levels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following, but are not limited to, the following:
FUSES 16491 - 1
1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.

2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.
3. Littelfuse, Inc.
2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with
circuit voltages..
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically
damaged.
B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.
C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes
and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.
D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to
fuse ratings.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS
A. Cartridge Fuses:
1. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.
2. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
removing fuse.
FUSES 16491 - 2

Purcellville Roller Rink Alterations IFB PSR-09-02

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Purcellville Roller Rink Alterations IFB PSR-09-02

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

TOWN OF PURCELLVILLE

Purchasing Division, 130 East Main Street

INVITATION FOR BIDS

IFB SOLICITATION #: PSR-09-02

PURCELLVILLE ROLLER RINK

SWSG Shaffer, Wilson, Sarver & Gray, P.C.

Architecture and Engineering

MBP McDonough Bolyard Peck

DIVISION ZERO BIDDING DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION ONE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SWSG PN: 09-080 Phase 2 Page 1

Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls

DIVISION TWO SITE CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION THREE CONCRETE

DIVISION FOUR MASONRY

DIVISION FIVE METALS

DIVISION SIX WOOD AND PLASTICS

DIVISION SEVEN THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

DIVISION EIGHT DOOR AND WINDOWS

DIVISION NINE FINISHES

DIVISION TEN SPECIALTIES

SWSG PN: 09-080 Phase 2 Page 2

DIVISION TWELVE FURNISHINGS

DIVISION THIRTEEN SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION FIFTEEN MECHANICAL

DIVISION SIXTEEN ELECTRICAL

SWSG PN: 09-080 Phase 2 Page 3

INVITATION FOR BID

Purcellville Roller Skating Rink Alterations

McGraw Hill Construction / Dodge Plan Room

Reference: Bid No. IFB NO. PSR-09-02

February 23, 2010

Ladies and Gentlemen:

OWNER: shall mean the Town of Purcellville

ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER: shall mean the consultant assigned by the

SERVICES OR SERVICE OR WORKS OR WORK: shall mean Purcellville

CONTRACTOR: shall mean the successful Bidder assigned by the OWNER to

CONTRACT: shall mean the eventual Agreement to be signed between the

1.3 All Bids must be typed.

Phase 1 Geothermal field installation - 05/18/10 to 08/13/10

Phase 2 Remainder of work - 09/01/10 to 12/01/10

Capital Projects & Engineering Manager

1.8 A mandatory pre-bid meeting is scheduled for March 09 at 10:00 a.m. in

Section 1: Instructions to Bidders

Exhibit A: Form of Tender and Bid Form

Exhibit B: Schedule of Prices and Rates

Section 2: Supplementary Instructions to Bidders

Section 3: Contract Agreement

Section 4: General Contract Terms and Conditions

Section 5: General Conditions and Instructions to Bidders

Section 6: Supplementary Conditions to the Contract

Section 7: Appendix A through M:

Appendix A: Schedule of Work

Appendix B: Bidders References

Appendix D: Virginia Contractor's License

Appendix E: General Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens

Appendix F: Schedule of Proposed Subcontractors

Appendix G: Bid Bond

Appendix H: Payment Bond

Appendix I: Performance Bond

Appendix J: Notice of Award

Appendix K: Notice to Proceed

Appendix L: Change Order

Appendix M: Warranty Requirements